Owners Manual - ESD

Owners Manual - ESD
V40 CROSS
COUNTRY
WEB EDITION
Owners Manual
DEAR VOLVO OWNER
THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving
pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been
designed for the safety and comfort of you and
your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in
the world. Your Volvo has also been designed to
satisfy all current safety and environmental
requirements.
In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we
recommend that you familiarise yourself with the
equipment, instructions and maintenance information contained in this owner's manual.
Table of contents
00 Introduction
01 Safety
Important information................................. 6
Volvo and the environment....................... 10
Seatbelts ..................................................
Airbags......................................................
Activating/deactivating the airbag*...........
Side airbags (SIPS bags) .........................
Inflatable Curtain (IC) ...............................
WHIPS ......................................................
When the systems deploy ........................
Safety mode..............................................
Pedestrian airbag (Pedestrian Airbag)*.....
Child safety...............................................
02 Locks and alarm
16
19
22
24
25
26
28
29
30
32
Remote control key/key blade..................
Battery replacement, remote control
key/PCC*...................................................
Keyless*....................................................
Locking/unlocking.....................................
Child safety locks......................................
Alarm*.......................................................
00 01 02
2
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
44
50
52
56
62
63
Table of contents
03 Your driving environment
04 Driver support
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Instruments and controls.......................... 68
Volvo Sensus ........................................... 80
Key positions............................................ 81
Seats......................................................... 83
Steering wheel.......................................... 88
Lighting..................................................... 89
Wipers and washing................................ 101
Windows, rearview and door mirrors...... 104
Compass*............................................... 110
Alcolock*................................................. 111
Starting the engine.................................. 115
Starting the engine – external battery..... 117
Gearboxes............................................... 118
Start/Stop*.............................................. 125
All Wheel Drive - AWD*........................... 131
Foot brake............................................... 132
HDC Hill Descent Control....................... 134
Parking brake.......................................... 136
DSTC – Stability and traction control system.......................................................... 142
Road sign information - RSI*.................. 145
Speed limiter*.......................................... 148
Cruise control*........................................ 150
Adaptive cruise control*.......................... 152
Distance Warning*.................................. 163
City Safety™........................................... 166
Collision Warning with Auto Brake &
Pedestrian Detection*............................. 172
Driver Alert System*................................ 180
Driver Alert System - DAC*..................... 181
Driver Alert System - Lane Keeping Aid* 184
Park assist syst*...................................... 188
Park assist camera*................................ 191
Park Assist Pilot - PAP*.......................... 195
BLIS and CTA*........................................ 200
Menus and messages.............................
Menu source MY CAR............................
Climate control........................................
Engine and passenger compartment
heater*.....................................................
Additional heater*....................................
Trip computer.........................................
Adapting driving characteristics.............
Comfort inside the passenger compartment........................................................
03 04 05
206
209
217
228
232
234
242
243
HomeLink® *............................................ 137
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
3
Table of contents
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment......
Radio.......................................................
Media player...........................................
External audio source via AUX/USB*
input........................................................
07 During your journey
250
261
268
Recommendations during driving...........
Refuelling................................................
Fuel.........................................................
Loading...................................................
Cargo area..............................................
Driving with a trailer................................
Towing and recovery..............................
08 Wheels and tyres
298
301
303
306
309
311
317
General ...................................................
Changing wheels ...................................
Tyre pressure .........................................
Warning triangle and first-aid kit*............
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)* ........
322
326
330
331
332
06 07 08
272
Media Bluetooth®* ................................. 275
Bluetooth® handsfree*............................
Voice recognition* mobile phone............
TV*...........................................................
Remote control* .....................................
4
278
287
291
294
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Table of contents
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment...............................
Lamps.....................................................
Wiper blades and washer fluid................
Battery.....................................................
Fuses......................................................
Car care..................................................
10 Specifications
340
347
354
357
361
370
Type designations...................................
Dimensions and weights.........................
Engine specifications..............................
Engine oil................................................
Fluids and lubricants...............................
Fuel.........................................................
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure ........................................................
Electrical system.....................................
Type approval.........................................
Licenses..................................................
Symbols in the display............................
11 Alphabetical Index
378
380
384
385
387
390
Alphabetical Index.................................. 410
09 10 11
393
394
395
404
407
5
Introduction
Important information
Reading the Owner's Manual
Introduction
A good way of getting to know your new car
is to read the owner's manual, ideally before
your first journey. This will give you the
opportunity to familiarise yourself with new
functions, to see how best to handle the car
in different situations, and to make the best
use of all the car's features. Please pay attention to the safety instructions contained in the
manual.
The specifications, design features and illustrations in this owner's manual are not binding. We reserve the right to make modifications without prior notice.
©
Volvo Car Corporation
Option
All types of option/accessory are marked with
an asterisk*.
In addition to standard equipment, this manual also describes options (factory fitted
equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra equipment).
The equipment described in the owner's
manual is not available in all cars - they have
different equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and
national or local laws and regulations.
6
In the event of uncertainty over what is standard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo
dealer.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts appear if there is a risk of
injury.
IMPORTANT
"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of
damage.
These text messages are highlighted in the
owner's manual by means of the text being
slightly larger and printed in grey. Examples
of this are in menu texts and message texts in
the screen (e.g. Audio settings).
Decals
The car contains different types of decal
which are designed to convey important
information in a simple and clear manner. The
decals in the car have the following descending degree of importance for the warning/
information.
Warning for personal injury
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of features and functions for
example.
Footnote
There is footnote information in the owner's
manual that is located at the bottom of the
page. This information is an addition to the
text that it refers to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a table then letters are
used instead of numbers for referral.
Message texts
Text messages can be shown in the combined instrument panel and in the screen.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G031590
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,
white text/image on black message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger
Introduction
Important information
which, if the warning is ignored, may result in
serious personal injury or fatality.
Information
Procedure lists
Procedures where action must be taken in a
certain sequence are numbered in the
owner's manual.
Risk of property damage
When there is a series of illustrations for
step-by-step instructions each step is
numbered in the same way as the corresponding illustration.
G031592
G031593
There are numbered lists with letters
adjacent to the series of illustrations
where the order of the instructions is not
significant.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger
which, if the warning is ignored, may result in
damage to property.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated
in the owner's manual should be exact
replicas of those in the car. They are
included to show their approximate
appearance and location in the car. The
information that applies to your particular
car is available on the respective decals
for your car.
Arrows appear numbered and unnumbered and are used to illustrate a movement.
Arrows with letters are used to clarify a
movement when the reciprocal order is of
no relevance.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-bystep instructions then the different steps are
numbered with normal numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used
in overview images where different components are pointed out. The number
recurs in the position list featured in connection with the illustration that describes
the item.
7
Introduction
Important information
Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Example:
•
•
Coolant
Engine oil
Images
The manual's images are sometimes schematic and may deviate from the car's appearance depending on equipment level and market.
To be continued
}} This symbol is located furthest down to
the right when a section continues on the following page.
Recording data
Your vehicle contains a number of computers
whose function is to continuously check and
monitor the vehicle's operation and functionality. Some of the computers can record
information during normal driving if they
detect an error. In addition, information is
recorded in the event of a collision or incident. Parts of the recorded information are
required so that technicians can diagnose
and rectify faults in the vehicle during servicing and maintenance and so that Volvo can
8
fulfil legal requirements and other regulations.
In addition to this, the information is used for
research purposes by Volvo in order to continually develop quality and safety, as the
information can contribute to a better understanding of the factors that cause accidents
and injuries. The information includes details
of the status and functionality of various systems and modules in the vehicle with regard
to engine, throttle, steering and brake systems, amongst other things. This information
may include details regarding the way the
driver drives the vehicle, such as vehicle
speed, brake and accelerator pedal use,
steering wheel movement and whether or not
the driver and passengers have used their
seatbelts. For the reasons given this information may be stored in the vehicle's computers
for a certain length of time, but also as a
result of a collision or incident. This information may be stored by Volvo as long as it can
help to further develop and further enhance
safety and quality and as long as there are
legal requirements and other regulations that
Volvo needs to consider.
Volvo will not contribute to the above-described information being disclosed to third parties without the vehicle owner's consent.
However, due to national legislation and regulations Volvo may be required to disclose
such information to authorities such as police
authorities, or others who may assert a legal
right to have access to it.
To be able to read and interpret the information recorded by the computers in the vehicle
requires special technical equipment that
Volvo, and workshops that have entered into
agreements with Volvo, have access to. Volvo
is responsible that the information, which is
transferred to Volvo during servicing and
maintenance, is stored and handled in a
secure manner and that the handling complies with applicable legal requirements. For
further information - contact a Volvo dealer.
Accessories and extra equipment
The incorrect connection and installation of
accessories can negatively affect the car's
electrical system. Certain accessories only
function when their associated software is
installed in the car's computer system. Volvo
therefore recommends that you always contact an authorised Volvo workshop before
installing accessories which are connected to
or affect the electrical system.
Introduction
Important information
Change of ownership for cars with
Volvo On Call*
Volvo On Call is a supplemental service that
consists of safety, security and comfort services. If the car has Volvo On Call and there is
a change of owner, it is very important that
these services are discontinued so that the
former owner cannot access the services in
the car. Contact an authorised Volvo dealer in
the event of a change of ownership.
Information on the Internet
At www.volvocars.com there is further information concerning your car.
A QR code reader is required to read the QR
code, which is available as a supplemental
program for several mobile phones. The QR
code reader can be downloaded from App
Store or Google Play.
QR code
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
9
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
G000000
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corporation's core values which influence all
operations. We also believe that our customers share our consideration for the environment.
Your Volvo complies with strict international
environmental standards and is also manufactured in one of the cleanest and most
resource-efficient plants in the world. Volvo
Car Corporation has global ISO certification,
which includes the environmental standard
ISO 14001 covering all factories and several
of our other units. We also set requirements
10
for our partners so that they work systematically with environmental issues.
Fuel consumption
Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption in each of their respective classes. Lower
fuel consumption generally results in lower
emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
It is possible for the driver to influence fuel
consumption. For more information read
under the heading, Reducing environmental
impact.
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the
concept "Clean inside and out" – a concept
that encompasses a clean interior environment as well as highly efficient emission control. In many cases the exhaust emissions are
well below the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger
compartment
A passenger compartment filter prevents dust
and pollen from entering the passenger compartment via the air intake.
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS*
(Interior Air Quality System) ensures that the
incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traffic outside.
discharges into the environment. Our workshop staff have the knowledge and the tools
required to guarantee good environmental
care.
The system consists of an electronic sensor
and a carbon filter. The incoming air is monitored continuously and if there is an increase
in the level of certain unhealthy gases such as
carbon monoxide then the air intake is
closed. Such a situation may arise in heavy
traffic, queues and tunnels for example.
Reducing environmental impact
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level
ozone and hydrocarbons is prevented by the
carbon filter.
You can easily help reduce environmental
impact - here are a few tips:
•
•
•
Drive economically - think ahead.
•
If the car is equipped with an engine
block heater*, use it before starting from
cold - it improves starting capacity and
reduces wear in cold weather and the
engine reaches normal operating temperature more quickly, which lowers consumption and reduces emissions.
Interior
The interior of a Volvo is designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even for people with
contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.
Extreme attention has been given to choosing
environmentally-compatible materials.
Volvo workshops and the environment
Regular maintenance creates the conditions
for a long service life and low fuel consumption for your car. In this way you contribute to
a cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops are entrusted with the service and
maintenance of your car it becomes part of
our system. Volvo makes clear demands
regarding the way in which our workshops
are designed in order to prevent spills and
Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off
the engine when stationary for longer
periods. Pay attention to local regulations.
Perform service and maintenance in
accordance with the owner's manual's
instructions - follow the Service and Warranty Booklet's recommended intervals.
•
High speed increases consumption considerably due to increased wind resistance - a doubling of speed increases
wind resistance 4 times.
•
Always dispose of environmentally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oils, in
an environmentally safe manner. Consult
a workshop in the event of uncertainty
about how this type of waste should be
discarded - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Following this advice can save money, the
planet's resources are saved, and the car's
durability is extended. For more information
and further advice, see the pages 298 and
390.
Recycling
As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it is
important that the car is recycled in an environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
car can be recycled. The last owner of the car
is therefore requested to contact a dealer for
referral to a certified/approved recycling
facility.
The owner's manual and the
environment
The Forest Stewardship Council® symbol
shows that the paper pulp in this publication
comes from FSC® certified forests or other
controlled sources.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
11
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
12
Introduction
13
Seatbelts ................................................................................................
Airbags....................................................................................................
Activating/deactivating the airbag*.........................................................
Side airbags (SIPS bags) .......................................................................
Inflatable Curtain (IC) .............................................................................
WHIPS ....................................................................................................
When the systems deploy ......................................................................
Safety mode............................................................................................
Pedestrian airbag (Pedestrian Airbag)*...................................................
Child safety.............................................................................................
14
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
16
19
22
24
25
26
28
29
30
32
SAFETY
01 Safety
01
Seatbelts
General information
Correctly fitted seatbelt.
Heavy braking can have serious consequences if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that
all passengers use their seatbelts.
The locking tab at the centre rear seat only
fits into the intended seatbelt buckle.
It is important that the seatbelt lies against
the body so it can provide maximum protection. Do not lean the backrest too far back.
The seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal seating position.
Releasing the seatbelt
Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle
and then let the belt retract. If the seatbelt
does not retract fully, feed it in by hand so
that it does not hang loose.
Putting on a seatbelt
Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by
pressing its locking tab into the seatbelt
buckle. A loud "click" indicates that the belt
has locked.
16
Seatbelt height adjustment. Press the button and
move the belt vertically. Position the belt as high
as possible without it chafing against your throat.
The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
Incorrectly fitted seatbelt. The belt must rest on
the shoulder.
•
•
•
if it is pulled out too quickly
during braking and acceleration
if the car leans heavily.
01 Safety
Seatbelts
Make sure that you:
•
do not use clips or anything else that can
prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly
•
ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or
caught on anything
•
the hip strap must be positioned low
down (not over the abdomen)
•
tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt up towards
the shoulder.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a
seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly,
this may diminish the protection provided
by the airbag in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact
an authorised Volvo workshop.
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a
major load, such as in conjunction with a
collision, the entire seatbelt must be
replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective
properties may have been lost even if the
seatbelt does not appear damaged. The
seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows
signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt
must be type-approved and designed for
installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt.
Seatbelts and pregnancy
WARNING
The seatbelt should always be worn during
pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in
the correct way. The diagonal section should
wrap over the shoulder then be routed
between the breasts and to the side of the
abdomen.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs
and as low as possible under the abdomen. –
It must never be allowed to ride upward.
Remove the slack from the seatbelt and
ensure that it fits as close to the body as possible. In addition, check that there are no
twists in the seatbelt.
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers should adjust their seats and steering
wheel such that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive (which means
that they must be able to easily operate the
foot pedals and steering wheel). The aim
should be to position the seat with as large a
distance as possible between abdomen and
steering wheel.
G020998
Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.
01
17
01 Safety
01
Seatbelts
Seatbelt reminder
Rear seat
Seatbelt tensioner
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
The seatbelts on the driver’s side, the passenger side and at the outer rear seats are fitted with seatbelt tensioners. A mechanism in
the seatbelt tensioner tightens the seatbelt in
the event of a sufficiently violent collision. The
seatbelt then provides more effective restraint
for the occupants.
•
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten their seatbelts by means of an audio and
visual reminder. The audio reminder is speed
dependent, and in some cases time dependent. The visual reminder is located in the roof
console and in the combined instrument
panel.
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
reminder system.
18
•
Provides information on which seatbelts
are being used in the rear seat. A message appears in the combined instrument
panel when the seatbelts are in use, or if
one of the rear doors has been opened.
The message is acknowledged automatically after approximately 30 seconds driving or after pressing the indicator stalk's
OK button. If anyone is unbelted then the
message can only be acknowledged
manually by pressing the indicator stalk's
OK button.
Provides a warning if one of the rear seatbelts is unfastened during travel. This
warning takes the form of a message in
the combined instrument panel along with
the audio/visual signal. The warning stops
when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can
also be acknowledged manually by
pressing the OK button.
The combined instrument panel's information
display, see page 71, shows which seatbelts are in use. This information is always
available.
WARNING
Never insert the tongue of the passenger's
seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's
side. Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into the buckle on the correct side. Do
not make any damages on seatbelts nor
insert any foreign objects into a buckle.
The seatbelts and buckles would then
possibly not function as intended in the
event of a collision. There is a risk of
serous injury.
01 Safety
Airbags
Analogue combined instrument panel.
control key in key position II, fault tracing is
performed each time the ignition is switched
on. The symbol clears after
approx. 6 seconds provided the airbag system is fault-free.
The warning symbol is shown if a fault is
detected during fault tracing or if a system
has been activated. Where required, the
warning symbol is shown together with a
message in the information display. If the
warning symbol malfunctions, the warning triangle illuminates and SRS airbag Service
required or SRS airbag Service urgent
appears in the display. Volvo recommends
that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.
Airbag system
G018665
Warning symbol in combined
instrument panel
01
Airbag system viewed from above, left-handdrive car.
Digital combined instrument panel.
The warning symbol in the combined instrument panel is switched on with the remote
If the warning symbol for the airbag system remains illuminated or illuminates
while driving, it means that the airbag system does not have full functionality. The
symbol indicates a fault in the airbag system, the belt tensioner system, SIPS, the
IC system or some other fault in the system. Volvo recommends that you contact
an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.
G018666
WARNING
Airbag system viewed from above, right-handdrive car.
19
01 Safety
01
Airbags
The system consists of airbags and sensors.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the airbag(s) are inflated and become
hot. The airbag cushions the initial collision
impact for the occupant. The airbag deflates
when compressed by the collision. When this
occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is
completely normal. The entire process,
including inflation and deflation of the airbag,
occurs within tenths of a second.
Airbags on the driver's side
Passenger airbag
The car has two airbags to supplement the
protection afforded by the seatbelt on the
driver's side. One of the airbags is folded up
in the centre of the steering wheel (see the
illustration on page 19); the steering wheel is
labelled AIRBAG.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop for repair.
Defective work in the airbag system could
cause malfunction and result in serious
personal injury.
Location of the front passenger airbag in a lefthand drive car.
NOTE
The detectors react differently depending
on the nature of the collision and whether
or not the seatbelts are fastened. Applies
to all seatbelt positions apart from centre
seat rear.
It is therefore possible that only one (or
none) of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The detectors sense the force of the
collision on the vehicle and the action is
adapted accordingly so that one or more
airbags are deployed.
20
Knee airbag on the driver's side in a left-handdrive car.
The second airbag (at knee level) is fitted in
the lower part of the instrument panel on the
driver's side; this panel is labelled AIRBAG.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by
the airbags in the event of a collision.
Location of the front passenger airbag in a righthand drive car.
01 Safety
Airbags
The car has an airbag to supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt on the passenger side. It is folded up into a compartment above the glovebox. Its cover panel is
marked AIRBAG.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by
the airbag in the event of a collision.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and
backs against the backrest. Seatbelts
must be secured.
01
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated.
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front
of the front passenger seat.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever
sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag
is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life.
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the
dashboard where the passenger airbag is
located.
21
01 Safety
01
Activating/deactivating the airbag*
Key switch off - PACOS*
General information
The airbag for the front passenger seat can
be deactivated if the car is equipped with a
switch, PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off
Switch). For information on how to activate/
deactivate, see under the heading Activating/
deactivating.
Key switch off/switch
The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)
is located on the passenger end of the instrument panel and is accessible when the passenger door is open (see under the heading
below, Activating/deactivating).
Check that the switch is in the required position. The remote control key's key blade
should be used to change position.
For information on the key blade, see
page 48.
WARNING
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger the lives of passengers in
the car.
22
WARNING
Activating/deactivating
If the car is equipped with a front passenger airbag, but does not have a PACOS
switch (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch),
then the airbag will always be activated.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated and the symbol
in
the roof console is illuminated. Failure to
follow this advice could endanger the life
of the child.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front passenger seat if the message in the roof console (see page 23) indicates that the airbag is deactivated, at the same time as the
warning symbol for the airbag system is
shown in the combined instrument panel.
This indicates that there has been a severe
malfunction. Visit a workshop as soon as
possible. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Position of airbag label plus switch.
The airbag is activated. With the switch in
this position, persons taller than 140 cm
can sit in the front passenger seat, but
never children in a child seat or on a
booster cushion.
The airbag is deactivated. With the switch
in this position, children in a child seat or
on a booster cushion can sit in the front
passenger seat, but never persons taller
than 140 cm.
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag*
WARNING
Activated airbag
Deactivated airbag
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is
activated.
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is
deactivated.
A text message and a warning symbol in the
roof console indicate that the airbag for the
front passenger seat is activated (see preceding illustration).
A text message and a symbol in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is deactivated (see preceding
illustration).
01
Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion on the front passenger
seat when the airbag is activated. This
applies to everyone shorter than 140 cm.
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit
in the front passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life.
NOTE
When the remote control key is in key
position II the warning symbol for the airbag is shown in the combined instrument
panel for approx. 6 seconds (see page 19).
Following which, the indicator in the roof
console is illuminated showing the correct
status for the front passenger seat airbag.
For more information about the different
key positions for the remote control key,
see page 81.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
23
01 Safety
01
Side airbags (SIPS bags)
Side airbag
Location
occupant and the door panel and thereby
cushions the initial impact. The airbag
deflates when compressed by the collision.
The side airbag is normally only deployed on
the side of the collision.
Child seats and side airbags
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the side airbag.
WARNING
In a side impact collision a large proportion of
the collision force is transferred by the SIPS
(Side Impact Protection System) to beams,
pillars, the floor, the roof and other structural
parts of the body. The side airbags at the
driver's and front passenger seats protect the
chest area and the hip and are an important
part of the SIPS.
Driver's seat, left-hand drive.
The SIPS bag system consists of two main
components, side airbag and sensors. The
side airbags are located in the front seat
backrests.
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.
The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags
and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision
trips the sensors and the side airbags are
inflated. The airbag inflates between the
24
•
Volvo recommends that repairs are
only carried out by an authorised Volvo
workshop. Defective work in the SIPSbag system could cause malfunction
and result in serious personal injury.
•
Do not put objects in the area between
the outside of the seat and the door
panel, since this area is required by
the side airbag.
•
Volvo recommends the use only of car
seat covers approved by Volvo. Other
seat covers may impede the operation
of the side airbags.
•
Side airbags are a supplement the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
01 Safety
Inflatable Curtain (IC)
Properties
01
WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
handles in the roof. The hook is only
designed for light clothing (not for solid
objects such as umbrellas for example).
Do not screw or install anything onto the
car's headlining, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended
protection. Volvo recommends that you
only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are
approved for placement in these areas.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain (IC) is a part of the SIPS
system. It is fitted in the headlining along both
sides of the roof and protects the car's occupants sitting in the outer seats. A sufficiently
violent collision trips the sensors and the
inflatable curtain is inflated. The inflatable
curtain helps to prevent the driver and passengers from striking their heads on the
inside of the car during a collision.
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm
under the top edge of the windows in the
doors. Otherwise, the intended protection
of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the headlining, may be compromised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to
the seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
25
01 Safety
01
WHIPS
Protection against whiplash injury –
WHIPS
The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) consists of energy absorbing backrests and specially designed head restraints in the front
seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end
collision, where the angle and speed of the
collision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an influence.
Correct seating position
For the best possible protection, the driver
and front seat passenger should sit in the
centre of the seat with as little space as possible between the head and the head
restraint.
Do not obstruct the WHIPS system
WARNING
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Properties of the seat
When the WHIPS system is deployed, the
front seat backrests are lowered backward to
alter the seating position of the driver and
front seat passenger. This reduces the risk of
whiplash injury.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
system yourself. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WHIPS system and child seats/booster
cushions
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the WHIPS system.
26
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the
driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the
WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat backrest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the
function of the WHIPS system.
01 Safety
WHIPS
01
WARNING
If a seat has been subjected to extreme
forces, such as due to a rear-end collision,
the WHIPS system must be checked.
Volvo recommends that it is checked by
an authorised Volvo workshop.
Part of the WHIPS system's protective
capacity may have been lost even if the
seats appear to be undamaged.
Do not place objects on the rear seat that may
prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop to have the
system checked even after a minor rearend collision.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the
corresponding front seat must be moved
forward so that it does not touch the
folded backrest.
27
01 Safety
01
When the systems deploy
When the systems deploy
System
System
Triggered
Seatbelt tensioner, front seat
In the event of a frontal
collision, and/or sideimpact collision, and/or
rear-end collision
and/or overturning
Seatbelt tensioner, rear
seatA
Airbags
In a frontal collision
and/or side-impact
accident and/or overturning
In a frontal
collisionB
(Steering wheel
airbag, knee airbag, passenger
airbag)
Side airbags
(SIPS)
In a side-impact accidentB
Triggered
Inflatable Curtain IC
In the event of a side
impact and/or overturning and/or some
frontal collisionsB
Whiplash protection WHIPS
In a rear-end collision
A
B
There is no seatbelt tensioner at the centre rear seat.
The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a
collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors
such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed
of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the
different safety systems of the car are activated.
If the airbags have deployed, the following is
recommended:
•
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends
that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with
deployed airbags.
•
Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to handle the
replacement of components in the car's
safety systems.
•
Always contact a doctor.
NOTE
The airbags and belt tensioner system are
deployed only once during a collision.
28
WARNING
The airbag system's control module is
located in the centre console. If the centre
console is drenched with water or other
liquid, disconnect the battery cables. Do
not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy. Recovering the car.
Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They
can make steering difficult. Other safety
systems may also be damaged. The
smoke and dust created when the airbags
are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/injury after intensive exposure. In case
of irritation, wash with cold water. The
rapid deployment sequence and airbag
fabric may cause friction and skin burns.
01 Safety
Safety mode
Driving after a collision
If the car is involved in a collision, the text
Safety mode See manual may appear on
the information display. This means that the
car has reduced functionality. Safety mode is
a protective state that is enforced when the
collision may have damaged any of the car's
vital functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors
for one of the safety systems, or the brake
system.
Attempting to start the car
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the
car. There must be no smell of fuel either.
Warning symbol in analogue combined instrument panel.
If everything seems normal and you have
checked for indications of fuel leakage, you
may attempt to start the car.
Remove the remote control key and open the
driver's door. If a message is now shown to
the effect that the ignition is on, press the
start button. Then close the door and reinsert
the remote control key. The car's electronics
will now try to reset themselves to normal
mode. Then try to start the car.
Warning symbol in digital combined instrument
panel.
If the message Safety mode See manual is
still shown on the display then the car must
not be driven or towed, but a vehicle recovery
service used instead. Even if the car appears
to be driveable, hidden damage may make
the car impossible to control once moving.
01
Moving the car
If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode
See manual has been reset, the car can be
moved carefully out of a dangerous position.
Do not move the car further than necessary.
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset
the electronics yourself if the car has been
in safety mode. This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as
normal. Volvo recommends that you
engage an authorised Volvo workshop to
check and restore the car to normal status
after Safety mode See manual has been
displayed.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt
to restart the car if it smells of fuel when
the Safety mode See manual message
is displayed. Leave the car at once.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its
location. Volvo recommends that it is
transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.
29
01 Safety
Pedestrian airbag (Pedestrian Airbag)*
01
Properties
WARNING
Folding the airbag (Pedestrian Airbag)
Do not fit any accessories or change anything in the front if the car is equipped with
airbag (Pedestrian Airbag). Incorrect intervention at the front may cause incorrect
function in the system and lead to serious
injury and damage to the car.
Volvo recommends that genuine wiper
arms are used and that you only use genuine parts for them.
Handling after activation
The airbag (Pedestrian Airbag) is fitted under
the bonnet near the windscreen. In the event
of a frontal collision with a pedestrian, the
sensors in the front bumper react and the airbag inflates if required based on the force of
the impact. The sensors are active at a speed
of approx. 20-50 km/h and an ambient temperature between -20 and +70°C.
If the airbag is activated (Pedestrian Airbag)
30
•
the rear part of the bonnet is raised and
locked in this position
•
•
the hazard warning flashers are activated
the brake system is prepared for the
upcoming emergency braking.
If any of the other airbags in the passenger
compartment were activated, the car remains
in safety mode, see page 29.
If only the pedestrian airbag was activated:
1. Move the car to a safe location as close
as possible.
2. Fold the airbag following the instructions
under the next heading "Folding the airbag (Pedestrian Airbag)".
3. Seek the nearest workshop.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that, after activation of
the airbag, you contact an authorised
Volvo workshop as soon as possible.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Airbag (Pedestrian Airbag)
Airbag housing
Velcro strap, passenger side
Velcro strap, driver's side
The airbag may feel warm and give off
smoke. This is normal. Fold the airbag as follows:
1. Find the Velcro strap on the
driver's side (4).
2. Gather the airbag fabric along its length
on the driver's side. Then fold the gathered fabric towards the centre. Wind the
Velcro strap (double sided) around as
much fabric as possible and fasten it.
01 Safety
Pedestrian airbag (Pedestrian Airbag)*
01
3. Press the rolled up portion of the airbag
into the airbag housing (2).
4. Repeat steps 1-3 for the passenger side.
It may be necessary to fold the gathered
fabric twice on this side in order to wind
the Velcro strap around it.
5. The airbag housing cover will be open
slightly. This is completely normal.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
31
01 Safety
Child safety
01
Children should sit comfortably and
safely
Volvo recommends that children travel in
rear-facing child seats until as late an age as
possible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and
then front-facing booster cushions/child seats
until up to 10 years of age.
NOTE
WARNING
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety products, contact the manufacturer
for clearer instructions.
Do not secure the straps of the child seat
to the seat's horizontal adjustment bar,
springs or the rails and beams under the
seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps.
Child seats
Look in the installation instructions for the
child seat for the correct fitting.
The position of a child in the car and the
choice of equipment are dictated by the
child's weight and size, for more information,
see page 34.
Location of child seats
You may place:
NOTE
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a
child to sit on the knee of a passenger.
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats,
booster cushions & attachment devices)
which is designed for your particular car.
Using Volvo's child safety equipment provides you with optimum conditions for your
child to travel safely in the car. Furthermore,
the child safety equipment fits and is easy to
use.
1
32
For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 22.
G020739
Regulations regarding the placement of
children in cars vary from country to country. Check what does apply.
Child seats and airbags are not compatible.
NOTE
When using child safety products it is
important to read the installation instructions included.
•
a child seat/booster cushion on the passenger seat, provided the passenger airbag is not activated1.
•
one or more child seats/booster cushions
in the rear seat.
Always fit child seats/booster cushions in the
rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated.
If a child is sitting on the front passenger seat
then he/she could suffer serious injury if the
airbag deploys.
01 Safety
Child safety
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever
sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag
(SRS) is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life.
WARNING
01
Label Airbag
Booster cushions/child seats with steel
braces or some other design that could
rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause
the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
Do not allow the upper section of the child
seat to rest against the windscreen.
The label becomes visible when the passenger
door is opened; see the illustration on page 22.
33
01 Safety
Child safety
01
Recommended child seats2
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag)
Group 0
Type approval: E1 04301146
Group 0+
(L)
max 13 kg
max 10 kg
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Centre rear
seat
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child
seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system.
max 10 kg
Group 0
Outer rear seat
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing
child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
(U)
Volvo infant
seat (Volvo
Infant Seat) rear-facing child
seat, secured
with the car's
seatbelt.
Type approval:
E1 04301146
(U)
Group 0
Child seats which are universally approved.A
Child seats which are universally approved.
max 10 kg
(U)
(U)
Group 0+
max 13 kg
2
34
With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
01 Safety
Child safety
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag)
Outer rear seat
Group 1
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible
Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
(L)
Group 1
Child seats which are universally approved.A
Child seats which are universally approved.
9-18 kg
(U)
(U)
Group 2
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible
Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
(L)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible
Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
Type approval: E5 04191
(U)
(U)
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster
Seat with backrest).
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat
with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
(UF)
9-18 kg
15-25 kg
Group 2
15-25 kg
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
01
Centre rear
seat
}}
35
01 Safety
Child safety
01
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag)
Outer rear seat
Group 2/3
Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster
Cushion with and without backrest).
Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster
Cushion with and without backrest).
Type approval: E5 04216
Type approval: E5 04216
(UF)
(UF)
15-36 kg
Centre rear
seat
L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.
B: Built-in child seats approved for this weight class.
A
Only for rear-facing child seat. Set the seat's backrest in upright position.
Child safety locks, rear doors
The controls for operating the rear door
power windows and the rear door opening
handles can be blocked from opening from
the inside. For more information, see
page 62.
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system
are located at the lower section of the rear
seat backrest, in the outer seats.
The location of the mounting points is indicated by symbols in the backrest upholstery
(see preceding illustration).
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to
the ISOFIX mounting points.
Size classes
Child seats are in different sizes – cars are in
different sizes. This means that not all child
36
01 Safety
Child safety
seats are suitable for all seats in all car models.
Consequently, there is a size classification for
child seats using the ISOFIX fixture system in
order to assist users in choosing the correct
child seat (see the following table).
Size
class
Description
A
Full size, front-facing child
seat
B
Reduced size (alt. 1), frontfacing child seat
B1
Reduced size (alt.2), front-facing child seat
Size
class
01
WARNING
Description
C
Full size, rear-facing child seat
D
Reduced size, rear-facing
child seat
E
Rear-facing infant seat
F
Transverse infant seat, lefthand
G
Transverse infant seat, righthand
Never place the child in the passenger
seat if the car is fitted with an activated airbag.
NOTE
If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classification, the car model must be included on
the vehicle list for the child seat.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo dealer for recommendations about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo
recommends.
Types of ISOFIX child seat
Type of child seat
Infant seat transverse
Weight
max 10 kg
Size class
Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat
Outer rear seat
F
X
X
G
X
X
37
01 Safety
01
Child safety
Type of child seat
Infant seat, rear-facing
Weight
max 10 kg
Size class
E
Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat
Outer rear seat
X
OK
(IL)
Infant seat, rear-facing
max 13 kg
E
X
OK
(IL)
D
X
OK
(IL)
C
X
OK
(IL)
Child seat, rear-facing
9-18 kg
D
X
OK
(IL)
C
X
OK
(IL)
38
01 Safety
Child safety
Type of child seat
Front-facing child seat
Weight
9-18 kg
Size class
B
01
Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat
Outer rear seat
X
OKA
(IUF)
B1
X
OKA
(IUF)
A
X
OKA
(IUF)
X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.
IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.
A
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
}}
39
01 Safety
01
Child safety
Upper mounting points for child seats
NOTE
In cars with a cargo cover over the luggage compartment, this must be removed
before child seats can be attached to the
securing points.
For detailed information on how the child seat
should be tensioned in the upper mounting
points, see the seat manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING
The car is equipped with upper mounting
points for certain front-facing child seats.
These mounting points are located on the
rear of the seat.
The upper mounting points are primarily
intended for use with front-facing child seats.
Volvo recommends that small children should
sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age
as possible.
NOTE
Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate fitting this type of child seat in cars
with folding head restraints on the outer
seats.
40
The child seat's straps must always be
drawn through the hole in the head
restraint leg before they are tensioned at
the attachment point.
01 Safety
01
41
Remote control key/key blade................................................................
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*......................................
Keyless*..................................................................................................
Locking/unlocking...................................................................................
Child safety locks....................................................................................
Alarm*......................................................................................................
42
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
44
50
52
56
62
63
LOCKS AND ALARM
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
General
02
The car is supplied with two remote control
keys - standard or with keyless function. They
are used to start/switch off the car and for
locking/unlocking.
The remote control key contains a removable
key blade made of metal. The visible section
is available in two versions so that it is possible to distinguish between the remote control
keys.
Additional remote control keys can be
ordered - up to six can be programmed and
used for the same car.
There are four remote control key variants:
•
•
•
•
Remote control key, standard1
Remote control key with Keyless start1
Remote control key with Keyless drive1
PCC with Keyless drive 2
For information on remote control key function buttons see page 46.
PCC plus remote control key with keyless
function has extended functionality compared
with standard remote control key. The rest of
1
2
3
4
44
5-button key
6-button key
Only in combination with power driver's seat and power mirrors.
Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.
this chapter describes functions available in
all variants.
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Remember to switch off the supply to the
power windows by removing the remote
control key if the driver leaves the car.
Loss of a remote control key
If you lose a remote control key then a new
one can be ordered at a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
The remaining remote control keys must then
be taken to the workshop. The code of the
missing remote control key must be erased
from the system as a theft prevention measure.
The current number of keys registered to the
car can be checked in the menu system MY
CAR under Information Number of keys.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 209.
Key memory3 - door mirrors, driver’s
seat and steering force
The settings are automatically connected to
each respective remote control key, see
pages 84, 106 and 242. When locking with
the remote control key the setting of the combined instrument panel's theme is saved in
the key, see pages 72 and 211.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Car key memory.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 209.
For remote control keys with keyless function,
see page 52.
Indicator for locking/unlocking
When the car is locked or unlocked using the
remote control key, the direction indicators
confirm that locking/unlocking was correctly
performed.
•
Locking - one flash and the door mirrors
are folded4 in.
•
Unlocking - two flashes and the door mirrors are folded4 out.
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
NOTE
Lock indicator
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key in the car.
When locking, indication is given only if all
locks have been locked and all doors are
closed. Indication is given when the last door
has been closed.
Selecting the function
Different options for indicating locking/
unlocking with light can be set in the car's
menu system, see page 209.
Search in the menu system MY CAR for
Settings Car settings Light settings
and select Door lock confirmation light
and/or Unlock confirmation light.
Same LED as alarm indicator, see page 63.
A flashing LED by the windscreen verifies that
the car is locked.
NOTE
Cars that are not equipped with alarm also
have this indicator.
Immobiliser
Each remote control key has a unique code.
The car can only be started with the correct
remote control key with the correct code.
Message
Specification
Insert car
key
Error when reading the
remote control key during
starting - Remove the key
from the ignition switch,
press it in again and make a
new start attempt.
Car key
not found
Error reading the remote
control key during starting Try to start again.
(Applicable
only to cars
with Keyless Drive,
see
page 54.)
Immobiliser Try to
start again
02
If the error persists: Insert
the remote control key into
the ignition switch and try
to start again.
Error in immobiliser system
during starting. If the error
persists: Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
For starting the car, see page 115.
The following error messages in the combined instrument panel's information display
are related to the electronic immobiliser:
45
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
Functions
Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to open
all windows simultaneously.
02
The function can be changed from unlocking
all doors simultaneously, to unlocking the
driver's door only with one press of the button and, after a further press of the button within 10 seconds - unlocking the remaining
doors.
5-button remote control key
Remote control key with PCC* - Personal Car
Communicator.
Information
Locking
Unlocking
Function buttons
Approach light duration
Locking – Locks the doors and tailgate
while the alarm is activated.
Tailgate
Panic function
Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to close
all windows simultaneously.
WARNING
If windows are closed using the remote
control key, check that nobody's hands
are trapped.
Unlocking – Unlocks the doors and tailgate while the alarm is deactivated.
46
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The function can be changed in the menu
system MY CAR under Settings Car
settings Lock settings Doors unlock
with both the alternatives All doors and
Driver door, then all. For a description of
the menu system, see page 209.
Approach light duration – Used to
switch on the car's lighting at a distance. For
more information, see page 97.
Tailgate - Unlocks and disarms the
alarm for the tailgate only. For more information, see page 58.
Panic function – Used to attract attention in an emergency.
Press and hold the button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds to
activate the direction indicators and the horn.
The function can be turned off with the same
button once it has been active for at least
5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
off automatically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds.
Unique PCC functions*
If any of the other buttons are pressed
during this time then the reading is
interrupted.
Range
The remote control key's functions have a
range of about 20 m from the car.
NOTE
If none of the indicator lamps illuminates with repeated use of the information
button and in different locations (as well as
after 7 seconds and after the light has
travelled around on the PCC), contact a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
If the car does not verify a button being
pressed - move closer and try again.
NOTE
The remote control key functions may be
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions, etc.
The car can always be locked/unlocked
with the key blade, see page 49.
02
Indicator lamps display information in accordance with the following illustration:
Remote control key with PCC* - Personal Car
Communicator.
Information button
Indicator lamps
Using the information button enables access
to certain information from the car via the
indicator lamps.
Using the information button
–
Press the information button
.
> All indicator lamps flash for approximately 7 seconds and the light travels
around on the PCC. This indicates that
information from the car has been
read.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
47
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
NOTE
The information button function may be
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions, etc.
02
Out of PCC range
If the PCC is too far away from the car for the
information to be read then the status the car
was last left in is shown, without the light
travelling around on the PCC.
Green continuous light – the car is
locked.
If several PCCs are used for the car then it is
only the PCC last used for locking/unlocking
that shows correct status.
Yellow continuous light – the car is
unlocked.
Red continuous light – the alarm has
been triggered since the car was locked.
Red light flashing alternately in both indicator lamps – The alarm was triggered
less than 5 minutes ago.
Range PCC
A remote control key contains a detachable
key blade of metal with which some functions
can be activated and some operations carried
out.
The key blade's unique code is provided by
authorised Volvo workshops, which are recommended when ordering new key blades.
Key blade functions
Using the remote control key's detachable
key blade:
•
the left-hand front door can be opened
manually if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key, see
page 54.
•
the rear doors' mechanical child safety
locks can be activated/deactivated, see
page 62.
•
the right-hand front door and the rear
doors can be locked manually, e.g. in the
event of power failure, see page 56.
•
•
The glovebox lock* opens see page 58.
NOTE
If none of the indicator lamps illuminates with repeated use of the information
button and in different locations (as well as
after 7 seconds and after the light has
travelled around on the PCC), contact a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
The PCC's range for locking, unlocking and
tailgate is about 20 m from the car - for other
functions up to about 100 m.
If the car does not verify a button being
pressed - move closer and try again.
48
Detachable key blade
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
the airbag for front passenger seat
(PACOS)* can be activated/deactivated,
see page 22.
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
Removing the key blade
Unlocking doors with the key blade
If central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key - e.g. if the batteries are
discharged - then the left-hand front door can
be opened as follows:
02
1. Unlock the left-hand front door with the
key blade in the door handle's lock cylinder.
To see a figure and for more information,
see page 54.
NOTE
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
At the same time pull the key blade
straight out backwards.
Attaching the key blade
Carefully refit the key blade into its location in
the remote control key.
When the door has been unlocked using
the key blade and is opened, the alarm is
triggered.
2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the
remote control key in the ignition switch.
For a car with Keyless Drive, see page 54.
1. Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into
its slot.
2. Lightly press the key blade. You should
hear a "click" when the key blade is
locked in.
49
02 Locks and alarm
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*
Replacing the battery
02
Battery replacement
Closely study how the battery/batteries
are secured on the inside of the cover,
with regard to their (+) and (–) sides.
The batteries should be replaced if:
•
the information symbol illuminates in the
combined instrument panel and its information display shows Low battery in
remote control. Please change
batteries.
Remote control key with 1 battery
1. Carefully prize out the battery.
2. Install a new one with the (+) side down.
and/or
•
the locks repeatedly do not react to signals from the remote control key within
20 metres from the car.
Opening
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the
side.
At the same time pull the key blade
straight out backwards.
Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the
hole behind the spring-loaded catch and
gently prize the remote control key up.
NOTE
Turn the remote control key over with the
buttons facing up, this is to avoid the batteries falling out when it is opened.
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching new batteries and their
contact surfaces with your fingers as this
may impair their function.
50
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Remote control key and PCC* with 2
batteries
1. Carefully prize out the batteries.
2. First install one new one with the (+) side
up.
3. Position the white plastic tab in between
and finally install a second new battery
with the (+) side down.
Battery type
Use batteries with designation CR2430, 3 V.
Assembly
1. Press the remote control key together.
2. Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into
its slot.
3. Lightly press the key blade. You should
hear a "click" when the key blade is
locked in.
02 Locks and alarm
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*
IMPORTANT
Make sure that exhausted batteries are
disposed of in a manner which is kind to
the environment.
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
51
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless*
Keyless lock and ignition system*
02
General
Both of the car's remote control keys have
Keyless function. It is possible to order more
remote control keys, see page 44.
The car's electrical system can be set to 3
different levels (key positions) - 0, I and II with the remote control key, see page 81.
Remote control key range1
Below is a description of remote control keys
with Keyless drive and Keyless start functions. For cars with a Keyless start function,
the car can be started without the remote
control key being inserted in the ignition lock.
For cars with a Keyless drive function, the car
can be locked and unlocked without pressing
a button on the remote control key, and also
be started without the key being inserted in
the ignition lock. The system makes it easier
and more convenient to open the car, e.g.
when your hands are full.
1
52
In order to open a door or the tailgate without
pressing a button on the remote control key,
a remote control key must be approx. 1.5 m
from the car door handle or tailgate. This
means that the person who wishes to lock or
unlock a door must have the remote control
key with him or her. It is not possible to lock
or unlock a door if the remote control key is
on the opposite side of the car.
The red rings in the preceding illustration indicate the range covered by the system's
antennas.
If all remote control keys are removed from
the car when the engine is running or key
position I or II is active (see page 81) and a
door has been opened and then closed, the
information display in the combined instrument panel shows a warning message while
sounding an audible reminder at the same
time.
Does not apply to cars with keyless start
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
When the remote control key has been
returned to the car, the warning message
goes off and the audible reminder ceases
once either/or:
•
•
•
a door has been opened and closed
the remote control key has been inserted
in the ignition lock
The OK button on the direction indicator
stalk.
Safe operation of the remote control
key with keyless function
If a remote control key with keyless function
is left in the car, it is deactivated temporarily
when the car is locked. This prevents unauthorised entry.
However, if someone breaks into the car and
finds the remote control key, it is reactivated.
It is therefore important to handle all remote
control keys with great care.
IMPORTANT
When the door has been unlocked using
the key blade and is opened, the alarm is
triggered.
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless*
Interference to remote control key
function
Locking2
NOTE
In cars with automatic gearbox selectors,
the gear selector must be set to the P
position; otherwise the car can be neither
locked nor alarmed.
Electromagnetic fields and screening can
interfere with the Keyless function.
NOTE
Unlocking2
Do not place/store the remote control key
with keyless function near a mobile phone
or metal object - no closer than 10-15 cm.
If interference is experienced nonetheless,
use the remote control key and the key blade
like a traditional remote control key, see
page 46.
02
Unlocking with Keyless-drive takes place
when a hand grasps a door handle or the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate is actuated open the door or tailgate as normal.
Cars with the Keyless-drive system have a touchsensitive area on the outer handle of the doors
and a rubberised button next to the tailgate's
rubberised pressure plate.
Lock the doors and the tailgate by grasping
one of the door handles or pressing the
smaller of the tailgate's two rubberised buttons - the lock indicator in the windscreen
confirms that locking has been completed by
starting to flash, see page 45.
NOTE
The door handles normally register a hand
that takes hold of the handle, but with
thick gloves on or after a very quick hand
movement a second attempt may be
required, or with the glove taken off.
All doors and the tailgate must be closed
before the car can be locked - otherwise the
car is not locked.
2
Not applicable to remote control keys with keyless start
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
53
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless*
Unlocking with the key blade
02
2. Then insert the key blade in the lock cylinder and unlock the door.
•
3. Refit the plastic cover after unlocking.
Select one of three possible memories for
seat adjustment with seat button 1-3, see
page 84.
•
Adjust seat and mirrors manually, see
page 84 and 106.
•
Adjust steering force in the MY CAR
menu system; see see page 211.
NOTE
When the front left door is unlocked using
the key blade and is opened, the alarm is
triggered. It is switched off by inserting the
remote control key in the ignition switch,
see page 64.
Hole for key blade - to loosen the cover.
If central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key - e.g. if the batteries are
discharged - then the left-hand front door can
be opened using the remote control key's
removable key blade (see page 49).
To access the lock cylinder, the door handle's
plastic cover must be removed - this is also
done with the key blade:
1. Press the key blade approx. 1 cm straight
up into the hole on the underside of the
door handle/cover - do not prize.
> The plastic cover loosens automatically by means of the torque when the
3
54
presses their remote control key's unlock
button, see page 46.
blade is pushed straight up and into
the opening.
Key memory3 - driver’s seat, door
mirrors and steering force
Memory function in remote control key
with keyless function
If several people each with a remote control
key approach the car, then the settings for
seat and mirrors are implemented for the person who opens the driver's door.
After the driver's door has been opened by
person A with remote control key A, but person B with remote control key B is to drive,
the settings can be changed as follows:
•
Only in combination with power driver's seat and power mirrors.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Standing by the driver's door, or sitting
behind the steering wheel, person B
Lock settings
The Keyless-drive function can be adapted by
indicating in the menu system MY CAR which
doors are to be unlocked, under Car settings
Lock settings Keyless entry - there
select between All doors unlock, Any door,
Doors on same side and Both front doors.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 209.
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless*
Antenna location
WARNING
People who have had a pacemaker operation should not come closer than 22 cm to
the Keyless system's antennas with their
pacemaker. This is to prevent interference
between the pacemaker and the Keyless
system.
02
The Keyless system has a number of integrated antennae located around the car:
Rear bumper, centre
Door handle, left rear
Cargo area, central and furthest in under
the floor
Door handle, right rear
Centre console, under the rear section
Centre console, under the front section.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
55
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
From the outside
02
The remote control key can lock/unlock all
doors, the tailgate and the fuel filler flap. Different sequences for unlocking can be
selected, see "Unlocking with the remote
control key" page 46.
In order that the lock sequence can be activated, the driver's door must be closed - if
any of the other doors or the tailgate is open,
then it/they is/are locked and the alarm is
activated only when it/they are closed. With
the Keyless* system all the doors and tailgate
must be closed.
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key in the car.
If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the
remote control key, the battery may be discharged - lock or unlock the left-hand front
door with the detachable key blade, see
page 49.
NOTE
Remember that the alarm is triggered
when the door is opened after being
unlocked with the key blade - the alarm is
switched off when the remote control key
is inserted into the ignition switch.
WARNING
Be aware of the risk of being locked in the
car when it is locked from the outside
using the remote control key - it is then not
possible to open any of the doors from the
inside with the door controls. For more
information, see page 60, Deadlocks.
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within 2 minutes of unlocking, all are locked
again automatically. This function reduces the
risk that the car is left unlocked unintentionally. (For cars with alarm, see page 63.)
Manual locking
In certain situations the car must be lockable
manually, e.g. in the event of power failure.
The left-hand front door can be locked with
its lock cylinder and the remote control key's
detachable key blade, see page 54.
Other doors have no lock cylinders and
instead have a lock switch on the end of each
56
door which must be depressed using the key
blade - they are then mechanically locked/
blocked to prevent them being opened from
outside. The doors can still be opened from
the inside.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up
with child safety locks, see page 62.
–
Remove the removable key blade from
the remote control key, see page 49.
Insert the key blade into the hole for the
lock switch and press in the key until it
reaches the bottom, approx. 12 mm.
The door can be opened from both the
outside and the inside.
The door is blocked against opening from
the outside. To return to position A, the
inner door handle must be opened.
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
The doors can also be unlocked with the
unlock button on the remote control key or
with the central locking button on the driver's
door.
From the inside
Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to also
open all the side windows* simultaneously.
Central locking
•
NOTE
•
A door's lock reset only locks that particular door - not all doors simultaneously.
•
A manually locked rear door with an
activated manual child safety lock cannot be opened from either the outside
or the inside, see page 62. A rear
door that is locked in this way can only
be unlocked with the remote control
key or central locking button.
Pull the door handle and open the door the door is unlocked and opened in one
operation.
02
Locking
•
Both front doors must be closed for the
central locking to be activated. Press the
central locking button
- all doors are
locked. If any of the rear doors is open, it
will lock when it is closed.
Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to also
close all the side windows simultaneously.
Central locking.
Global opening
All of the doors and the tailgate can be locked
or unlocked simultaneously using the central
locking button on the driver's door.
Press and hold the central locking button
(at least 4 seconds) to also open all the windows simultaneously - for example, to quickly
ventilate the passenger compartment during
hot weather.
•
Press one side
the other side
of the button to lock to unlock.
Lamp in lock button
When the lamp in the central locking button
for the driver's door is illuminated it means
that all doors are locked.
Unlocking
A door can be unlocked from the inside in
two different ways:
•
Press the central locking button
Automatic locking
The doors and tailgate are locked automatically when the car starts to move.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Lock settings Automatic
door locking. For a description of the menu
system, see page 209.
.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
57
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
Lock cylinder, glovebox*
Tailgate
Manual opening
02
IMPORTANT
•
Minimal force is required to release the
rear hatch lock - just gently press the
rubberised panel.
•
Do not place the lift force on the rubber panel when opening the rear hatch
- lift the handle. Using too much force
may damage the electrical contacts on
the rubber panel.
Unlocking with the remote control key
The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked
using the remote control key's detachable
key blade. For information on the key blade,
see page 49.
Locking the glovebox:
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock
cylinder.
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.
The keyhole is horizontal in the locked
position.
Rubber plate with electrical contact.
The tailgate is held closed by an electrical
lock. To open:
1. Push down gently on the wider of the two
rubberised pressure plates under the
outer handle - the lock is released.
2. Lift the outside handle in order to fully
open the tailgate.
Pull out the key blade.
•
58
Unlock by carrying this out in reverse
order.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed*
and the tailgate unlocked on its own by using
the remote control key's
button.
The lock indicator on the instrument panel
stops flashing in order to show that not all of
the car is locked and the alarm's* level and
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
movement sensors and the sensors for opening the tailgate are disconnected.
•
The doors remain locked and armed.
The tailgate can be opened in two different
ways using the remote control key:
One press - The boot lid is unlocked, but
remains closed - press lightly on the rubberised pressure plate under the outer handle
and lift the boot lid. If the tailgate is not
opened within 2 minutes then it is relocked
and the alarm is re-armed.
Two presses - The boot lid is unlocked and
the lock is disengaged at which the boot lid
opens about a centimetre - lift the outer handle to open. Rain, cold, frost or snow could
however prevent the tailgate from disengaging from the lock.
> The lock releases and the tailgate
opens by a few centimetres.
NOTE
•
When the boot lid/tailgate is unlocked
with 2 presses or from the car interior,
automatic relocking does not take
place because the boot lid/tailgate is
open - it must be closed manually.
After the boot lid/tailgate has been
closed it is unlocked and the alarm is
not armed - relock it and re-arm the
alarm with the remote control key's
.
lock button
Opening the car from inside
Locking with the remote control key
–
02
Press the remote control key's button for
locking,
, see page 46.
> The lock indicator on the instrument
panel starts flashing, which means that
the car is locked and the alarm* has
been activated.
Fuel filler flap
The fuel filler flap is unlocked using the
button. The fuel filler
remote control key
flap remains unlocked until the car is locked
with the remote control key
button. If the
car is locked during travel or with the interior
buttons, the fuel filler flap will remain
unlocked.
The fuel filler flap locking logic also follows
the locking or unlocking of the keyless-drive
and the central locking system. Fuel filler flap
locking always occurs after a 10-minute
delay.
To open the tailgate:
–
Press the lighting panel button.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
59
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
Deadlocks*1
02
Temporary deactivation
Deadlocks means that all door handles are
mechanically disengaged, which prevents
doors being opened from the inside.
The deadlocks are activated with the remote
control key and are set after an approximately
10 second delay after the doors have been
locked.
2. Select Activate once.
> The combined instrument panel shows
the message Locks and alarm
Reduced guard and the deadlocks
function is switched off when the car is
locked.
or
–
NOTE
If a door is opened within the delay time
then the sequence is interrupted and the
alarm is deactivated.
Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
MY CAR
The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock state with the remote control key. The
front left door can also be unlocked with the
detachable key blade.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car
without first deactivating the deadlocks in
order to avoid the risk of anyone being
locked in.
1
60
OK MENU
TUNE knob control
EXIT
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then
the deadlocks function can be temporarily
switched off. This is carried out as follows:
1. Access the menu system MY CAR under
Settings Car settings Reduced
Guard (for a detailed description of the
menu system, see page 209).
Only in combination with alarm.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Select Ask when exiting.
> Each time the engine is switched off
the centre console's screen shows the
message Activate Reduced Guard
until engine has started again? followed by the alternatives Confirm
with OK and Cancel with EXIT.
If the deadlocks function shall be switched
off
–
Press OK/MENU and lock the car. (Note
that the alarm's movement and tilt detectors* are switched off at the same time,
see page 64.)
> The next time the engine is started, the
system is reset to zero and the combined instrument panel shows the
message Locks and alarm Full
guard at which the deadlocks function
and the alarm's movement and tilt
detectors are re-engaged.
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
If the locking system shall not be changed
Press EXIT and lock the car.
–
02
NOTE
•
Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
•
If any of the doors are opened from
the inside then the alarm is triggered.
61
02 Locks and alarm
Child safety locks
Manual blocking of the rear doors
02
The child safety locks prevent children from
opening a rear door from the inside.
NOTE
•
A door's knob control only blocks that
particular door - not both rear doors
simultaneously.
•
Cars with an electric child safety lock
do not have a manual child lock.
Electrical locking of the rear doors*
and power windows
The child safety locks are located on the trailing edge of the rear doors and are only
accessible when the doors are open.
To activate/deactivate the child safety locks:
Use the remote control key's detachable
key blade to turn the knob - see page 49.
The door is blocked against opening from
the inside.
The door can be opened from both the
outside and the inside.
Control panel driver's door.
The child safety locks can be activated/deactivated in all key positions higher than 0 - see
page 81. Activation/deactivation can be
performed up to 2 minutes after switching off
the engine, provided that no door is opened.
To activate the child safety locks:
62
2. Press the button in the driver's door control panel.
> The information display shows the
message Rear child lock activated
and the button's lamp illuminates - the
locks are active.
When the electric child safety lock is active
then the rear:
•
windows can only be opened with the
driver's door control panel
•
doors cannot be opened from inside.
The current setting is stored when the engine
is switched off - if the child safety locks are
activated at engine shutdown, the function
will remain activated the next time the engine
is started.
With child safety locks. Not to be mixed up with
manual door locks, see page 56.
–
1. Start the engine or choose a key position
higher than 0.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
02 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
General
Activated alarm is triggered if:
•
a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is
opened
•
a movement is detected in the passenger
compartment (if fitted with a movement
detector*)
•
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted
with a tilt detector*)
•
•
the battery's cable is disconnected
the siren is disconnected.
If there is a fault in the alarm system then the
information display in the combined instrument panel shows a message. In which case,
contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
Alarm indicator
NOTE
The movement sensors trigger an alarm in
the event of movement in the passenger
compartment - air currents are also registered. For this reason the alarm is triggered if the car is left with a window open
or if the passenger compartment heater is
used.
To avoid this: Close the window when
leaving the car. If the car's integrated passenger compartment heater (or a portable
electric heater) shall be used - direct the
airflow from the air vents so that they are
not pointing upwards in the passenger
compartment. Alternatively, reduced alarm
level can be used, see page 64.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or alter components in the alarm system yourself. Any
such attempts may affect the terms of the
insurance.
02
Same LED as lock indicator, see page 45.
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates
the alarm system's status:
•
•
•
LED not lit – Alarm not armed
The LED flashes once every other second
– Alarm is armed
The LED flashes rapidly after disarming
the alarm (and until the remote control
key is inserted in the ignition switch and
key position I is selected) – Alarm has
been triggered.
Arming the alarm
–
Press the remote control key lock button.
Deactivate the alarm
–
Press the remote control key unlock button.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
63
02 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
02
Deactivating a triggered alarm
Reduced alarm level
–
To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during
transport on a car train or car ferry - temporarily deactivate the movement and tilt detectors.
Press the remote control key unlock button or insert the remote control key in the
ignition switch.
Other alarm functions
The procedure is the same as with the temporary disengaging of deadlocks, see
page 60.
Automatic re-arming of the alarm
This function prevents the car being left with
the alarm disarmed unintentionally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control
key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of
the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2
minutes, then the alarm is automatically rearmed. The car is relocked at the same time.
2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch.
> The alarm is deactivated.
Automatic alarm activation
Alarm signals
In certain countries, the alarm is activated
after a certain delay if the driver's door was
opened and closed but the car was not relocked.
When the alarm is triggered, the following
happens:
•
A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is switched off. The siren has its
own battery and works independently of
the car battery.
•
The direction indicators flash for 5
minutes or until the alarm is switched off.
Remote control key not working
If the alarm cannot be deactivated with the
remote control key, e.g. if the key's battery is
discharged - the car can be unlocked, disarmed and the engine started as follows:
1. Open the left-hand front door with the
detachable key blade - see page 54.
> The alarm is triggered, the direction
indicators flash and the siren sounds.
64
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
02 Locks and alarm
02
65
Instruments and controls........................................................................ 68
Volvo Sensus ......................................................................................... 80
Key positions.......................................................................................... 81
Seats....................................................................................................... 83
Steering wheel........................................................................................ 88
Lighting................................................................................................... 89
Wipers and washing.............................................................................. 101
Windows, rearview and door mirrors.................................................... 104
Compass*.............................................................................................. 110
Alcolock*............................................................................................... 111
Starting the engine................................................................................ 115
Starting the engine – external battery................................................... 117
Gearboxes............................................................................................. 118
Start/Stop*............................................................................................ 125
All Wheel Drive - AWD*......................................................................... 131
Foot brake............................................................................................. 132
HDC Hill Descent Control..................................................................... 134
Parking brake........................................................................................ 136
HomeLink® *.......................................................................................... 137
66
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Instrument overview
03
Left-hand drive.
68
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Function
Page
Function
Page
Menus and messages,
direction indicators,
main/dipped beam, trip
computer
206, 95,
91, 234
Control panel for infotainment system and
menu navigation
251, 253,
209
Cruise control*
150,152
Control panel for climate control
220
Horn, airbags
88,20
Gear selector
118
Combined instrument
panel
71
Parking brake
136
Menu navigation, audio
control, phone control*
209, 251,
253, 278
Wipers and washing
101,102
88
START/STOP ENGINE
button
115
Steering wheel adjustment
Bonnet opener
340
Ignition switch
81
89,58
Screen for infotainment
and display of menus
250, 251,
209
Light switch, opener for
tailgate
Seat adjustment*
84
Door handle
–
Control panel
57, 62,
104, 106
Hazard warning flashers
94
03
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
69
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
Right-hand drive.
70
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Function
Page
Function
Page
Wipers and washing
101,102
220
Menu navigation, audio
control, phone control*
209, 251,
253, 278
Control panel for climate control
Gear selector
118
Horn, airbags
88,19
Parking brake
136
Combined instrument
panel
71
206, 95,
91, 234
Cruise control*
150,152
Menus and messages,
direction indicators,
main/dipped beam, trip
computer
START/STOP ENGINE
button
115
Steering wheel adjustment
88
Ignition switch
81
Bonnet opener
340
Screen for infotainment
and display of menus
250, 251,
209
Light switch, opener for
tailgate
89,58
Door handle
–
Seat adjustment*
84
Control panel
57, 62,
104, 106
Hazard warning flashers
94
Control panel for infotainment system and
menu navigation
251, 253,
209
The combined instrument panel's
information display
03
Information display, analogue instrument panel.
Information display, digital instrument panel.
The combined instrument panel's information
display shows information on some of the
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
71
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip
computer, as well as messages. The information is shown with symbols and text.
There are further descriptions under the functions that use the display.
03
Gauges and indicators, analogue
instrument panel
is illuminated. See also Trip computer
page 234, and Refuelling page 301.
Eco meter The meter provides an indication of how economically the car is being
driven. The higher the reading on the
scale, the more economical it is.
To select the theme, press the left-hand stalk
switch's OK button and then select the
Themes menu option by turning the thumbwheel on the lever. Confirm your choice by
pressing the OK button. For more information
on menus, see page 206.
Speedometer
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Gear shift indicator2 / Gear position indicator3. See also gearboxes page 118.
Gauges and indicators, digital
instrument panel
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking1, the yellow indicator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
1
2
3
4
72
Various themes can be selected for the digital
combined instrument panel Possible themes
are "Elegance", "Eco" and "Performance".
The setting for the theme can be stored in the
remote control key's memory when locking
the car, see pages 44 and 211.
A theme can only be selected when the
engine is running.
When the display's message Distance to empty fuel tank: starts to show ----, the marking becomes red.
Manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
When the display's message Distance to empty fuel tank: starts to show ----, the marking becomes red.
Gauges and indicators, theme "Elegance".
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking4, the yellow indicator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
is illuminated. See also Trip computer
page 234, and Refuelling page 301.
Temperature gauge for engine coolant
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Speedometer
Speedometer
Speedometer
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Gear shift indicator5 / Gear position indicator6. See also gearboxes page 118.
Gear shift indicator5 / Gear position indicator6. See also gearboxes page 118.
Power guide. See also page 74.
Gear shift indicator5 / Gear position indicator6. See also gearboxes page 118.
03
Eco guide & Power guide*
General
The Eco guide and Power guide instruments
help the driver to drive the car while maintaining the best possible driving economy.
Gauges and indicators, theme "Eco".
5
6
4
The car also stores statistics of journeys
made, which can be viewed in the form of a
block diagram, see page 240.
Gauges and indicators, theme "Performance".
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking4, the yellow indicator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
is illuminated. See also Trip computer
page 234, and Refuelling page 301.
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking4, the yellow indicator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
is illuminated. See also Trip computer
page 234, and Refuelling page 301.
Eco guide. See also page 73.
Temperature gauge for engine coolant
Eco guide
This meter provides an indication of how economically the car is being driven.
To view this function, select the theme "Eco",
see page 73.
Manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
When the display's message Distance to empty fuel tank: starts to show ----, the marking becomes red.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
73
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
Average value
Available power
The average value slowly follows the instantaneous value and describes how the car has
been driven most recently. The higher the
pointers on the scale, the better the driving
economy achieved by the driver.
The smaller, upper pointer shows the available engine power7. The higher the reading on
the scale, the more power is available in the
current gear.
Power guide
This instrument shows the relationship
between how much power (Power) is being
taken from the engine and how much power
is available.
Instantaneous value
To view this function, select the theme
Performance, see page 73.
Average value
Instantaneous value
The instantaneous value is shown here - the
higher the reading on the scale, the better.
The instantaneous value is calculated based
on speed, engine speed, engine power utilised plus use of the foot brake.
Optimum speed (50-80 km/h) and low engine
speeds are encouraged. The pointers fall during acceleration and braking.
Very low instantaneous values illuminate the
red zone on the meter (with a short delay),
which means poor driving economy and
hence should be avoided.
7
74
Power is dependent on engine speed.
Available engine power
Engine power utilised
Utilised power
The larger, lower pointer shows the engine
power utilised7. The higher the reading on the
scale, the more power is being taken from the
engine.
A large gap between the two pointers indicates a large power reserve.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
except the symbol for faults in the car's emissions system and the symbol for low oil pressure.
Indicator symbols
Symbol
Specification
ABL fault
03
Emissions system
Indicator and warning symbols, analogue instrument panel.
Indicator symbols
Indicator and warning symbols
warning symbols8
Indicator and warning symbols, digital instrument
panel.
Indicator symbols
Rear fog lamp on
Indicator and warning symbols
Stability system
Warning symbols8
Stability system, sport mode
Functionality check
All indicator and warning symbols illuminate
in key position II or when the engine is
started. When the engine has started, all the
symbols should go out except the parking
brake symbol, which only goes out when the
brake is disengaged.
If the engine does not start or if the functionality check is carried out in key position II
then all symbols go out within 5 seconds
8
ABS fault
Engine preheater (diesel)
Low level in fuel tank
Information, read display text
Main beam On
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text. For information on checking the oil level, see page 341.
}}
75
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Symbol
Specification
Left-hand direction indicator
Rear fog lamp on
Right-hand direction indicator
This symbol illuminates when the rear fog
lamp is switched on.
Stability system
03
Start/Stop, the engine autostopped, see page 125
ABL fault
The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in
the ABL function (Active Bending Lights).
Emissions system
If the symbol illuminates then it may be due to
a fault in the car's emissions system. Drive to
a workshop for checking. Volvo recommends
that you seek assistance from an authorised
Volvo workshop.
ABS fault
If this symbol illuminates then the system is
not working. The car's regular brake system
continues to work, but without the ABS function.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off
the engine.
2. Restart the engine.
3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to
a workshop to have the ABS system
checked. Volvo recommends that you
76
seek assistance from an authorised Volvo
workshop.
A flashing symbol indicates that the stability
system is operating. If the symbol illuminates
with constant glow then there is a fault in the
system.
Stability system, sport mode
Sport mode allows for a more active driving
experience. The system then detects whether
the accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements and cornering are more active than in
normal driving and then allows controlled
skidding of the rear section up to a certain
level before it intervenes and stabilises the
car.
Engine preheater (diesel)
This symbol illuminates during engine preheating. Preheating mostly takes place due to
low temperature.
Low level in fuel tank
When the symbol illuminates the level in the
fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.
Information, read display text
When one of the car's systems does not
behave as intended, this information symbol
illuminates and a text appears on the information display. The message text is cleared with
the OK button, see page 206, or it disappears automatically after a time (time
depending on which function is indicated).
The information symbol can also illuminate in
conjunction with other symbols.
NOTE
When a service message is shown, the
symbol and message are cleared using the
OK button, or disappear automatically
after a time.
Main beam On
The symbol illuminates when main beam is on
and with main beam flash.
Left/right-hand direction indicators
Both direction indicator symbols flash when
the hazard warning flashers are used.
Start/Stop
The symbol shines when the engine is autostopped.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Warning symbols
Symbol
Specification
Low oil pressureA
Parking brake applied
Parking brake applied, alternative symbol
Airbags – SRS
Seatbelt reminder
Alternator not charging
Fault in brake system
Warning
A
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure
is not used. Warnings are made via display text, see pages
341 and 343.
Low oil pressure
If this symbol illuminates during driving then
the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the
engine immediately and check the engine oil
level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illuminates and the oil level is normal, contact a
workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek
assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Parking brake applied
This symbol illuminates with a constant glow
when the parking brake is applied. The symbol is illuminated during application. For more
information, see page 136.
Airbags – SRS
If this symbol remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, it means a fault has been
detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or
IC systems. Drive immediately to a workshop
to have the system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Seatbelt reminder
This symbol flashes if someone in a front seat
has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in
a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.
Alternator not charging
This symbol illuminates during driving if a
fault has occurred in the electrical system.
Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you
seek assistance from an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Fault in brake system
If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at
the same time, there may be a fault in the
brake force distribution system.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off
the engine.
2. Restart the engine.
•
If both symbols extinguish, continue
driving.
•
If the symbols remain illuminated,
check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see page 345. If the brake fluid
level is normal but the symbols are still
illuminated, the car can be driven, with
great care, to a workshop to have the
brake system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from
an authorised Volvo workshop.
03
WARNING
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.
The loss of brake fluid must be investigated by a workshop. Volvo recommends
that you contact an authorised Volvo
workshop.
If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level
may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place
and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see page 345.
77
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
WARNING
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at
the same time, there is a risk that the rear
end will skid during heavy braking.
03
Warning
The red warning symbol illuminates when a
fault has been indicated which could affect
the safety and/or driveability of the car. An
explanatory text is shown on the information
display at the same time. The symbol remains
visible until the fault has been rectified but the
text message can be cleared with the OK
button, see page 207. The warning symbol
can also illuminate in conjunction with other
symbols.
Action:
1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car
further.
information display. Stop the car in a safe
place as soon as possible and close the door
that is open.
If the car is driven at a speed lower
than approx. 7 km/h then the information symbol illuminates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher
than approx. 7 km/h then the warning
symbol illuminates.
If the bonnet9 is not closed properly then the
warning symbol illuminates together with an
explanatory image in the information display.
Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the bonnet.
If the tailgate is not closed properly then the
information symbol illuminates together with
an explanatory image in the information display. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as
possible and close the tailgate.
2. Read the information on the information
display. Implement the action in accordance with the message in the display.
Clear the message using the OK button.
Reminder – doors not closed
If one of the doors is not closed properly then
the information or warning symbol illuminates
together with an explanatory image in the
9 Only cars with alarm*.
10 The appearance of the
78
Trip meter
display may vary depending on variant.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Trip meter.
Display for trip meter10
The two trip meters T1 and T2 are used for
measuring short distances. The distance is
shown in the display.
Turn the left stalk switch thumbwheel to show
the required meter.
A long press (until the change occurs) on the
left-hand stalk switch's RESET button resets
the trip meter shown. For more information,
see page 234.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Clock
The menu option Settings System
options Time format selects the 24h or
12h system (AM/PM).
03
Clock, digital instrument panel.
Display for showing the time11
Set the clock
The clock can be adjusted in the menu group
MY CAR, for more information see page 209.
1. Locate Settings
Time.
System options
2. The cursor is located in the first box for
Hour: Press OK/MENU - the box is activated.
3. Turn TUNE to set the correct hour and
press OK/MENU - the box is deactivated.
4. Turn TUNE to select the box for Minute
(A) and press OK/MENU - the box is activated (B).
5. Turn TUNE to set the correct minute and
press OK/MENU - the box is deactivated.
6. Turn TUNE to select the box for OK and
press OK/MENU - the setting is complete.
11 The
time is shown in the middle of the instrument panel when an analogue instrument panel is fitted.
79
03 Your driving environment
Volvo Sensus
General
personalised by means of an intuitive user
interface. Settings can be made in Car settings, Infotainment, Climate, etc.
With the centre console buttons and controls
or the steering wheel's right-hand keypad*
functions can be activated or deactivated and
many different settings can be made.
03
With a press on MY CAR all settings related
to the driving and control of the car are presented, such as City Safety, Locks and alarm,
setting the clock, etc.
Control panel in centre console
Navigation* - NAV, see separate owner's
manual (Road and Traffic Information
System - RTI).
Infotainment (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*), see
page 250.
Car settings - MY CAR, see page 209.
With a press on the respective function:
RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*, NAV* and CAM* other
sources, systems and functions can be activated, e.g. AM, FM1, CD, DVD*, TV*, Bluetooth*, navigation* and park assist camera*.
For more information on all functions/
systems, see the respective section in the
owner's manual.
Climate control, see page 217.
Park assist camera - CAM*, see
page 191.
Volvo Sensus is the car's operating system,
the heart of your personal Volvo experience.
Volvo Sensus combines and presents many
functions in several of the car's systems in
the screen. With Volvo Sensus the car can be
80
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
Key positions
Insert and remove the remote control
key
IMPORTANT
Level
Foreign objects in the ignition switch can
impair the function or destroy the lock.
0
Do not press in the remote control key
incorrectly turned - Hold the end with the
detachable key blade, see page 49.
The audio system can be used for
a limited time - see page 250.
Push the remote control key, allow it to
eject, then pull it out from the ignition
switch.
Functions at different levels
Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/inserted.
NOTE
For cars with the Keyless* function the key
does not need to be inserted into the ignition switch but can be stored in e.g. a
pocket. For more information on Keyless
functions - see page 52.
Insert the key
1. Hold the end of the remote control key
with the detachable key blade and insert
the key in the ignition switch.
Odometer, clock and temperature
gauge are illuminated.
Power seats can be adjusted.
Withdraw the key
•
Functions
In order to enable the use of a limited number
of functions with the engine switched off, the
car's electrical system can be set in 3 different levels (key positions) - 0, I and II - with
the remote control key. Throughout this
owner's manual these levels are described
using the denomination "key positions".
The following table shows the functions available in each key position/level.
I
Sun visor for glass roof, power
windows, 12 V socket in the passenger compartment, RTI, phone,
ventilation fan and windscreen
wipers can be used.
II
The headlamps come on.
03
Warning/indicator lamps illuminate for 5 seconds.
Several other systems are activated. However, heating in seat
cushions and the rear window can
only be activated after the engine
has been started.
This key position consumes a
lot of current from the starter
battery and should therefore be
avoided!
2. Then press the key in the lock up to its
end position.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
81
03 Your driving environment
Key positions
Choosing key position/level
Starting and stopping the engine
Key position 0
For information about starting/switching off
the engine - see page 115.
•
Unlock the car - this means that the car's
electrical system is at level 0.
Key position I
03
•
With the remote control key fully inserted
into the ignition switch1 - Briefly press
START/STOP ENGINE.
Towing
For important information about the remote
control key during towing - see page 317.
NOTE
To reach level I or II without starting the
engine - do not depress the brake/clutch
pedal when these key positions are due to
be selected.
Key position II
•
With the remote control key fully inserted
into the ignition switch1 - Give a long2
press on START/STOP ENGINE.
Back to key position 0
•
To return to key position 0 from position II
and I - Briefly press on START/STOP
ENGINE.
Audio system
For information on the audio system's functions with remote control key removed - see
page 250.
1
2
82
Not necessary for cars with the Keyless* function.
Approx. 2 seconds.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
Front seats
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat
before setting off, never while driving.
Make sure that the seat is in locked position in order to avoid personal injury in the
event of sudden braking or an accident.
The head restraint can be adjusted in three
different positions.
Lowering the front seat backrest*
03
Adjusting front seat head restraints
To adjust lumbar support*, turn the
wheel1.
Forward/backward: lift the handle to
adjust the distance to the steering wheel
and pedals. Check that the seat is locked
after changing position.
To raise/lower the front edge of seat
cushion*, pump up/down.
Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.
Raise/lower the seat*, pump up/down.
Control panel for power seat*.
1
The passenger seat backrest can be folded
forward to make room for long loads.
The height of the front seat head restraints can
be adjusted.
Adjust the head restraint based on the person's height so that the whole of the back of
the head is covered if possible.
To adjust the height, the button (see illustration) must be pressed while the restraint is
moved up or down.
Move the seat as far back/down as possible.
Adjust the backrest to an upright position.
Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest and fold it forward.
4. Push the seat forward so that the head
restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
Also applies to power seat.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
83
03 Your driving environment
Seats
WARNING
Power seat*
Do not use the space behind the front
seat, or the rear seat's centre seat, when
the front seat backrest is lowered.
03
Seat adjustment is normally made in key
position I and can always be made when the
engine is running.
Seat with memory function*
WARNING
Grasp the backrest and make sure that it
is properly locked after being folded up in
order to avoid personal injury in the event
of sudden braking or an accident.
Front edge of seat cushion up/down
Seat forward/backward and up/down
Backrest rake
The power front seats have overload protection which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an
object. If this happens, go to key position I or
0 and wait a short time before adjusting the
seat again.
Only one movement (forward/back/up/down)
can be made at a time.
Preparations
The seats can be adjusted for a certain time
after unlocking the door with the remote control key without the key in the ignition switch.
84
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Store setting
Memory button
Memory button
Memory button
Button for storing settings
1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
2. Hold the button depressed to store settings while depressing one of the memory
buttons.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
seat and door mirrors in the remote control key's memory4.
Using a stored setting
Hold one of the memory buttons depressed
until the seat and the door mirrors stop. If you
release the button then the movement of the
seat will stop.
Key memory* in remote control key2
•
Unlock the car (by pressing the unlock
button on the same remote control key)
and open the driver's door. The driver's
seat and door mirrors will automatically
adopt the positions that are stored in the
remote control key's memory (if the seat
has been moved since you locked the
car).
The key memory can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under
Settings Car settings Car key
memory. For a description of the menu system, see page 209.
WARNING
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children
do not play with the controls. Check that
there are no objects in front of, behind or
under the seat during adjustment. Ensure
that none of the rear seat passengers is in
danger of becoming trapped.
03
Heated seats
For heated seats, see page 221.
Rear seats
Head restraint, centre seat, rear
Emergency stop
All remote control keys can be used by different drivers to store the settings for the driver's seat and door mirrors3. Proceed as follows:
•
•
2
3
4
Adjust the seat as you want it.
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press
one of the setting buttons for the seat or
memory buttons in order to stop the seat.
Restarting to reach the seat position stored in
the key memory is performed by pressing the
unlock button on the remote control key. The
driver's door must then be open.
Lock the car by pressing the lock button
on the remote control key that you normally use. This stores the positions of the
For key memory for Keyless function, see page 54.
Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory and retractable power door mirrors.
This setting does not affect settings that have been stored in the power seat's memory function.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
85
03 Your driving environment
Seats
Adjust the head restraint according to passenger height so that the whole of the back of
the head is covered if possible. Slide it up as
required.
03
To lower the head restraint again, the button
(see illustration) must be pressed while the
restraint is carefully moved down.
The head restraint can be adjusted in five different positions.
NOTE
Do not sit in the centre seat with the head
restraint in fully lowered position.
Manual lowering of the outer head
restraints, rear seat
Pull the locking handle closest to the head
restraint to fold the head restraint forward.
The head restraint is moved back manually.
•
•
Both sections can be folded separately.
If the entire backrest is to be folded then
the different sections should be folded
separately.
WARNING
The head restraint must be in locked position after being folded up.
Lowering the rear seat backrest
IMPORTANT
When the backrest is to be folded, the rear
seat cup holder must not be open and
there must be no objects in the rear seat.
Nor may the seat belts be connected. Otherwise there is a risk of damage to the rear
seat upholstery.
The two-section backrest can be folded in
different ways.
NOTE
The front seats may need to be pushed
forwards, and/or the backrests adjusted
upwards, in order that the rear backrests
can be folded forward fully.
86
If the right-hand section is being lowered
- release and adjust the centre seat head
restraint downwards, see page 85.
The outer head restraints are lowered
automatically when the backrests are
lowered. Pull up the backrest's locking
03 Your driving environment
Seats
handle
while folding the backrest forward at the same time. A red indicator on
the lock catch
shows that the backrest is no longer locked in place.
NOTE
When the backrests have been lowered
the head restraints must be moved forward slightly so as not to make contact
with the seat cushion.
03
Raising takes place in reverse order.
NOTE
When the backrest has been raised, the
red indicator should no longer be showing.
If it is still showing then the backrest is not
locked in place.
WARNING
Check that the backrests and head
restraints in the rear seat are locked properly after being folded up.
87
03 Your driving environment
Steering wheel
Adjusting
WARNING
Horn
Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before
driving away.
With speed related power steering* the level
of steering force can be adjusted, see
page 242.
03
Keypads*
Adjusting the steering wheel.
Horn.
Lever - releasing the steering wheel
Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal.
Possible steering wheel positions
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
height and depth:
1. Push the lever forwards to release the
steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
that suits you.
Keypads in the steering wheel.
3. Pull the lever back to fix the steering
wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press
the steering wheel lightly at the same time
as you push the lever back.
88
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Cruise control, see page 150
Adaptive cruise control, see page 152
Audio and phone control, see page 251.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Light switches
Knob positions
Position
Position
Specification
Daytime running lightsA when
the car's electrical system is in
key position II or the engine is
running.
Main beam flash can be used.
Overview, light switches.
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and
instrument lighting and ambient lighting*
Button for rear fog lamp
Knob for daytime running lights and parking lamps
Thumbwheel1 for headlamp levelling
Specification
Daytime running lights and
position/parking lamps/side
marker lamps during the day
when the car's electrical system is in key position II or the
engine is running.
Daytime running lights and
position/parking lamps/side
marker lamps when the car's
electrical system is in key position II or the engine is running.
Automatic switching to dipped
beam and position/parking
lamps/side marker lamps in
poor light conditions or when
the windscreen wipers or rear
fog lamps are activated.
Automatic switching to position/parking lamps/side marker
lamps when the car is parked.
The "Tunnel detection*" function is activated, see page 91.
Main beam flash can be used.
03
The "Active high beam*" function can be used, see
page 92.
Main beam can be activated
when dipped beam is switched
on.
Main beam flash can be used.
1
Not available for cars equipped with active Xenon headlamps*.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
89
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Position
Specification
Dipped beam and position/
parking lamps/side marker
lamps.
03
Main beam can be activated.
adjusting the height of the beam. Lower the
beam if the car is heavily laden.
1. Leave the engine running, or have the
car's electrical system in key position I.
2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/
lower beam alignment.
Cars with active Xenon headlamps* have
automatic headlamp levelling and are therefore not equipped with the thumbwheel.
Position/parking lamps
Main beam flash can be used.
A
Fitted in or under the front bumper.
mode is used
Volvo recommends that
when the car is being driven, as long as traffic
situations or weather conditions are unfavourable for the "Active high beam*" function.
Instrument lighting
Different display and instrument lighting is
switched on depending on key position, see
page 81.
Thumbwheel positions for different load cases.
The display lighting is automatically subdued
in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the
thumbwheel.
The intensity of the instrument lighting is
adjusted with the thumbwheel.
Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical alignment of the headlamp beam, which could
dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by
90
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Only driver
Driver and passenger in the front passenger seat
Occupants in all seats
Occupants in all seats and maximum load
in the cargo area
Driver and maximum load in the cargo
area
Knob for headlamp control in the position for
position/parking lamps.
Turn the knob to the position for position/
parking lamps (number plate lighting is
switched on at the same time).
If the car's electrical system is in key position
II or the engine is running then the daytime
running lights are also switched on.
When it is dark outside and the tailgate is
opened the rear position/parking lamps illuminate to alert traffic behind. This takes place
irrespective of what position the knob is in or
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
what key position the car's electrical system
is in.
Daytime running lights during the day.
DRL
Main/dipped beam
WARNING
This system help to save energy - it cannot
determine in all situations when daylight is
too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist
and rain.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with its lights in a
correct state and in accordance with applicable traffic regulations.
03
Tunnel detection*
Knob for headlamp control in AUTO position.
With the knob for headlamp control in
position the daytime running lights (Daytime
Running Lights - DRL) are activated automatically when the car is driven during daytime. A
light sensor on the top of the instrument
panel changes from daytime running lights to
dipped beam at twilight or when daylight
becomes too weak. Changing to dipped
beam also takes place if the windscreen wipers or rear fog lamps are activated.
The function is available in cars with rain sensor*. The sensor detects the entrance to a
tunnel and resets the lighting from daytime
running lights to dipped beam. Approx. 20
seconds after the car has left the tunnel, the
lighting returns to daytime running lights. If
the car is driven into another tunnel within this
time period then dipped beam is kept
switched on. This prevents frequent changes
to the car lighting.
Note that the headlamp control's knob must
remain in
position for tunnel detection
to work.
Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control.
Position for main beam flash
Position for main beam
Dipped beam
With the knob in
position, dipped beam
is activated automatically at dusk or when
daylight becomes too weak. Dipped beam is
also activated automatically if the windscreen
wipers or rear fog lamps are activated.
position, dipped beam
With the knob in
is always switched on when the engine is running or when key position II is active.
Main beam flash
Move the stalk switch gently towards the
steering wheel to the position for main beam
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
91
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
flash. Main beam comes on until the stalk
switch is released.
Main beam
03
Activating/deactivating
AHB can be activated when the headlamp
.
control's knob is in position
When main beam has been switched on the
Main beam can be activated when the knob
2 or
is in position
. Activate/deactivate main beam by moving the stalk switch
towards the steering wheel to the end position and then releasing. Alternatively, the
main beam can be deactivated by a light
press of the stalk switch toward the steering
wheel.
symbol also illuminates in the combined instrument panel.
Car with digital combined instrument panel
When AHB is activated the
symbol
turns white in the instrument's information
display.
When main beam has been activated the
When main beam is activated, the symbol
shines blue.
symbol illuminates in the combined
instrument panel.
Active high beam - AHB*
Active high beam (Active High Beam - AHB) is
a function which uses a camera sensor at the
top edge of the windscreen to detect the
headlamp beams of oncoming traffic or the
rear lights of vehicles in front, and then
switches from main beam to dipped beam.
The function can also take streetlights into
account.
The lighting returns to main beam about a
second after the camera sensor no longer
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.
2
92
symbol illuWhen AHB is activated the
minates in the instrument's information display.
Manual operation
Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control in
AUTO position.
NOTE
The function can start while driving in the
dark when the car's speed is 20 km/h or
higher.
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist
and dirt.
Activate/deactivate AHB by moving the lefthand stalk switch towards the steering wheel
to the end position and then releasing. Deactivation when main beam is on means that the
lights are reset directly to dipped beam.
Do not stick or attach anything to the
windscreen in front of the camera sensor
as this may reduce effectiveness or cause
one or more of the systems dependent on
the camera to stop working.
Car with analogue combined instrument
panel
When dipped beam is activated.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
If the message Active main beam
Temporary unavailable Switch manually is
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
shown in the combined instrument panel's
information display then you have to switch
manually between main and dipped beam.
However, the knob for headlamp control is
. The same applies if the
still in position
message Windscreen sensors blocked
symbol are
See manual and the
symbol goes out when
shown. The
these messages are shown.
AHB may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in
situations with dense fog or heavy rain. When
AHB becomes available again, or the windscreen sensors are no longer blocked, the
message goes out and the
symbol illuminates.
WARNING
AHB is an aid for using optimum light
composition when conditions are favourable.
The driver always bears responsibility for
manually switching between main and
dipped beam when traffic situations or
weather conditions so require.
Active Xenon headlamps ABL*
IMPORTANT
Examples of when manual switching
between main and dipped beam may be
required:
•
•
•
•
•
In heavy rain or dense fog
•
When the traffic ahead has weak lighting
•
If there are pedestrians on or beside
the road
•
If there are highly reflective objects
such as signs in the vicinity of the road
•
When the lighting from oncoming traffic is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier
•
When there is traffic on connecting
roads
•
•
On the brow of a hill or in a hollow
In freezing rain
03
In snow flurries or slush
In moonlight
When driving in poorly lit built-up
areas
In sharp bends.
For more information on the limitations of the
camera sensor, see page 177.
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left)
and activated (right) respectively.
If the car is equipped with active Xenon headlamps (Active Bending Lights – ABL) then the
light from the headlamps follows the steering
wheel movement in order to provide maximum lighting in bends and junctions and so
provide increased safety.
The function is activated automatically when
the car is started (provided that it has not
been deactivated in the menu system
MY CAR). In the event of a fault in the function the
symbol illuminates in the combined instrument panel at the same time as
the information display shows an explanatory
text and a further illuminated symbol.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
93
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Symbol
Display
Headlamp
system
malfunction Service
required
03
Specification
Rear fog lamp
The system is
disengaged. Visit
a workshop if
the message
remains. Volvo
recommends
that you contact
an authorised
Volvo workshop.
The function is only active in twilight or darkness and only when the car is moving.
The function3 can be deactivated/ activated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Light settings Active
Bending Lights. For a description of the
menu system, see page 210.
Brake lights
The brake light automatically comes on during braking. For information on the emergency brake lights and automatic hazard
warning flashers, see page 132.
Hazard warning flashers
Button for rear fog lamp.
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on
when key position II is active or the engine is
running and the headlamp control's knob is in
position
or
.
Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog
in the combined
lamp indicator symbol
instrument panel and the lamp in the button
illuminate when the rear fog lamp is switched
on.
The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically when the engine is switched off or when
the headlamp control's knob is turned to
position
or
.
3
94
Activated on delivery from the factory.
NOTE
Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps
vary from country to country.
Button for hazard warning flashers.
Press the button to activate the hazard warning flashers. Both direction indicator symbols
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
in the combined instrument panel flash when
the hazard warning flashers are used.
The hazard warning flashers are activated
automatically when the car has been braked
so suddenly that the emergency brake lights
have been activated at a speed below
10 km/h. The hazard warning flashers remain
on when the car has stopped and are deactivated automatically when the car is driven off
again or the button is depressed. For more
information on emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers, see
page 132.
Direction indicators/flashers
Interior lighting
Short flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the
first position and release. The direction
indicators flash three times. The function
can be activated/deactivated in the menu
system MY CAR under Settings Car
settings Light settings Triple
indicator. For a description of the menu
system, see page 210.
03
Continuous flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the
outer position.
The stalk switch remains in its position and is
moved back manually, or automatically by the
steering wheel movement.
Controls in roof console for the front reading
lamps and passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Passenger compartment lighting (floor
lamps* and ceiling lamps) - On/Off
Direction indicator symbols
For direction indicator symbols, see page 75.
Auto function for passenger compartment
lighting
Reading lamp, right-hand side
All lighting in the passenger compartment can
be switched on and off manually within
30 minutes from when:
Direction indicators/flashers.
•
the engine has been switched off and the
car's electrical system is in key position 0
•
the car has been unlocked but the engine
has not been started.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
95
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Front reading lamps*
The reading lamps are switched on or off by
briefly pressing the relevant button in the roof
console.
03
Brightness is adjusted by holding the button
pressed in.
Rear reading lamps*
Floor lamp intensity can be changed in the
MY CAR menu system under Settings Car
settings Light settings Interior light
Floor lights. Select from Off, Low and
High. For more information on the MY CAR
menu system, see page 211.
•
Lighting in the front door storage
compartments*
the car is unlocked with the remote control key or key blade, see pages 46 or 49
•
the engine has been switched off and the
car's electrical system is in key position
0.
Lighting in the front door storage compartments comes on when the engine starts.
Glovebox lighting
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off
respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
Vanity mirror lighting
The lighting for the vanity mirror, see
page 245, is switched on and off respectively
when the cover is opened or closed.
The passenger compartment lighting is
switched on and remains on for 30 seconds
if:
Passenger compartment lighting is switched
off when:
•
•
the engine is started
the car is locked.
The passenger compartment lighting is
switched on and off respectively when a side
door is opened or closed.
Rear reading lamps.
Lighting in the cargo area
It remains switched on for two minutes if one
of the doors is open.
The lamps are switched on or off by briefly
pressing the relevant button.
The lighting in the cargo area is switched on
and off respectively when the tailgate is
opened or closed.
If any lighting is switched on manually and
the car is locked then it will be switched off
automatically after two minutes.
Brightness is adjusted by holding the button
pressed in.
Floor lighting as ambient light*
To make the interior brighter while driving the
floor lighting can be activated at dimmed
level.
96
The passenger compartment lighting is then
switched on and off as indicated below.
Auto function for passenger
compartment lighting
The auto function is activated when the lamp
in the AUTO button is lit.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Mood lights*
When the normal passenger compartment
lighting is switched off and the engine is running, an LED illuminates in the front and rear
roof console respectively in order to provide a
low light and enhance the ambience while
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
The colour of the light can be also set in the
MY CAR menu system under Settings Car
settings Light settings Interior light
Ambient light colours. If you select
Temperature, the colour shifts between
warm white and cold white depending on the
temperature in the car or you can choose
between different colour themes. The available colour themes are Frosty White,
Toscana White, Ember Gold, Red Sunset,
Rainforest, Glacier Blue and Violet Purple.
For more information on the MY CAR menu
system, see page 211.
Home safe light duration
Approach light duration
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
switched on to work as home safe lighting
after the car has been locked.
Approach lighting is switched on with the
remote control key, see page 46, and is used
to switch on the car's lighting at a distance.
1. Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch.
When the function is activated with the
remote control, the parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number plate lighting, interior roof
lighting and floor lighting are switched on.
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward
the steering wheel to the end position and
release it. The function can be activated
in the same way as with main beam flash,
see page 91.
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
When the function is activated, dipped beam,
parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number
plate lighting, interior roof lighting and floor
lighting are switched on.
03
The length of time for which the approach
lighting should be kept on can be set in the
menu system MY CAR under Settings Car
settings Light settings Approach light
duration. For a description of the menu system, see page 210.
Adjusting headlamp pattern
The length of time for which the home safe
lighting should be kept on can be set in the
menu system MY CAR under Settings Car
settings Light settings Home safe
light duration. For a description of the menu
system, see page 210.
G021151
driving. The light also makes it easier to see
objects in the storage compartments, etc.
when it is dark outside. Light intensity can be
changed in the MY CAR menu system under
Settings Car settings Light settings
Interior light Ambient light. Select
from Off, Low and High. This lighting extinguishes when the engine is switched off.
Headlamp pattern, left-hand traffic.
}}
97
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
right-hand drive cars see page 100. The
template scale is 1:2. Use a photocopier
with a zoom function to copy the templates at 200 %:
G021152
03
Headlamp pattern, right-hand traffic.
The headlamp pattern must be adjusted to
avoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can
be set for right or left-hand traffic.
Active Xenon headlamps*
The light pattern does not need to be
adjusted. The headlamp pattern is designed
in such a way that oncoming traffic is not
dazzled.
A = LHD Right (left-hand drive, right
lens)
•
•
B = LHD Left (left-hand drive, left lens)
•
D = RHD Left (right-hand drive, left
lens)
C = RHD Right (right-hand drive, right
lens)
2. Transfer the template to a self-adhesive
waterproof material and cut it out.
3. Start from the design lines on the headlamp lenses; see the lines on page 99.
Position the self-adhesive templates at
the design lines with the help of the illustration.
Halogen headlamps
The headlamp pattern for halogen headlamps
is readjusted by masking the headlamp lens.
The headlamp pattern may not be as good.
Masking the headlamps
1. Copy the A and B templates for left-hand
drive cars or the C and D templates for
98
•
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Aligning the templates
03
Upper row: left-hand drive cars, templates A and B. Lower row: right-hand drive cars, templates C and D.
}}
99
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Templates for halogen headlamps
03
100
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washing
Windscreen wipers1
Continuous wiping
The wipers sweep at normal speed.
the rain sensor can be adjusted using the
thumbwheel.
The wipers sweep at high speed.
When the rain sensor is activated a lamp in
the button is illuminated and the rain sensor
is shown in the combined
symbol
instrument panel.
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers during winter
ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen
in, and that any snow or ice on the windscreen is scraped away.
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers.
Rain sensor, on/off
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
Windscreen wipers off
Move the stalk switch to position 0
to switch off the windscreen wipers.
Single sweep
Raise the stalk switch and release to
make one sweep.
Intermittent wiping
Set the number of sweeps per time
unit with the thumbwheel when
intermittent wiping is selected.
1
03
Activating and setting the sensitivity
IMPORTANT
When activating the rain sensor, the car must
be running or the remote control key in position I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk
switch must be in position 0 or in the position
for a single sweep.
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the but-
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen must be wet when the windscreen
wipers are operating.
Service position wiper blade
ton
sweep.
. The windscreen wipers make one
Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to
make an extra sweep.
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitivity and downward for lower sensitivity.
(An extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned upward.)
For cleaning the windscreen/wiper blades
and replacement of wiper blades see see
page 354 and 370.
Deactivate
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor automatically starts the windscreen wipers based on how much water it
detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the
button
or move the stalk switch down
to another wiper program.
Replacing the wiper blades see page 354, service position, wiper blade see page 354 and filling washer fluid see page 355.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
101
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washing
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated
when the remote control key is removed from
the ignition switch or five minutes after the
engine has been switched off.
IMPORTANT
03
The windscreen wipers could start and be
damaged in an automatic car wash.
Switch off the rain sensor while the car is
in motion or when the remote control key
is in position I or II. The symbol in the
combined instrument panel and the light in
the button go out.
Washing the headlamps and windows
Washing the windscreen
The windscreen wipers will make several
more sweeps and the headlamps are washed
once the stalk switch has been released.
High-pressure headlamp washing*
High-pressure headlamp washing consumes
a large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid,
the headlamps are washed automatically at
every fifth windscreen wash cycle.
Reduced washing
If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains
in the reservoir and the message that you
should fill the washer fluid is shown in the
combined instrument panel, then the supply
of washer fluid to the headlamps is switched
off. This is in order to prioritise cleaning the
windscreen and the visibility through it.
Washing function.
102
Wiping and washing the rear window
Move the stalk switch toward the steering
wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp
washers.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Rear window wiper – intermittent wiping
Rear window wiper – continuous speed
Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow
in the illustration above) to initiate rear window washing and wiping.
NOTE
The rear window wiper is equipped with
overheating protection which means that
the motor is switched off if it overheats.
The rear window wiper works again after a
cooling period (30 seconds or longer,
depending on the heat in the motor and
the outside temperature).
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washing
Wiper – reversing
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen
wipers are on initiates intermittent rear window wiping2. The function stops when
reverse gear is disengaged.
If the rear window wiper is already on at continuous speed, no change is made.
03
NOTE
On cars with rain sensors, the rear wiper is
activated during reversing if the sensor is
activated and it is raining.
2
This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
103
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
General
Heat-reflecting windscreen*
Laminated glass
03
The glass is reinforced which provides better protection against
break-ins and improved sound insulation in the passenger compartment. The windscreen has laminated glass.
For the optimal function of electronic equipment, it should be positioned on the part of
the windscreen with no heat-reflecting film
(see the highlighted area in the above illustration).
Power windows
Water and dirt-repellent coating*
The windows are treated with a surface coating that improves the view
in difficult weather conditions. Maintenance, see page 371.
Areas where IR film is not applied.
IMPORTANT
Dimensions
Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove
ice from the windows. Use the heating to
remove ice from the door mirrors, see
page 107.
A
65 mm
B
150 mm
C
125 mm
The windscreen is equipped with a heatreflecting film (IR) that reduces the solar heat
radiation into the passenger compartment.
The positioning of electronic equipment, such
as a transponder, behind a glass surface with
heat-reflecting film may affect its function and
performance.
104
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Driver's door control panel.
Switch for electric child safety locks* and
disengaging rear power window buttons,
see page 62.
Rear window controls
Front window controls
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
WARNING
Operating
Check that no rear seat passengers are
trapped when the windows are closed
from the driver's door.
WARNING
Check that children or other passengers
are not trapped if the windows are closed,
even when the remote control key is used.
03
NOTE
WARNING
If there are children in the car - remember
to always switch off the power supply to
the power windows by selecting key position 0 and then take the remote control key
with you when leaving the car. For information on key positions - see page 82.
Closing of the windows is stopped and the
window is opened if anything prevents its
movement. It is possible to override the pinch
protection when closing has been interrupted,
e.g. if there is ice forming. After two successive closing interruptions the pinch protection
will be forced and the automatic function
deactivated for a short while, now it is possible to close by continually holding the button
pulled up.
Operating the power windows.
Operating without auto
Operating with auto
All power windows can be operated using the
control panel for the driver's door - the control panels for the other doors can only each
operate their respective power window. Only
one control panel can be operated at a time.
In order for the power windows to be used
the key position must be at least I - see
page 81. The power windows can be operated for a few minutes after the engine has
been switched off and after the remote control key has been removed - although not
after a door has been opened.
One way to reduce the pulsating wind
noise when the rear windows are open is
to also open the front windows slightly.
Operating without auto
Move one of the controls up/down gently.
The power windows move up/down as long
as the control is held in position.
Operating with auto
Move one of the controls up/down to the end
position and release it. The window runs
automatically to its end position.
Operating with the remote control key
and central locking
To remotely operate the power windows from
the outside with the remote control key or
from inside with central locking, see pages 46
and 57.
105
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
Resetting
Door mirrors
WARNING
If the battery is disconnected then the function for automatic opening must be reset so
that it can work correctly.
03
The mirror on the driver's side is the wideangle type to provide optimal vision.
Objects may appear further away than
they actually are.
1. Gently raise the front section of the button to raise the window to its end position
and hold it there for one second.
Storing the position1
2. Release the button briefly.
3. Raise the front section of the button again
for one second.
WARNING
A reset must take place for pinch protection to work.
Door mirror controls.
Adjusting
1. Press the L button for the left-hand door
mirror or the R button for the right-hand
door mirror. The light in the button illuminates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre.
3. Press the L or R button again. The light
should no longer be illuminated.
The mirror positions are stored in the key
memory when the car has been locked with
the remote control key. When the car is
unlocked with the same remote control key
the mirrors and the driver's seat adopt the
stored positions when the driver's door is
opened.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Car key memory
Personal settings in key memory. For a
description of the menu system, see
page 210.
Angling the door mirror when parking1
The door mirror can be angled down for the
driver to view the side of the road when parking for example.
–
1
106
Only in combination with power seat with memory, see page 84.
Engage reverse gear and press the L or R
button.
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
automatically returns to its original position
after about 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing
the button labelled L or R respectively.
Automatic angling of the door mirror
when parking1
When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror
is automatically angled down so that the
driver can see the side of the road when
parking for example. When reverse gear is
disengaged the mirror automatically returns
to its original position after a short time.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Side mirror settings Tilt
left mirror or Tilt right mirror. For a description of the menu system, see page 210.
Automatic retraction when locking1
When the car is locked/unlocked with the
remote control key the door mirrors are automatically retracted/extended.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Side mirror settings Fold
mirrors. For a description of the menu system, see page 210.
1
Resetting to neutral
Home safe and approach lighting
Mirrors that have been moved out of position
by an external force must be reset electrically
to the neutral position for electric retracting/
extending to work correctly:
The light on the door mirrors illuminates when
approach lighting or home safe lighting is
selected, see page 97.
1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons.
Heated windscreen*, rear window and
door mirrors
03
2. Fold them out again with the L and R buttons.
3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
Retractable power door mirrors*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving in narrow spaces:
1. Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously (key position must be at least I).
Heating, windscreen
2. Release them after
approximately 1 second. The mirrors
automatically stop in the fully retracted
position.
Heating, rear window and door mirrors
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L
and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors
automatically stop in the fully extended position.
The function is used to remove ice and misting from the windscreen, rear window and
door mirrors.
One press of the respective button starts the
heating. The light in the button indicates that
the function is active. Switch off the heating
Only in combination with power seat with memory, see page 84.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
107
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
as soon as the ice/misting is cleared in order
not to load the battery unnecessarily. However, the function is switched off automatically after a certain time.
03
Interior rearview mirror
Refer to the section "Heated windscreen and
max. defroster" on page 224.
The door mirrors and rear window are demisted/defrosted automatically if the car is
started in an outside temperature lower than
+7 °C. Automatic defrosting can be selected
in the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Climate settings Auto start rear
defrost. Select between On or Off. For a
description of the menu system, see
page 210.
The compass is deactivated when the heated
windscreen is activated. When the heated
windscreen is deactivated, the compass is
reactivated.
NOTE
Control for dimming
Manual dimming
Bright light from behind could be reflected in
the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use
dimming with the dimming control when
lights from behind are distracting:
1. Use dimming by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment.
2. Return to normal position by moving the
control towards the windscreen.
Automatic dimming*
Bright light from behind is automatically
dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control
for manual dimming is not available on mirrors with automatic dimming.
108
The rearview mirror contains two sensors one forward facing and one rearward facing that work together to identify and eliminate
dazzling light. The forward facing sensor
detects ambient light, while the rearward facing sensor detects the light from vehicle
headlights behind.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking
permits, transponders, sun visors or
objects in the seats or in the cargo area in
such a way that light is prevented from
reaching the sensors, then the rearview
mirror's dimming function is reduced.
The compass* can only be specified for a
rearview mirror with automatic dimming, see
page 110.
Glass roof*
The glass roof is fixed, but the blind can be
operated in key position I or II with the control in the roof console. For information on
key positions - see page 81.
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
03
Automatic opening to end position
Manual opening until the button is
released
Manual closing until the button is
released
Automatic closing to end position
IMPORTANT
•
Avoid touching the blind because it
may then be damaged.
•
Only use the control in the roof console to operate the blind.
109
03 Your driving environment
Compass*
Operation
windscreen is deactivated, the compass is
reactivated.
Calibration
03
1. Stop the car in a large open area free
from steel structures and high-voltage
power lines.
Rearview mirror with compass.
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview
mirror has an integrated display that shows
the compass direction in which the front of
the car is pointing. Eight different directions
are shown with English abbreviations: N
(north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south
east), S (south), SW (south west), W (west)
and NW (north west).
The compass is activated automatically when
the car is started or in key position II, see
page 81. To deactivate/activate the compass
- press in the button on the rear side of the
mirror using a paper clip for example.
2. Start the car.
NOTE
For the best calibration, switch off all electrical equipment (climate control system,
wipers, etc.) and makes sure that all doors
are closed.
3. Hold the button on the underside of the
rearview mirror depressed
approx. 3 seconds. The number of the
current magnetic zone is shown.
The compass is deactivated when the heated
windscreen is activated. When the heated
110
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G030295
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The compass is set for the geographic area to
which the car was delivered. The compass
should be calibrated if the car is moved
across several magnetic zones. Proceed as
follows:
Magnetic zones.
4. Press the button repeatedly until the
required magnetic zone (1–15) is shown.
See the map of magnetic zones for the
compass.
5. Wait until the display returns to showing
the character C, or hold the button on the
bottom of the rearview mirror depressed
for approx. 6 seconds (use e.g. a paper
clip) until the character C is shown.
6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no
more than 10 km/h until a compass direction is shown in the display, indicating
that calibration is complete. Then drive a
further 2 circles to fine-tune calibration.
7. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
03 Your driving environment
Alcolock*
General information on the alcolock
Functions
The function of the Alcolock1 is to prevent the
car from being driven by individuals under the
influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be
started the driver must take a breath test that
verifies that he/she is not under the influence
of alcohol. Alcolock calibration takes place in
accordance with each market's limit value in
force for driving legally.
Battery
Alcolock indicator lamp (4) shows battery status:
WARNING
The Alcolock is an aid and does not
exempt the driver from responsibility. It is
always the responsibility of the driver to be
sober and to drive the car safely.
Operation
Nozzle for breath test.
Switch.
Indicator
lamp (4)
Battery status
Green flashing
Charging in progress
Green
Fully charged
Yellow
Semi-charged
Red
Discharged - fit the charger
in the holder or connect the
power supply cable from
the glovebox.
Transmission button.
Lamp for battery status.
Lamp for result of breath test.
Lamp indicates ready for breath test.
1
03
NOTE
Store the Alcolock in its holder. This will
keep the built-in battery fully charged and
the Alcolock is activated automatically
when the car is opened.
Also called Alcoguard.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
111
03 Your driving environment
Alcolock*
unlocked then it must first be activated
with the switch (2).
Storage
Result after breath test
3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breath
and blow with an even pressure until a
"click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds.
The result will be one of the alternatives in
the following table Result after breath
test.
03
4. If no message is shown then the transmission to the car may have failed - in
which case, press the button (3) to transmit the result to the car manually.
Handheld unit storage and charging station.
•
The handheld alcolock unit is released by
depressing it slightly in its holder and
releasing it - it then springs out and can
be removed from the holder.
•
Replace the handheld unit in the holder
by pushing it in until it engages.
•
Store the handheld unit in the holder this provides it with the best protection
and keeps its batteries fully charged.
Specification
Green lamp +
Alcoguard
Approved test
Start the engine - no
alcohol content measured.
Yellow lamp +
Alcoguard
Approved test
Engine starting possible - measured alcohol
content is above
0.1 promille but below
the limit value in
forceA.
Red lamp + Disapproved test
Wait 1 minute
Engine starting not
possible - measured
alcohol content is
above the limit value in
forceA.
5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alcolock in its holder.
6. Start the engine following an approved
breath test within 5 minutes - otherwise it
must be repeated.
Before starting the engine
The Alcolock is activated automatically and is
then ready for use when the car is opened.
1. When the indicator lamp (6) is green the
Alcolock is ready for use.
2. Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder. If
the Alcolock is outside the car when it is
112
Indicator
lamp (5) +
Display text
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
A
Limits vary between countries, so find out what limits
apply. See also the section entitled General information on
the Alcolock on page 111
NOTE
After a completed period of driving, the
engine can be restarted within 30 minutes
without a new breath test.
03 Your driving environment
Alcolock*
To bear in mind
Before the breath test
In order to obtain correct function and as
accurate a measurement result as possible:
•
Avoid eating or drinking
approx. 5 minutes before the breath test.
•
Avoid excess windscreen washing - the
alcohol in the washer fluid may result in
an incorrect measurement result.
Change of driver
In order to ensure that a new breath test is
carried out in the event of a change of driver depress the switch (2) and the send button (3)
simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. At
which point the car returns to start inhibition
mode and a new approved breath test is
required before starting the engine.
Calibration and service
The Alcolock must be checked and calibrated
at a workshop2 every 12 months.
30 days before recalibration is necessary the
combined instrument panel shows the message Alcoguard Calibr. required. If calibration is not carried out within these 30 days
then normal engine starting will be blocked only starting with the Bypass function will
2
then be possible, see page 113 section
Emergency situation.
The message can be cleared by pressing the
send button (3) once. Otherwise it goes out
on its own after approx. 2 minutes but then
reappears each time the engine is started only recalibration at a workshop2 can clear
the message permanently.
In extremely cold weather the heating time
can be reduced by taking the Alcolock
indoors.
Emergency situation
In the event of an emergency situation or the
Alcolock is out of order, it is possible to
bypass the Alcolock in order to drive the car.
03
NOTE
Cold or hot weather
The colder the weather the longer it takes
before the Alcolock is ready for use:
All Bypass activation is logged and saved
in memory, see page 8 in the section,
Recording data.
Temperature (ºC)
Maximum heating time (seconds)
+10 to +85
10
-5 to +10
60
-40 to -5
180
At temperatures below -20 ºC or above
+60 ºC the Alcolock requires additional power
supply. The combined instrument panel
shows Alcoguard insert power cable. In
which case, connect the power supply cable
from the glovebox and wait until indicator
lamp (6) is green.
After the bypass function has been activated
the combined instrument panel shows
Alcoguard Bypass enabled the whole time
while driving and can only be reset by a workshop2.
The Bypass function can be tested without
the error message being logged - in which
case, carry out all the steps without starting
the car. The error message is cleared when
the car is locked.
When the Alcolock is installed, either the
Bypass or Emergency function is selected as
the bypassing option. This setting can be
changed afterwards at a workshop2.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
113
03 Your driving environment
Alcolock*
Activating the Bypass function
•
03
Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
switch OK button and the button for hazard warning flashers simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds - the combined instrument panel first shows Bypass activated
Wait 1 minute and then Alcoguard
Bypass enabled - after which the engine
can be started.
This function can be activated several times.
The error message shown during driving can
only be cleared at a workshop2.
Activating the Emergency function
•
Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
switch OK button and the button for hazard warning flashers simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds - the combined instrument panel shows Alcoguard Bypass
enabled and the engine can be started.
This function can be used once, after which a
reset must be made at a workshop2.
2
114
Symbols and text messages
In addition to the messages already described, the following may also be shown:
Display text
Meaning/Action
Alcoguard
Restart possible
The engine has been
switched off for less than
30 minutes - engine starting possible without
new test.
Alcoguard
Service
required
Contact a workshop2.
Alcoguard No
signal
Transmission failed send manually with button (3) or take a new
breath test.
Alcoguard
Invalid test
Test failed - take a new
breath test.
Alcoguard
Blow longer
Blowing too short - blow
for longer.
Alcoguard
Blow softer
Blowing too hard - blow
more gently.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Display text
Meaning/Action
Alcoguard
Blow harder
Blowing too weak - blow
harder.
Alcoguard
wait Preheating
Heating not finished wait for text Alcoguard
Blow 5 seconds.
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
Petrol and diesel engines
2. Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed1.
(For cars with automatic gearbox Depress the brake pedal.)
NOTE
3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button
and then release it.
The starter motor works until the engine is
started or until its overheating protection triggers.
IMPORTANT
Do not press in the remote control key
incorrectly turned - Hold the end with the
detachable key blade, see page 49.
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and press it in to its end position. Note that if the car is equipped with
an alcolock then a breath test must first
be approved before the engine can be
started - see page 111.
1
03
Keyless drive*
IMPORTANT
Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/inserted. and START/STOP ENGINE button.
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
than normal for certain engine types during
cold starting. This is done in order that the
emissions system can reach normal operating temperature as quickly as possible,
which minimises exhaust emissions and
protects the environment.
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts wait for 3 minutes before making a further
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the
battery is allowed to recover.
WARNING
Always remove the remote control key
from the ignition switch when leaving the
car, and make sure that the key position is
0 - in particular if there are children in the
car. For information on how this works see page 81.
Follow steps 2–3 for starting petrol and diesel
engines. For more information on Keyless
drive - see page 52.
NOTE
A prerequisite for the engine to start is that
one of the car's remote control keys with
the Keyless drive function is in the passenger compartment or cargo area.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the car while driving or during towing.
Stop the engine
To switch off the engine:
If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the car.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
115
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
•
Press START/STOP ENGINE - the
engine stops.
•
If the car has an automatic gearbox and
the gear selector is not in a position P or
if the car is moving - Press twice or hold
the START/STOP ENGINE button
depressed until the engine stops.
03
Steering lock
A mechanical noise can be perceived when
the steering lock unlocks or locks.
•
The steering lock unlocks when the
remote control key is in the ignition
switch2 and the START/STOP ENGINE
button is depressed.
•
The steering lock locks when the driver's
door is opened after the engine has been
switched off.
Key positions
For information on the remote control key's
different key positions - see page 81
2
116
Cars with Keyless drive must have a remote control key inside the passenger compartment.
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine – external battery
Jump starting
4. Connect one of the red jump lead's
clamps to the donor battery's positive
terminal (1).
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
5. Open the clips on the front cover of the
battery in your car and remove the cover.
If the battery is flat then the car can be
started with current from another battery.
When jump starting the car, the following
steps are recommended to avoid short circuits or other damage:
1. Insert the remote control key in key position 0, see page 81.
6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's positive terminal (2).
7. Connect one of the black jump lead's
clamps to the donor battery's negative
terminal (3).
11. Start the engine in the car with the discharged battery.
IMPORTANT
Do not use the connections when attempting to start, as there is a risk of sparking.
12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order first the black and then the red.
> Make sure that none of the black jump
lead's clamps comes into contact with
the battery's positive terminal or the
clamp connected to the red jump lead!
WARNING
•
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be
enough for the battery to explode.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
large quantities of water. If acid
splashes into the eyes - seek medical
attention immediately.
8. Connect the other clamp to a grounding
point, e.g. right-hand engine mounting at
the top, the outer screw head (4).
2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage of 12 V.
9. Check that the jump lead clamps are
affixed securely so that there are no
sparks during the starting procedure.
3. If the donor battery is installed in another
car - switch off the donor car's engine
and make sure that the two cars do not
touch each other.
10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and
allow it to run a few minutes at a speed
slightly higher than idle
approx. 1500 rpm.
03
For more information on the car's battery see page 357.
117
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
General
Manual gearbox
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibility of mistakenly attempting to engage
reverse gear during normal forward travel.
IMPORTANT
03
To prevent damage to any drive system
components, the working temperature of
the gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of
overheating, a warning symbol in the combined instrument lights up and a text message is shown. Follow the recommendation given in the text message.
Start assistance on a hill - HSA*
The foot brake can be released before setting
off or reversing uphill - the HSA (Hill Start
Assist) function means that the car does not
roll backwards.
The function means that the pedal pressure in
the brake system remains for several seconds
while the driver's foot is moved from brake
pedal to accelerator pedal.
The temporary braking effect releases after
several seconds or when the driver accelerates.
118
Reverse gear inhibitor
•
Follow the gearing pattern printed on the
gear lever and start from neutral position,
N then depress the gear lever before
moving it to R position.
•
Engage reverse gear only when the car is
stationary.
Gear shift indicator*
Gearing pattern.
Look at the actual gearshift pattern imprinted
on the gear lever.
•
Depress the clutch pedal fully during
each gear change.
•
Take your foot off the clutch pedal
between gear changes.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when
parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear
is not sufficient to hold the car in all situations.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
An essential detail in connection with environmental driving is to drive in the right gear and
to change gear in plenty of time.
An indicator is available as an aid on some
variants - GSI (Gear Shift Indicator) - which
notifies the driver when it is appropriate to
engage the next higher or lower gear in order
to obtain the lowest possible fuel consumption. However, taking into consideration characteristics such as performance and vibration-free running, it may be advantageous to
change gear at a higher engine speed. The
framed number indicates the current gear.
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
Manual gearbox
With "Analogue" combined
instrument panel, the gear
positions and indicator
arrows are displayed in its
centre.
Gear shift indicator for manual gearbox. Only one
marker is illuminated at a
time - it is illuminated in the
centre only during normal
driving.
When gearing up/down as recommended, the
upper one is illuminated at +" or the lower at
"-", marked red in the illustration.
Automatic gearbox Geartronic*
Gear positions
Automatic gear positions are
indicated on the right of the
combined instrument panel.
(Only one marker is illuminated at a time - the one
showing the current gear
selector position.)
Symbol "S" for Sport mode is ORANGE when
the mode is active.
P – Parking position
Automatic gearbox
Select P when starting the engine or when
the car is parked.
•
1
In order to be able to move the gear
selector from P position, the brake pedal
must first be depressed firmly.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when
the P position is engaged. Apply the parking
brake as well, as a precaution - see
page 136.
D: Automatic gear positions. +/–: Manual gear
positions. S: Sport mode*.1
Combined instrument panel "Digital" with gear
shift indicator.
03
The combined instrument panel shows the
position of the gear selector using the following indications: P, R, N, D, S*, 1, 2, 3 etc.
NOTE
The gear selector must be in P position to
allow the car to be locked and alarmed.
The gear lever's gearshift pattern varies depending on engine option.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
119
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
IMPORTANT
The car must be stationary when position P is selected.
WARNING
03
Always apply the parking brake when
parking on a slope - the automatic transmission in P is not sufficient to hold the car
in all situations.
R – Reverse
The car must be stationary when position R is
selected.
N – Neutral
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started. Apply the parking brake if the car is
stationary with the gear selector in position N.
D – Drive
D is the normal driving position. Shifting up
and down takes place automatically based on
the level of acceleration and speed. The car
must be stationary when the gear selector is
moved to position D from position R.
Geartronic – Manual gear positions (+/-)
The driver can also change gear manually
using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The
car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal
is released.
120
The manual gear position is reached by moving the lever to the side from position D to the
end position at "+/-". The combined instrument panel's symbol "+/-" changes colour
from WHITE to ORANGE and the digits 1, 2, 3
etc. are displayed in a box which corresponds to the gear that has just been
selected.
•
Move the lever forwards towards "+"
(plus) to change up a gear and release the
lever, which returns to its neutral position
between "+" and "–".
or
•
Pull the lever back towards "–" (minus) to
change down a gear and release it.
The manual gearshift mode "+/-" can be
selected at any time while driving.
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the
driver allows the speed to decrease lower
than a level suitable for the selected gear, in
order to avoid jerking and stalling.
To return to automatic driving mode:
•
Move the lever to the side to the end
position at D.
NOTE
f the gearbox has a Sport programme then
the gearbox will only become manual after
the lever has been moved forwards or
backwards in its "+/-" position. The combined instrument panel then shifts the indication from S to show which of the gears
1, 2, 3 etc. is engaged.
Geartronic - Sport mode (S)
The Sport programme provides
sportier characteristics and allows
higher engine speed for the gears.
At the same time it responds more
quickly to acceleration. During active driving,
the use of a lower gear is prioritised, leading
to a delayed upshift.
To activate Sport mode:
•
Move the gear selector to the side from D
position to the end position at "+S–" - the
combined instrument panel changes indication from D to S.
Sport mode can be selected at any time while
driving.
Geartronic - Winter mode
It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads
if 3rd gear is engaged manually.
1. Depress the brake pedal and move the
gear selector from D position to the end
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
position at "+/–" - the combined instrument panel shifts the indication from D to
the figure 12.
2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever
forward towards "+" (plus) twice - the
combined instrument panel shifts the
indication from 1 to 3.
3. Release the brake and accelerate carefully.
The gearbox "winter mode" means that the
car moves off with a lower engine speed and
reduced engine power on the drive wheels.
Kick-down
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
way to the floor (beyond the position normally
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is
immediately engaged. This is known as kickdown.
shift inhibitor which prevents the kick-down
function.
Geartronic does not permit downshifting/
kick-down which would result in an engine
speed high enough to damage the engine.
Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift
down in this way at high engine speed – the
original gear remains engaged.
When kick-down is activated the car can
change one or more gears at a time depending on engine speed. The car changes up
when the engine reaches its maximum speed
in order to prevent damage to the engine.
2
03
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
The automatic gearbox has special safety
systems:
Parking position (P)
Stationary car with engine running:
Keep your foot on the brake pedal when
moving the gear selector to another position.
Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock
Parking position (P)
To be able to move the gear selector from P
to other gear positions, the brake pedal must
be depressed and the remote control key
must be in position II, see page 81.
Kick-down is used when maximum acceleration is needed, such as for overtaking.
Shiftlock – Neutral (N)
G021351
To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox control program has a protective down-
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever
can be moved forwards or backwards
between P, R, N and D.
•
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
If the accelerator is released from the kickdown position, the gearbox automatically
changes up.
Safety function
The gear selector can be moved forward and
back freely between N and D. Other positions
are locked with a latch that is released with
the inhibitor button on the gear selector.
If the gear selector is in the N position and
the car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds (irrespective of whether the engine is
running) then the gear selector is locked.
If the car has Sport mode* then "S" is shown first.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
121
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
To be able to move the gear selector from N
to other gear positions, the brake pedal must
be depressed and the remote control key
must be in position II, see page 81.
03
Deactivate automatic gear selector
inhibitor
Move the gear selector from the P position and release the button.
4. Refit the storage compartment insert.
Automatic gearbox Powershift*
as the Geartronic automatic gearbox described in the previous section.
Powershift or Geartronic?
In the event of uncertainty as to whether or
not the car is equipped with Powershift transmission, this can be verified by checking the
designation on the gearbox label under the
bonnet - see page 378. The designation ”MPS6” means that it is Powershift transmission - otherwise it is Geartronic automatic
transmission.
To bear in mind
If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat
battery, the gear selector must be moved
from the P position so that the car can be
moved.
Lift out the contoured insert in the compartment behind the centre console and
locate a spring-loaded button in the bottom of the compartment.
D: Automatic gear positions. +/–: Manual gear
positions. S: Sport mode*.3
The Powershift automatic gearbox transmits
the motive force from the engine to the drive
wheels with double mechanical clutch discs,
as opposed to Geartronic which instead uses
a conventional hydraulic torque converter.
Powershift transmission operates in the same
way4 and has similar controls and functions
Press and hold the button.
3
4
122
The transmission's double clutch has overload protection that is activated if it becomes
too hot, e.g. if the car is held stationary with
the accelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for
a long time.
Overheated transmission causes the car to
shake and vibrate, and the warning symbol
illuminates and the combined instrument
panel shows a message. The transmission
can also overheat during slow driving in
queues (10 km/h or slower) on an uphill gradient, or with a trailer hitched. The transmission
cools down when the car is stationary, with
foot brake depressed and the engine running
at idling speed.
The gear lever's gearshift pattern varies depending on engine option.
One exception is the heading "Geartronic - Winter mode": Powershift enables driving away on a slippery road surface if 2nd gear is engaged manually - not 3rd gear.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
Overheating during slow driving in queues
can be avoided by driving in stages:
•
Stop the car and wait with your foot on
the brake pedal until there is a moderate
distance to the traffic ahead, drive forward a short distance, and then wait
another moment with your foot on the
brake pedal.
Symbol
A
IMPORTANT
Use the foot brake to hold the car stationary on an uphill gradient - do not hold the
car with the accelerator pedal. The gearbox could then overheat.
For important information regarding
Powershift transmission and towing - see
page 317.
Text message and action
In some situations the combined instrument
panel may show a text message at the same
time as a symbol is illuminated.
Message
Driving characteristics
Action
Transm. overheat
brake to hold
Difficulty in maintaining even speed at
constant engine speed.
Transmission overheated. Keep the car stationary using the
foot brake.A
Transm. overheat park
safely
Significant pulling in the car's traction.
Transmission overheated. Park the car immediately in a safe
manner.A
Transm. cooling let
engine run
No drive due to overheated gearbox.
Transmission overheated. For fastest cooling: Run the engine
at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position until
the message clears.
03
For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.
The table shows three steps with an
increased degree of seriousness should the
transmission become too hot. In parallel with
the text message, the driver is also advised
that the car's electronics are temporarily
changing the driving characteristics. Follow
the instructions in the text message where
appropriate.
NOTE
The examples in the table are no indication
of the car being defective, but show that a
safety function has been activated with a
view to preventing damage to any of the
car's components.
WARNING
If a warning symbol combined with the text
Transm. overheat park safely is ignored
then the heat in the gearbox may become
so high that the power transmission
between engine and gearbox is temporarily halted in order to prevent the clutch
}}
123
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
from malfunctioning - the car then loses
drive and is stationary until gearbox temperature has cooled to an acceptable
level.
03
For more possible text messages with their
respective proposals for solutions concerning
automatic transmission, see page 207.
A text message extinguishes automatically
after the action has been carried out or after
one press on the indicator stalk OK button.
124
03 Your driving environment
Start/Stop*
Quieter and cleaner
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corporation's core values and it influences all of
our operations. This target orientation has
resulted in several separate energy-saving
functions of which Start/Stop is one, all with
the collective task of reducing fuel consumption, which in turn helps to reduce exhaust
emissions.
General information on Start/Stop
automatically when the journey is due to continue.
control system's fan speed or extremely high
volume on the audio system.
The Start/Stop function gives the driver the
opportunity for a more active environmentally
conscious way of driving the car by means of
being able to allow the engine to stop automatically, whenever appropriate.
Auto-stopping the engine
The following is required for the engine to
auto-stop:
Conditions
Manual or Automatic
Note that there are differences in the
Start/Stop function depending on whether the
gearbox is manual or automatic.
Function and operation
The engine is switched off - it becomes quieter
and cleaner...
Some engine and gearbox combinations
come fitted with a Start and Stop function
which engages in the event of e.g. stationary
traffic or waiting at traffic lights - the engine is
then switched off temporarily and restarts
Start/StopThe function is
activated automatically when
the engine is started with the
key. The driver is alerted to
the function by means of the
symbol for the On/Off button
illuminating in the combined
instrument panel and the
lamp in the On/Off button
illuminating.
All of the car's normal systems such as lighting, radio, etc. work as normal even with an
engine that has stopped automatically,
except that some equipment may have the
function temporarily reduced, e.g. the climate
A
M/A
03
A
Declutch, set the gear lever in neutral position and release the clutch
pedal - the engine stops automatically.
M
Stop the car with the foot brake
and then keep your foot on the
pedal - the engine stops automatically.
A
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
In some cases the engine stops automatically
before the car is completely stationary.
The combined instrument panel's
symbols for the Start/Stop function
illuminate as verification and
reminder that the engine has stopped automatically.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
125
03 Your driving environment
Start/Stop*
Auto-starting the engine
Conditions
With the gear lever in neutral position:
03
M/
AA
M
1. Depress the clutch pedal or
press the accelerator pedal the engine starts.
There is more information available on HSA
on page 118.
2. Engage a suitable gear and
drive.
The following option is also available on a downhill gradient:
HSA means that the pressure in the brake
system remains temporarily available while
the driver's foot is moved from the brake
pedal to the accelerator pedal for driving off
with the engine having stopped automatically.
The temporary braking effect releases after a
couple of seconds or when the driver accelerates.
Deactivating the Start/Stop function
In certain situations, it may
advisable to temporarily
switch off the automatic
Start/Stop function - this is
carried out with a push of
this button.
M
Release the foot brake and let the
car move off - the engine starts
automatically when the speed
exceeds normal walking pace.
Release the foot pressure on the
foot brake - the engine starts automatically and the journey can continue.
A
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
Start assistance HSA
The foot brake can also be released on an
uphill gradient to start the engine automatically - the (Hill Start Assist) function means
that the car does not roll backwards.
126
Disengaged function is indicated by
the combined instrument panel's
Start/Stop symbols and the button's
lamp extinguishing.
A
The Start/Stop function is disengaged until it
is reactivated with the button or until the next
time the engine is started with the key.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Limitations
The engine does not auto-stop
Even if the Start/Stop function is activated,
the engine does not stop automatically if:
Conditions
M/
AA
the car has not achieved
approx. 5 km/h (= fast walking pace)
first after a key start or the last autostop.
M
+A
the driver has opened the seatbelt's
buckle.
M
+A
the capacity of the battery is below
the minimum permissible level.
M
+A
the engine does not have normal
operating temperature.
M
+A
outside temperature is below freezing point or above approx. 30 °C.
M
+A
the windscreen's electric heating is
activated.
M
+A
the environment in the passenger
compartment differs from the preset
valuesB - indicated by the ventilation
fan running at a high speed.
M
+A
03 Your driving environment
Start/Stop*
Conditions
M/
AA
Conditions
M/
AA
the car is reversed.
M
+A
the driver’s door has been opened
with the gear selector in D position.
A
the starter battery's temperature is
below freezing point or too high.
M
+A
the gear selector is moved out of the
D position to S positionC or "+/-".
A
the driver makes greater steering
wheel movements.
M
+A
A
B
C
the exhaust system's particulate filter is full - the temporarily disengaged Start/Stop function is reactivated once an automatic cleaning
cycle has been performed (see
page 305).
M
+A
The engine auto-starts
the road is very steep.
M
+A
a trailer is connected electrically to
the car’s electrical system.
M
+A
the atmospheric air pressure is less
than equivalent to
1500-2400 metres above sea level the current air pressure varies with
the prevailing weather conditions.
M
+A
adaptive cruise control Queue Assist
is activated.
A
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
Car with ECC.
Sport mode.
An engine that has stopped automatically
may restart in some cases without the driver
having decided that the journey should continue. In the following cases the engine also
starts automatically if the driver has not
depressed the clutch pedal (manual gearbox)
or takes his/her foot off the brake pedal (automatic gearbox):
Conditions
M/AA
Misting forms on the windows.
M+A
The environment in the passenger
compartment deviates from the
preset valuesB.
M+A
A
Conditions
M/AA
The outside temperature falls
below freezing point or exceeds
approx. 30 °C.
M+A
There is a temporarily high current
take-off or battery capacity drops
below the lowest permissible
level.
M+A
Repeated pumping of the brake
pedal.
M+A
The car starts to roll - faster than
the equivalent normal walking
pace.
M
The driver's belt lock is opened
with the gear selector in D or N
position.
A
Steering wheel movements.
A
The gear selector is moved from
the D position to "+/-" or R.
A
The driver’s door is opened with
the gear selector in D position.
A
03
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
127
03 Your driving environment
Start/Stop*
WARNING
Do not open the bonnet when the engine
has stopped automatically - the engine
may suddenly start automatically. First
switch off the engine as normal using the
START/STOP ENGINE button before
opening the bonnet.
03
The engine does not auto-start
In the following cases the engine does not
auto-start after having auto-stopped:
A
128
Conditions
M/
AA
A gear is engaged without
declutching - a display text
prompts the driver to set the gear
lever in neutral position in order to
enable automatic starting.
M
The driver is unrestrained, the gear
selector is in P position and the
driver’s door is open - a normal
engine start must take place.
A
Involuntary engine stop with manual
gearbox
In the event that a start-up fails and the
engine stops, proceed as follows:
1. Depress the clutch pedal again - the
engine starts automatically.
2. In certain cases the gear lever must be
set in neutral position. The combined
instrument panel then shows the text Put
gear in neutral
More information and settings
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The car's MY CAR menu system, under the
heading DRIVe, contains an introduction of
Volvo's Start-Stop system, as well as recommendations for energy-saving driving techniques - see page 210.
Symbols and messages
In combination with this indicator
lamp the Start/Stop function may
display text messages in the combined instrument panel for certain situations.
For some of them there is a recommended
action that should be performed. The following table shows some examples.
03 Your driving environment
Start/Stop*
Symbol
Message
Info/Action
M/AA
Engine in Auto Start
Illuminates for a few seconds after Start/Stop has been activated.
M+A
Eco DRIVe OFF
Illuminates for a few seconds after Start/Stop has been switched off.
M+A
Auto Start/Stop Service
required
Start/Stop is not operational. Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
M+A
Engine management system
An automatic function check is carried out.
M+A
Autostart Engine running +
acoustic signal
Activated if the driver's door is opened with auto-stopped engine.
M+A
Engine in Auto Start
The engine is ready to start automatically - waiting for the brake or clutch pedal to be
depressed.
M
Press Start button
The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as normal with the START/STOP
ENGINE button.
M
Depress clutch pedal to
start
The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the clutch pedal to be depressed.
M
Depress brake pedal to start
The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the brake pedal to be depressed.
M
Press brake and clutch to
start
The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the brake or clutch pedal to be depressed.
M
03
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
129
03 Your driving environment
Start/Stop*
Symbol
03
A
Message
Info/Action
Put gear in neutral to start
Gear is engaged without declutching - disengage and set the gear lever in neutral position.
M
Engine in Auto Start
The engine is ready to start automatically - waiting for the brake pedal to be released.
A
Select P or N to start
Start/Stop has been deactivated - move the gear selector to N or P position and start the
engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button.
A
Press Start button
The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as normal with the START/STOP
ENGINE button and the gear selector in P or N.
A
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
If a message does not go out following completion of the action then a workshop should
be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
130
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
M/AA
03 Your driving environment
All Wheel Drive - AWD*
All Wheel Drive is always available
03
AWD principle1.
All Wheel Drive (AWD – All Wheel Drive)
means that the car is driven by all four
wheels.
The power is automatically distributed
between the front and rear wheels. An electronically controlled clutch system distributes
the power to the wheels that have the best
grip on the current road surface. This provides the best traction and prevents wheel
spin. Under normal driving conditions, the
majority of power is transmitted to the front
wheels.
All-wheel drive improves driving safety in rain,
snow and icy conditions.
1
The figure is schematic - details may vary depending on market and model.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
131
03 Your driving environment
Foot brake
General
03
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If
one brake circuit is damaged then this will
mean that the brakes engage at a deeper
level and harder pressure on the pedal is needed to produce the normal braking effect.
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted
by a brake servo.
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the
engine is running.
If the brake is used when the engine is
switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and
more force must be used to brake the car.
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a
heavy load the brakes can be relieved by
using engine braking. Engine braking is most
efficiently used if the same gear is used
downhill as up.
For more general information on heavy loads
on the car, see page 385.
Anti-lock braking system
The car is equipped with ABS (Anti-lock
Braking System) which prevents the wheels
from locking during braking. This means the
ability to steer is maintained and it is easier to
132
swerve to avoid a hazard for example. Vibration may be felt in the brake pedal when this
is engaged and this is normal.
A short test of the ABS system is made automatically after the engine has been started
when the driver releases the brake pedal. A
further automatic test of the ABS system may
be made when the car reaches 10 km/h. The
test may be experienced as pulses in the
brake pedal.
Emergency brake lights and automatic
hazard warning flashers
Emergency brake lights are activated to alert
vehicles behind about sudden braking. The
function means that the brake light flashes
instead of - as in normal braking - shining
with a constant glow.
Emergency brake lights are activated at
speeds above 50 km/h if the ABS system is
working and/or in the event of sudden braking. Once the car's speed has been braked to
below 10 km/h, the brake light stops flashing
and returns to a normal constant glow - hazard warning flashers are activated at the
same time, which flash until the driver accelerates the car to at least 20 km/h or they are
switched off with their button, see page 94.
Cleaning the brake discs
Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs
may result in delayed brake function. This
delay is minimised by cleaning the brake linings.
Manual cleaning is advisable with wet road
surfaces, prior to long-stay parking and after
the car has been washed. Carry this out by
braking gently during a short period while en
route.
Emergency Brake Assistance
Emergency Brake Assistance EBA
(Emergency Brake Assist) helps to increase
brake force and so reduce braking distance.
EBA detects the driver's braking style and
increases brake force as necessary. The
brake force can be reinforced up to the level
when the ABS system is engaged. The EBA
function is interrupted when the pressure on
the brake pedal is reduced.
NOTE
When EBA is activated the brake pedal
lowers slightly more than usual, depress
(hold) the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the brake pedal is released then all
braking ceases.
03 Your driving environment
Foot brake
Maintenance
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service intervals as
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet, see page 340.
IMPORTANT
The wear on the brake system's components must be checked regularly.
Contact a workshop for information about
the procedure or engage a workshop to
carry out the inspection - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols in the combined instrument
panel
Symbol
WARNING
If
and
illuminate at the same
time, there may be a fault in the brake system.
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is
normal at this stage, drive carefully to the
nearest workshop and have the brake system checked - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
03
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must
be investigated.
Specification
Constant glow – Check the
brake fluid level. If the level is
low, fill with brake fluid and
check for the cause of the
brake fluid loss.
Constant glow for 2 seconds
when the engine is started automatic function check.
133
03 Your driving environment
HDC Hill Descent Control
General
03
HDC can be compared to an automatic
engine brake. When you release the accelerator on downhill gradients the car is normally
braked by means of the engine striving for
low engine idling speeds, so-called engine
braking. But the steeper the road and the
more load there is in the car, the faster the
car rolls despite engine braking. In order to
then reduce speed the driver has to assist
using the footbrake.
The function makes it possible to increase/
reduce speed on steep downhill gradients,
with a foot only on the accelerator pedal,
without using the footbrake. The sensitivity of
the accelerator pedal decreases and
becomes more precise by means of the full
actuation of the pedal being restricted to
adjusting engine speed within a limited range.
The brake system brakes itself and provides
the car with a low and even speed, so allowing the driver to fully focus on steering.
HDC is particularly helpful on steep gradients
with an uneven road surface and slippery
sections. E.g. when launching a boat on a
trailer from a ramp.
134
WARNING
HDC does not work in all situations but is
designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely.
Function
The function only operates in first gear position and in reverse gear. For an automatic
gearbox, gear position 1 must be selected,
which is shown with the figure 1 in the combined instrument panel, see page 119.
NOTE
HDC cannot be activated on an automatic
gearbox in position D.
Operation
HDC allows the car to roll at a maximum of
10 km/h forwards with engine braking and
7 km/h backwards. However, any speed
within the gear's speed register can be
selected using the accelerator pedal. When
the accelerator pedal is released, the car is
braked quickly to 10 or 7 km/h respectively,
irrespective of the hill's gradient and without
the need for the footbrake.
HDC is engaged or disengaged using a
switch on the centre console. An indicator
lamp in the button illuminates when the function is switched on.
When HDC is working normally the
combined instrument panel's symbol
illuminates combined with the text message
Hill descent control ON.
The brake lights come on automatically when
the function is operating. The driver can brake
or stop the car at any time by using the footbrake.
HDC is deactivated:
03 Your driving environment
HDC Hill Descent Control
•
with the on/off button on the centre console
•
if a gear higher than 1 is selected on a
manual gearbox
•
if a gear higher than 1 is selected on an
automatic gearbox, or if the gear selector
is moved to position D.
03
The function can be disengaged at any time.
If it takes place on a steep downhill gradient
then the braking effect will not release
directly, but slowly instead.
NOTE
With HDC activated you may experience a
delay between acceleration pedal activation and engine response.
135
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
General
> The combined instrument panel's
warning symbol illuminates.
WARNING
03
NOTE
Always apply the parking brake when
parking on a slope - leaving the car in
gear, or in P if it has automatic transmission, is not sufficient to hold the car in all
situations.
- The combined instrument panel's
warning symbol illuminates regardless of
whether the parking brake is applied
slightly or fully.
3. Release the foot brake pedal and make
sure that the car is at a standstill position.
4. If the vehicle moves then the parking
brake lever must be applied at least a little more firmly.
•
When parking the vehicle, always engage
1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the
gear selector in position P (for automatic
gearbox).
Parking on a hill
The combined instrument panel's warning symbol.
If the car is parked facing uphill:
The lever is located between the front seats.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
Applying the parking brake
•
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
2. Pull the lever firmly.
•
Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
Disengaging the parking brake
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
2. Pull the lever up slightly, press the button,
release the lever and release the button.
136
> The combined instrument panel's
warning symbol extinguishes.
If the driver forgets to release the parking
brake – in addition to the illuminated warning
lamp – a pinging sound combined with a
message in the combined instrument panel
alerts the driver of this when the car's speed
exceeds 10 km/h.
03 Your driving environment
HomeLink® *
General
•
HomeLink®1 is a programmable remote control which is integrated in the rearview mirror
and can remotely control up to three different
devices (e.g. garage door opener, alarm system, outdoor lighting and indoor lighting etc.)
and in doing so replace their remote controls.
In addition to the three programmable buttons, there is also an indicator lamp in the
panel. HomeLink® cannot be activated when
the car is locked from the outside. For more
information on HomeLink®, visit:
www.homelink.com or ring
00 8000 466 354 65 (or premium rate phone
number, +49 6838 907 277).
1
Programming HomeLink®
WARNING
If HomeLink® is used to operate a
garage door or gate, make sure that
there is no-one in the vicinity of the
door or gate while it is moving.
•
The car should remain outside the
garage while a garage door opener is
being programmed.
•
Do not use HomeLink® for any garage
door that does not have safety stop
and safety reverse.
NOTE
Save the original remote controls for future
programming (e.g. when changing to another
car or for use in another vehicle). It is also
recommended that the programming for the
buttons is deleted if the car is sold. See the
section "Resetting the HomeLink® buttons"
on page 138.
In certain vehicles the ignition must be
switched on or in "accessory position"
before HomeLink® can be programmed or
used. If possible, fit new batteries in the
remote control that shall be replaced by
HomeLink® for faster programming and
improved transmission of the radio signal.
The HomeLink® buttons should be reset
before programming. When this has been
done HomeLink® is set in "learn mode"
and ready for programming.
03
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator lamp flashes yellow. This indicates that the button is
ready for programming.
2. Aim the original remote control towards
the HomeLink® button to be programmed
and hold it 5-30 cm from the button. Do
not obstruct the indicator lamp on
HomeLink®.
3. Press and hold the button on the original
remote control. Do not release the button
until the indicator lamp has changed from
a yellow light to either red or green. If the
indicator lamp is red – make a new
HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
137
03 Your driving environment
HomeLink® *
attempt to program the remote control,
holding the original remote control at a
different distance from the HomeLink®
button. A green light indicates that programming was successful.
03
4. Depress the HomeLink® button being
programmed, hold it depressed for
5 seconds and then release it. Repeat if
necessary until the garage door is activated. If the door is not activated, press
the programmed HomeLink® button and
hold it depressed and check the indicator
lamp.
> Steady green light: The indicator lamp
illuminates with a constant glow when
the button is kept depressed, this indicates that the programming is complete. The garage door, gate or similar
should now be activated when the programmed HomeLink® button is
depressed.
Flashing green light: The indicator
lamp flashes while the button is held
depressed. In which case, continue
with the programming steps 5-7 in
order to complete the programming of
a device with rolling code (usually a
garage door opener).
2
3
138
5. Locate the "programming button2" on the
receiver for the garage door for example,
normally located close to the antenna's
bracket on the receiver.
6. Depress and release the receiver's "programming button". The button flashes for
approx. 30 seconds and the next step
must be carried out within this period.
7. While the receiver's "programming button" is still flashing, press the button on
HomeLink® being programmed and hold
it depressed for approx. 3 seconds and
then release it. Repeat the press/hold/
release sequence up to 3 times to conclude the programming.
Operation
When HomeLink® is fully programmed it can
be used in place of the separate original
remote controls.
Press and hold the programmed button3 until
the garage door, alarm system, etc. is activated (may take several seconds). Naturally
the original remote controls can still be used
in parallel with HomeLink® if required.
Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
The indicator lamp remains lit while the button is held depressed.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink®
will work for 30 minutes after the driver's
door has been opened.
If programming problems persist, contact
HomeLink® on: www.homelink.com or ring
00 8000 466 354 65 (or premium rate phone
number +49 6838 907 277).
Resetting the HomeLink® buttons
It is only possible to reset all of the
HomeLink® buttons at the same time, not
each button individually. However, individual
buttons can be reprogrammed, see the following section "Programming individual buttons".
1. Press and hold the two outer buttons on
HomeLink®. Do not release them until the
indicator lamp has changed from a yellow
light to either red or green.
2. Release the buttons.
> HomeLink® is now set in so-called
"learn mode" and is ready to be
reprogrammed, see section "Programming HomeLink®" on page 137.
03 Your driving environment
HomeLink® *
Programming individual buttons
To reprogram an individual HomeLink® button, proceed as follows:
1. Depress the required button and do not
release.
2. When the indicator lamp on HomeLink®
starts to flash yellow (after about 10 seconds), release the button and start with
step 2 of section "Programming HomeLink®" on page 137.
03
For more information or to leave comments
about HomeLink®, visit: www.homelink.com
or ring 00 8000 466 354 65 (or premium rate
phone number +49 6838 907 277).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
139
140
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
142
145
148
150
152
163
166
172
180
181
184
188
191
195
200
G000000
DSTC – Stability and traction control system.......................................
Road sign information - RSI*................................................................
Speed limiter*........................................................................................
Cruise control*......................................................................................
Adaptive cruise control*........................................................................
Distance Warning*.................................................................................
City Safety™.........................................................................................
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*................
Driver Alert System*..............................................................................
Driver Alert System - DAC*...................................................................
Driver Alert System - Lane Keeping Aid*..............................................
Park assist syst*....................................................................................
Park assist camera*..............................................................................
Park Assist Pilot - PAP*........................................................................
BLIS and CTA*......................................................................................
DRIVER SUPPORT
04 Driver support
DSTC – Stability and traction control system
General information on DSTC
The stability and traction control system,
DSTC (Dynamic Stability & Traction Control)
helps the driver to avoid skidding and
improves the car's traction.
The activation of the system during braking
may be noticed as a throbbing sound. The
car may accelerate slower than expected
when the accelerator pedal is depressed.
04
WARNING
The stability and traction control system is
a supplementary function - it cannot handle all situations in all road conditions.
The driver always bears responsibility for
ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely
and that applicable road traffic rules and
regulations are followed.
Active Yaw Control
The function limits the driving and brake force
of the wheels individually in order to stabilise
the car.
Spin Control
The function reduces engine power if the
drive wheels slip against the underlying surface in order to maintain stability and traction.
Traction control system
The function is active at low speed and transfers power from the driving wheel that is spinning to the one that is not.
Engine drag control - EDC
EDC (Engine Drag Control) prevents involuntary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or
engine braking when driving in low gears on
slippery road surfaces.
Involuntary wheel locking while driving can,
amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to steer the car.
Corner Traction Control – CTC
CTC compensates for understeer and allows
higher than normal acceleration in a bend
without wheelspin on the inner wheel, e.g. on
an arcing motorway entrance road to quickly
reach the prevailing traffic speed.
Driver Steering Recommendation – DSR
DSR (Driver Steering Recommendation) helps
the driver steer the car in the right direction
when there is reduced traction or when the
ABS system engages.
The primary role of the DSR function is to
help the driver steer in the right direction
when the car is skidding.
DSR engages by applying slight torque to the
steering wheel in the direction in which the
142
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
car should be steered to maintain/achieve
maximum possible traction and stabilise the
car.
Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA
The function serves to stabilise the car and
trailer combination if it begins to snake, see
page 311.
NOTE
The function is deactivated if the driver
selects Sport mode.
Operation
Selection of level - Sport mode
The DSTC system is always activated - it
cannot be deactivated.
However, the driver can select the Sport
mode, which allows for a more active driving
experience. In Sport mode the system
detects whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements and cornering are more
active than in normal driving and then allows
controlled skidding with the rear section up to
a certain level before it intervenes and stabilises the car.
If the driver stops a controlled skid by releasing the accelerator pedal then the DSTC system intervenes and stabilises the car.
04 Driver support
DSTC – Stability and traction control system
With Sport mode, maximum traction is
obtained if the car has become stuck, or
when driving on a loose surface - e.g. sand or
deep snow.
2. Uncheck the box and back out of the
menu system with EXIT.
> The system then allows a more sporty
driving style.
Proceed as follows to select Sport mode:
The Sport mode is active until the driver
deselects it or until the engine is switched off
- after the engine is started the next time the
DSTC system is back in its normal mode
again.
1. Press the centre console button MY CAR
and search in the screen's menu system
and locate My V40 DSTC. (For information on the menu system, see
page 209).
04
Symbols and text messages
SymbolA
Message
Specification
DSTC Temporarily OFF
DSTC system temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature. - The function is reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.
DSTC Service required
DSTC system disengaged.
•
•
Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
"Message"
There is a message in the combined instrument panel - Read it!
Constant glow for
2 seconds.
System check when the engine is started.
and
}}
143
04 Driver support
DSTC – Stability and traction control system
SymbolA
Message
Specification
Flashing light.
DSTC system is being activated.
Sport mode is activated.
A
04
144
The symbols are schematic.
04 Driver support
Road sign information - RSI*
General information on RSI
Together with the symbol for
the current speed limit, a
sign showing that overtaking
is prohibited may also be
displayed where appropriate.
WARNING
RSI does not work in all situations but is
designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely and that applicable road traffic rules
and regulations are followed.
A corresponding road sign is shown in the
combined instrument panel for
approx. 10 seconds in situations where RSI
detects a sign that involves the end of a
speed limit - or other speed-related information, e.g. end of a motorway.
Operation
Examples of readable speed related1 signs.
1
04
Examples of such signs are:
The Road sign information function (RSI –
Road Sign Information) helps the driver to
remember which road signs the car has
passed through information on - among other
things - the current speed, the start/end of a
motorway or road, and when overtaking is
prohibited.
If both a sign for motorway/road for motorised traffic and a sign showing the maximum
permitted speed are passed, RSI decides to
show the sign symbol for maximum permitted
speed.
End of restriction or motorway
End of all restrictions.
End of motorway.
Recorded speed information1.
When RSI has recorded a road sign with an
imposed speed, the combined instrument
panel displays the sign as a symbol.
Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in the manual only show a few examples.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
145
04 Driver support
Road sign information - RSI*
The speed applicable on an
exit is indicated in certain
markets by means of an
additional sign containing an
arrow.
Following which, the sign information is hidden until the next speed-related sign is
detected.
Additional signs
Setting in MY CAR
There are options for RSI in the MY CAR
menu system, see page 211.
Road sign information On/Off
Speed signs linked to this
type of additional sign are displayed only if
the driver is using the direction indicator.
Some speeds are applicable
only after a specific distance
or at a certain time of day,
for example. The driver's
attention is drawn to the situation by means of a symbol
for an additional sign under
the symbol showing speed.
04
Examples of additional signs1.
Display of additional information
Sometimes different speed limits are signposted for the same road - an additional sign
then indicates the circumstances under which
the different speeds apply. The road section
may be particularly susceptible to accidents
in rain and/or fog, for example.
A symbol for additional sign
in the form of an empty
frame under the combined
instrument panel's speed
symbol means that the RSI
has detected an additional
sign with supplementary
information for the current speed limit.
An additional sign relating to rain is displayed
only if the windscreen wipers are in use.
1
146
The combined instrument panel's speed symbol display can be disabled. To deactivate the
RSI function:
•
Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in the manual only show a few examples.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Uncheck the option Road Sign
Information at Settings Car settings
Road Sign Information and go back
out by pressing EXIT.
04 Driver support
Road sign information - RSI*
Speed warning
Limitations
The RSI function's camera sensor is limited just like the human eye. Find out more about
this on page 177.
Signs which indirectly provide information on
a prevailing speed limit, e.g. name signs for
towns/districts, are not recorded by the RSI
function.
Here are some other examples of what can
disrupt the function:
The driver can opt to receive a warning when
the applicable speed limit is exceeded by
5 km/h or more. This warning is given by the
symbol showing the applicable maximum
speed temporarily flashing when this speed is
exceeded.
To activate speed warning:
•
•
•
•
•
•
04
Faded signs
Signs positioned on bends
Rotated or damaged signs
Concealed or poorly positioned signs
Signs completely or partly covered with
frost, snow and/or dirt.
Check the option Speed alert at
Settings Car settings Speed alert
and go back out by pressing EXIT.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
147
04 Driver support
Speed limiter*
General information on the speed
limiter
A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a
reverse cruise control - the driver regulates
the speed using the accelerator pedal but is
prevented from accidentally exceeding a preselected/set speed by the speed limiter.
Operation
04
Selected speed
When stationary
Speed limiter active
1. Press the steering wheel button
switch on the speed limiter.
Switch on and activate
When the speed limiter is active, its symbol
(6) is shown in combination with a mark (5) by
the set maximum speed in the combined
instrument panel.
Selection and storage of the highest possible
speed in the memory can be made both during a journey and while stationary.
While driving
1. Press the steering wheel button
to
switch on the speed limiter.
> The symbol (6) for speed limiter illuminates in the combined instrument
panel.
Steering wheel keypad and combined instrument
panels, Digital and Analogue.
Speed limiter - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed.
Standby mode
2. When the car is moving at the desired
highest possible speed: Press one of the
or
until the
steering wheel buttons
combined instrument panel shows a
mark (5) next to the desired maximum
speed.
> The speed limiter is then active and the
selected max. speed is stored in the
memory.
Activate and adjust the max. speed.
148
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
to
2. Scroll with the
button until the combined instrument panel shows a mark (5)
next to the desired maximum speed.
> The speed limiter is then active and the
selected max. speed is stored in the
memory.
Changing the speed
To change the stored speed:
•
Adjust with short presses on
or
every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last
presses made are stored in the memory.
To adjust +/- 1 km/h:
•
Hold down the button and release it when
the combined instrument panel shows a
mark (5) next to the desired maximum
speed.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
To temporarily deactivate the speed limiter
and set it in standby mode:
–
Press
.
> The combined instrument panel's
mark (5) changes colour from GREEN
to WHITE (Digital) or from WHITE to
04 Driver support
Speed limiter*
GREY (Analogue) and the driver can
temporarily exceed the set maximum
speed.
The speed limiter is reactivated with
one press on
. The mark (5) then
changes colour from WHITE to GREEN
(Digital) or GREY to WHITE (Analogue)
and the car's maximum speed is limited again.
Temporary deactivation with the
accelerator pedal
and the car's maximum speed is again
limited.
Alarm for speed exceeded
On steep roads the engine braking effect may
be inadequate and the selected maximum
speed exceeded. The driver is alerted about
this with an acoustic signal.
The signal is active until the driver has slowed
to below the selected maximum speed.
Depress the accelerator pedal fully.
> The combined instrument panel shows
the stored maximum speed with a coloured mark (5) and the driver can temporarily exceed the set maximum
speed – the mark (5) changes colour
from GREEN to WHITE (Digital) or
WHITE to GREY (Analogue) during that
time.
The speed limiter is automatically reactivated after the accelerator pedal is
released and the car's speed is slowed
down to below the selected/stored
maximum speed - the mark (5)
changes colour from WHITE to GREEN
(Digital) or GREY to WHITE (Analogue)
04
NOTE
The speed limiter can also be set in standby
mode with the accelerator pedal, e.g. for rapidly accelerating the car out of a situation:
–
The driver can then use the accelerator
pedal to choose a speed without limitation.
The alarm is only activated after 5 seconds
if the speed has been exceeded by at least
3 km/h provided that none of the buttons
or
has been depressed during the
last half minute.
Deactivate
To deactivate the speed limiter:
–
Press the steering wheel button
.
> The combined instrument panel's
speed limiter symbol (6) and the set
speed mark (5) are extinguished. The
selected and stored speed are thus
deleted from the memory and cannot
be resumed with the
button.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
149
04 Driver support
Cruise control*
General information on CC
Operation
The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps
the driver maintain an even speed, resulting in
more relaxing driving on motorways and long,
straight roads with regular traffic flows.
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed and/or suitable
distance.
04
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely.
The steering wheel buttons and combined instrument panel in cars without speed limiter1.
The steering wheel buttons and combined instrument panel in cars with speed limiter1.
Cruise control - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed.
Standby mode
Activate and adjust the speed.
Selected speed (GREY = Standby mode).
Cruise control active - WHITE symbol
(GREY = Standby mode).
Activating and setting the speed
To enable cruise control:
•
1
150
A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Press the steering wheel button
04 Driver support
Cruise control*
>
The cruise control symbol (6) in the combined instrument panel changes from
GREY to WHITE and shows that the
cruise control is in standby mode.
affect the cruise control setting - the car
returns to the set speed when the accelerator
pedal is released.
NOTE
To activate cruise control:
•
>
The current speed is stored in the memory and the combined instrument panel's
marking (5) illuminates at the selected
speed.
NOTE
Cruise Control cannot be enabled at
speeds below 30 km/h.
•
Adjust with short presses on
or
every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last
presses made are stored in the memory.
To adjust +/- 1 km/h:
•
Press
>
The combined instrument panel's marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour from
WHITE to GREY.
•
Hold down the button and release it at
the required speed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
2
.
Automatic standby mode
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and
set in standby mode if:
•
•
•
•
the driver maintains a speed higher than
the set speed for longer than 1 minute.
Resume set speed
To temporarily disengage cruise control and
set it in standby mode:
To change the stored speed:
•
To reactivate the cruise control from standby
mode:
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
Changing the speed
the gear selector/lever is moved to neutral position N (automatic gearbox)
The driver must then regulate the speed.
If any of the Cruise Control buttons are
held depressed for several minutes then it
is blocked and deactivated. To be able to
reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be
stopped and the engine restarted.
At the required speed - press the steering
or
.
wheel button
•
wheels lose traction
the foot brake is used
speed falls below approx. 30 km/h
the clutch pedal is depressed for longer
than 1 minute2
•
Press the steering wheel button
>
The combined instrument panel's marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour from
GREY to WHITE and the speed is then
set to the last speed stored.
.
04
NOTE
A marked speed increase may occur once
the speed has been resumed by selecting
.
Deactivate
The cruise control is switched off with the
steering wheel button (1) or by switching off
the engine - the set speed is deleted from the
memory and cannot be resumed with the
button.
Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
151
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
General information on ACC
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle ahead. Adaptive cruise control provides a more relaxing
driving experience on long journeys on
motorways and long straight main roads in
smooth traffic flows.
04
The driver sets the desired speed and time
interval to the car in front. When the radar
detector detects a slower vehicle in front of
the car, the speed is automatically adapted to
that. When the road is clear again the car
returns to the selected speed.
If the adaptive cruise control is switched off
or set to the standby mode and the car
comes too close to a vehicle in front, then the
driver is warned instead by Distance Warning
(see page 163) about the short distance.
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the adaptive cruise control is
not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable distance.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
Read the whole of this section for information on the limitations of the adaptive
cruise control. The driver must be familiar
with this information before using the
adaptive cruise control.
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the correct distance and
speed, even when the adaptive cruise control is being used.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control
components must only be performed at a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
Automatic gearbox
Cars with automatic gearbox have enhanced
functionality with the adaptive cruise control's
Queue Assistant, see page 157.
1
152
Function
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may differ depending on car model.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Function overview1.
Warning lamp - braking by driver required
Steering wheel keypad
Radar sensor
Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise
control system and a coordinated spacing
system.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake
for humans or animals, and not for small
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary
vehicles and objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot
of water or slush on the road, in heavy
rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding
roads or on slip roads.
The distance to the vehicle ahead is mainly
measured by a radar sensor. Cruise control
regulates the speed with acceleration and
braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a
low sound when they are being used by the
adaptive cruise control.
WARNING
The brake pedal moves when Cruise Control brakes. Do not rest your foot beneath
the brake pedal as it may become trapped.
2
The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the
vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval set by the driver. If the radar sensor cannot see any vehicle in front then the car will
instead maintain the cruise control's set
speed. This also happens if the speed of the
vehicle in front exceeds the cruise control's
set speed.
The adaptive cruise control aims to control
the speed in a smooth way. In situations that
demand sudden braking the driver must
brake himself/herself. This applies with large
differences in speed, or if the vehicle in front
brakes heavily. Due to limitations in the radar
sensor, braking may come unexpectedly or
not at all, see page 159.
The adaptive cruise control can be activated
to follow another vehicle at speeds from
30 km/h2 up to 200 km/h. If the speed falls
below 30 km/h or if the engine speed
becomes too low, the cruise control is set in
standby mode at which automatic braking
ceases - the driver must then take over himself/herself to maintain a safe distance to the
vehicle ahead.
Warning lamp - braking by driver
required
Adaptive cruise control has a braking
capacity that is equivalent to more than 40%
of the car's braking capacity.
If the car needs to be braked more heavily
than cruise control capacity and the driver
does not brake, then the cruise control uses
the collision warning system's warning lamp
and warning sound (see figure on page 172)
to alert the driver that immediate intervention
is required.
04
NOTE
The warning lamp may be difficult to see in
strong sunlight or when wearing sunglasses.
WARNING
Cruise Control warns only of vehicles
which the radar sensor has detected.
Hence the warning may not be given, or it
may be given with a certain delay. Do not
wait for a warning without braking when so
required.
Queue Assistant (in cars with automatic gearbox) can operate in the range of 0-200 km/h, see page 157.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
153
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
Steep roads and/or heavy load
WITH speed limiter
WITHOUT speed limiter
Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control
is primarily intended for use when driving on
level road surfaces. It may have difficulty in
keeping the correct distance from the vehicle
ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes,
with a heavy load or with a trailer - in which
case, be extra attentive and ready to slow
down.
04
Operation
The design of the steering wheel keypad differs depending on whether the car is equipped with the speed limiter3.
Cruise control - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed.
3
154
Cruise control - On/Off or Standby mode.
Standby mode
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Activate and adjust the speed.
Activate and adjust the speed.
(Not used)
Green marking at stored speed (WHITE =
standby mode).
Green marking at stored speed (WHITE =
standby mode).
Time interval
Time interval
ACC is active at the GREEN symbol
(WHITE = standby mode).
ACC is active at the GREEN symbol
(WHITE = standby mode).
A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
Activating and setting the speed
At the same time a speed
range is marked:
To enable cruise control:
•
Press the steering wheel button
-a
similar WHITE symbol is illuminated in the
combined instrument panel (6) which
shows that the cruise control is in
standby mode.
To activate cruise control:
•
At the required speed - press the steering
wheel button
or
.
>
The current speed is stored in the memory, the combined instrument panel
shows a "magnifying glass" around the
selected speed for a second or so and its
marking (6) changes from WHITE to
GREEN.
When this symbol changes colour
from WHITE to GREEN, the cruise
control is active and the car maintains the stored speed.
Only when the symbol shows
a picture of another vehicle is
the distance to the vehicle in
front controlled by the cruise
control.
NOTE
If any of the Cruise Control buttons are
held depressed for several minutes then it
is blocked and deactivated. To be able to
reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be
stopped and the engine restarted.
• the higher speed with
GREEN marking (6) is the
preprogrammed speed
• the lower speed is the
speed of the car in front.
In certain situations, cruise control cannot
be activated. In this case, the combined
instrument panel shows Cruise control
Unavailable, see page 161.
Changing the speed
To change the stored speed:
•
Adjust with short presses on
or
every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last
presses made are stored in the memory.
If speed is increased using the accelera/
buttor pedal prior to pressing the
ton, then it is the car's current speed
when the button is pressed that is stored
in the cruise control.
To adjust +/- 1 km/h:
•
Hold down the button and release it at
the required speed.
Set time interval
04
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be
selected and shown in the
combined instrument panel
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
more lines the longer the
time interval. One line corresponds to approximately 1 second to the
vehicle in front, 5 lines
approximately 3 seconds.
To set/change the time interval:
•
Turn the steering wheel button set's
thumbwheel (or use the
/
buttons for
cars without Speed limiters).
At low speed, when the distances are short,
the adaptive cruise control increases the time
interval slightly.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
155
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
The adaptive cruise control allows the time
interval to vary noticeably in certain situations
in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle
in front smoothly and comfortably.
Note that a short time interval only allows the
driver a short time to react and take action if
any unforeseen traffic problem should arise.
The same symbol is also shown when Distance Warning is activated, see page 163.
04
NOTE
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations.
If Cruise Control does not appear to react
when activated, this may be because the
time distance to the car in front is preventing an increase in speed.
The higher the speed the longer the calculated distance in metres for a given time
interval.
This symbol and stored speed marking then changes colour from
GREEN to WHITE.
Keypad without Speed limiter*
To temporarily disengage cruise control and
set it in standby mode:
•
Press the steering wheel button
.
Standby mode due to driver intervention
The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set automatically in standby
mode if:
•
•
the foot brake is used
the clutch pedal is depressed for longer
than 1 minute4
•
the gear selector/lever is moved to neutral position N (automatic gearbox)
•
the driver maintains a speed higher than
the set speed for longer than 1 minute.
The driver must then regulate the speed.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
To temporarily disengage adaptive cruise
control and set it in standby mode:
•
4
5
156
Press the steering wheel button
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the cruise control setting - the car
returns to the last stored speed when the
accelerator pedal is released.
Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.
Does not apply to a car with Queue Assistant - it manages right down to stationary.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Automatic standby mode
The adaptive cruise control is dependent on
other systems, such as DSTC (see page 142).
If any of these systems stop working then
cruise control is automatically deactivated.
In the event of automatic deactivation a signal
will sound and the message Cruise control
Cancelled is shown in the combined instrument panel. The driver must then intervene
and adapt the speed and distance to the
vehicle ahead.
An automatic deactivation can be due to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
the driver opens the door
the driver takes off his seatbelt
engine speed is too low/high
speed has fallen below 30 km/h5
wheels lose traction
brake temperature is high
the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet
snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).
Resume set speed
Adaptive cruise control in standby mode is
reactivated with one press on the steering
wheel button
- the speed is then set to the
last stored speed.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
NOTE
A marked speed increase may occur once
the speed has been resumed by selecting
.
Overtaking another vehicle
When the car is following another vehicle and
the driver indicates an impending overtaking
manoeuvre with the direction indicator6, the
adaptive cruise control helps to briefly accelerate the car towards the vehicle in front.
This function is active at speeds
above 70 km/h.
WARNING
Be aware that this function can be activated in more situations other than during
overtaking, e.g. when a direction indicator
is used to indicate a change of lane or exit
to another road - the car will then accelerate briefly.
Deactivate
Keypad with Speed limiter
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged
with a short press of the steering wheel but-
6
. The set speed is cleared and cannot
ton
button.
be resumed with the
Keypad without Speed limiter
A short press on the steering wheel button
sets the adaptive cruise control in standby
mode. With a further short press the cruise
control is deactivated. The set speed is
cleared and cannot be resumed with the
button.
Switch from ACC to CC
A button press can be used to deactivate the
adaptive element (spacing system) in the
adaptive cruise control, with the car then only
following the set speed.
•
Hold down the steering wheel button
- the combined instrument panel's symbol changes from
to
.
>
This activates the standard cruise control
CC (Cruise Control), see page 150.
WARNING
Switch from CC back to ACC
Deactivate CC with 1-2 presses on
as
described under the heading "Deactivate".
ACC will be activated the next time the system is switched on.
Queue Assistant
In cars with automatic gearbox the adaptive
cruise control is supplemented with the
Queue Assist function (also referred to as
"Queue Assist").
04
Queue Assistant has the following functions:
•
Extended speed range - also below 30
km/h and at standstill
•
•
Change of target
Automatic braking ceases when stationary
Note that the lowest programmable speed for
the adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h - even
though the cruise control is capable of following another vehicle down to a standstill, a
lower speed cannot be selected.
The car no longer brakes automatically
after switching from ACC to CC - it merely
follows the set speed.
On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
157
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
Extended speed range
NOTE
NOTE
In order to activate the cruise control the
driver's door must be closed and the driver
must be wearing the seatbelt.
04
With an automatic gearbox, the adaptive
cruise control can follow another vehicle
within the range 0-200 km/h.
Press the steering wheel button
.
158
Depress the accelerator pedal.
>
The cruise control will then resume following the vehicle in front.
The driver must intervene him/herself
and brake.
Automatic standby mode with change
of target
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged
and set in standby mode:
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then
there may be stationary traffic in front.
When the adaptive cruise control is following
another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h and
changes target from a moving to a stationary
vehicle, the cruise control will slow down for
the stationary vehicle.
or
•
•
Change of target
Activation of the cruise control below
30 km/h requires a vehicle in front within a
reasonable distance.
•
When the cruise control is following
another vehicle at speeds in excess of
30 km/h and the target is changed from a
moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the
cruise control will ignore the stationary
vehicle and instead select the stored
speed.
See more information under the header
below, "Cessation of automatic braking
when stationary".
NOTE
For shorter stops in connection with inching
in slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is
automatically resumed if the stops do not
exceed approx. 3 seconds - if it takes longer
before the car in front starts moving again
then the cruise control is set in standby mode
with automatic braking. The driver must then
reactivate it in one of the following ways:
WARNING
Queue Assist can keep the car stationary
for a maximum of 4 minutes - then the
brakes release.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
•
when the speed is below 5 km/h and
cruise control is not sure whether the target object is a stationary vehicle or some
other object, e.g. a speed bump.
•
when the speed is below 5 km/h and the
vehicle in front turns off so the cruise
control no longer has a vehicle to follow.
Termination of automatic braking at a
standstill
In the following situations, Queue Assist
stops automatic braking at a standstill:
•
•
the driver opens the door
the driver takes off his seatbelt
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
This means that the brakes are released and
the car will start to roll - the driver must therefore intervene and brake the car himself in
order to maintain its position.
IMPORTANT
Queue Assist can keep the car stationary
for a maximum of 4 minutes - then the
brakes release.
The radar sensor and its limitations
WARNING
The radar sensor is used - apart from by
Adaptive cruise control - by the following
functions as well:
•
Collision Warning with Auto Brake,see
page 172
•
Distance Warning, see page 163.
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the adaptive cruise control is
not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable distance.
The driver's attention is drawn to this over
several stages, with increasing intensity:
The function of the radar sensor is to detect
cars or larger vehicles in the same direction,
in the same lane.
1. Acoustic alarm (pinging) and text message.
Modification of the radar sensor could result
in it being illegal to use.
2. A warning lamp in the windscreen also
starts to flash.
3. "Stabbing" braking occurs.
Queue Assist releases the foot brake and is
set to standby mode in these situations as
well:
•
the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
pedal
•
the gear selector is moved to P, N or R
position
•
the driver sets the cruise control in
standby mode
•
the parking brake is applied.
Read the whole of this section for information on the limitations of the adaptive
cruise control. The driver must be familiar
with this information before using the
adaptive cruise control.
04
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the correct distance and
speed, even when the adaptive cruise control is being used.
IMPORTANT
In the event of visible damage to the car's
grille, or if you suspect that the radar sensor may be damaged:
•
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
Contact a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
The function may completely or partially
disappear - or malfunction - if the grille,
the radar sensor or its bracket is damaged
or has loosened.
WARNING
Accessories or other objects such as auxiliary lamps must not be fitted in front of the
grille.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
159
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake
for humans or animals, and not for small
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary
vehicles and objects.
•
if the speed of vehicles in front is significantly different from your own speed.
Examples where the cruise control does
not work optimally
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision.
In some situations another vehicle is not
detected, or the detection is made later than
expected.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot
of water or slush on the road, in heavy
rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding
roads or on slip roads.
04
In bends the radar sensor may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle
from view.
If the combined instrument panel shows the
message Radar blocked See manual this
means that the radar signals from the radar
sensor are blocked and that vehicles in front
of the car cannot be detected.
In turn this means that - apart from Adaptive
Cruise Control - Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake functions are
not operating either.
if the radar sensor becomes blocked and
cannot detect other vehicles e.g. in heavy
rain or slush, or if other objects have collected in front of the radar sensor.
The following table presents examples of
possible causes for a message being shown
along with the appropriate action.
NOTE
Keep the area in front of the radar sensor
clean - see the "Maintenance" page 175
ACC field of vision.
160
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or
vehicles not driving in the centre of the
lane can remain undetected.
Fault tracing and action
The capacity of the radar sensor to detect
vehicles in front is reduced significantly:
•
Sometimes the radar sensor is late at
detecting vehicles at close distances, e.g.
a vehicle that drives in between the car
and vehicles in front.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
Cause
Action
The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow.
Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.
Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals.
No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the
radar signals.
No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy road
surface.
The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains.
Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer
blocked.
04
Symbols and text messages
SymbolA
Message
Specification
The symbol is WHITE
Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode.
The symbol is GREEN
The car maintains the stored speed.
Standard cruise control is selected manually.
DSTC Normal to enable
Cruise
The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated until DSTC has been set to Normal position - see
page 142.
Cruise control Cancelled
The adaptive cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed himself.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
161
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
SymbolA
Message
Specification
Cruise control Unavailable
The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.
This could be due to:
•
•
Radar blocked See manual
brake temperature is high
the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain.
The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disengaged.
•
04
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of
heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
The driver can then choose to switch to ordinary Cruise control (CC), see page 157 - a text message
provides information on appropriate alternatives.
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 159.
Cruise control Service
required
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged.
Press Brake To hold +
acoustic alarm + warning
light in windscreen + "pulling" brakes
The car is at a standstill and the adaptive cruise control will release the foot brake, which is why the
car may start rolling soon.
•
•
Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
The driver must brake himself/herself. The message remains and the alarm sounds until the
driver depresses the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal.
(Only with Queue Assistant)
Below 30 km/h Only following
Shown with attempts to activate the adaptive cruise control at speeds below 30 km/h without a
vehicle in front within the activation distance (approx. 30 metres).
(Only with Queue Assistant)
A
162
The symbols are schematic.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Driver support
Distance Warning*
General
Distance Warning (Distance Alert) is a function that informs the driver about the time
interval to vehicles in front.
Distance Warning is active at speeds above
30 km/h and only reacts to vehicles driving in
front of the car, in the same direction. No distance information is provided for oncoming,
slow or stationary vehicles.
NOTE
Distance warning is deactivated during the
time the adaptive cruise control is active.
WARNING
Distance warning only reacts if the distance to the vehicle ahead is shorter than
the preset value - the speed of the driver's
vehicle is not affected.
Some combinations of the selected equipment leave no vacant space for a button in
the centre console - in which case the function is handled by the car's menu system MY
CAR under Settings Car settings
Distance Alert. For a description of the menu
system - see page 209.
Set time interval
04
Operation
Controls and symbol for time interval.
Orange warning lamp1.
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
An orange warning lamp in the windscreen
illuminates with a constant glow if the distance to the vehicle in front is shorter than the
set time interval.
Time interval - On.
1
Press the button in the centre console to
switch the function on or off. The function is
switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the
button.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
163
04 Driver support
Distance Warning*
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be
selected and shown in the
combined instrument panel
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
more lines the longer the
time interval. One line corresponds to approximately 1 second to the
vehicle in front, 5 lines
approximately 3 seconds.
04
NOTE
Limitations
The function uses the same radar sensor as
adaptive cruise control and the collision
warning system with auto brake. For more
information on the radar sensor and its limitations, see page 159.
The same symbol is also shown when adaptive cruise control is activated.
NOTE
The higher the speed the longer the calculated distance in metres for a given time
interval.
The set time interval is also used by the
Adaptive Cruise Control function, see
page 152.
Only use the time interval permitted by the
local traffic regulations.
164
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Strong sunlight, reflections or strong variations in light intensity, as well as wearing
sunglasses, could mean that the warning
light in the windscreen cannot be seen.
Poor weather or winding roads could
affect the radar sensor's capacity to detect
vehicles in front.
The size of other vehicles could also affect
detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This
could mean that the warning lamp illuminates at a shorter distance than the setting
or that the warning is temporarily absent.
Extremely high speeds can also cause the
lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance
than that set due to limitations in sensor
range.
04 Driver support
Distance Warning*
Symbols and text messages
SymbolA
Message
Specification
Radar blocked See
manual
Distance Warning temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event of heavy rain or if slush has
collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 159.
Collision warn.
Service required
A
Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake fully or partially disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
04
The symbols are schematic.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
165
04 Driver support
City Safety™
General
City Safety™ is a function for helping the
driver to avoid a collision when driving in
queues, amongst other things, when changes
in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in
attention, could lead to an incident.
04
The function is active at speeds under
50 km/h and it helps the driver by automatically braking the car in the event of imminent
risk of collision with vehicles in front, should
the driver not react in time by braking and/or
steering away.
City Safety™ is activated in situations where
the driver should have started braking earlier,
which is why it cannot help the driver in every
situation.
The driver or passengers normally only notice
City Safety™ if a situation arises where the
car is extremely close to being in a collision.
If the car is also equipped with a Collision
Warning function with Auto Brake*, these two
systems complement each other. For more
information on Collision Warning function with
Auto Brake, see page 172.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance and replacement of City
Safety™ components must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
City Safety™ is designed to be activated as
late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary
intervention.
City Safety™ must not be used as an excuse
for the driver to change his/her driving style. If
the driver solely relies on City Safety™ to do
the braking, there will be a collision sooner or
later.
166
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
City Safety™ does not engage in all driving situations or traffic, weather or road
conditions.
City Safety™ does not react to vehicles
driving in a different direction from the car,
to small vehicles and motorcycles or to
people and animals.
City Safety™ can prevent collision at a
speed difference of less than 15 km/h - at
a higher speed difference, it is only possible to reduce collision speed. In order to
obtain full brake function, the driver must
depress the brake pedal.
Never wait for City Safety™ to engage.
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the proper distance and
speed.
04 Driver support
City Safety™
Function
and may be experienced as being uncomfortable.
If the difference in speed between the vehicles is greater than 15 km/h then City
Safety™ may not prevent the collision on its
own. To obtain full brake force, the driver
must depress the brake pedal. This could
then make it possible to prevent a collision,
even at speed differences above 15 km/h.
Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window1.
City Safety™ detects the traffic in front of the
car with a laser sensor fitted in the top edge
of the windscreen. If there is an imminent risk
of collision, City Safety™ will automatically
brake the car, which may be experienced as
sudden braking.
If the speed difference is 4-15 km/h in relation
to the vehicle in front then City Safety™ can
completely prevent a collision.
City Safety™ activates a short, sharp braking
and stops the car in normal circumstances,
just behind the vehicle in front. For most drivers this is well outside normal driving style
1
On and Off
In certain situations, it may advisable to disable City Safety™, e.g. where leafy branches
could sweep over the bonnet and/or windscreen.
After starting the engine City Safety™ can be
deactivated as follows:
•
When the function is activated and brakes,
the combined instrument panel shows a message to the effect that the function is/has
been active.
NOTE
04
However, the function will be enabled the
next time the engine is started, regardless
of whether the system was enabled or
disabled when the engine was switched
off.
When City Safety™ brakes, the brake
lights come on.
Operation
WARNING
NOTE
The City Safety™ function is always enabled after the engine has been started via
key position I and II (see page 81 on key
positions).
Using MY CAR on the centre console's
screen with its menu system, search and
locate Settings Car settings Driver
support systems City Safety. Select
the Off option. For more information on
the menu system MY CAR, see
page 209.
The laser sensor emits laser light even
when City Safety™ is disabled manually.
To enable City Safety™ again:
•
Follow the same procedure as for disabling, but select the On option.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
167
04 Driver support
City Safety™
Limitations
The sensor in City Safety™ is designed to
detect cars and other large vehicles in front of
the car irrespective of whether it is day or
night.
04
However, the sensor has limitations and has
poorer functionality - or none at all - in e.g.
heavy snowfall or rain, dense fog, dust
storms or white-out situations. Mist, dirt, ice
or snow on the windscreen may disrupt the
function.
Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for
projecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary lamps and bull bars that are higher than
the bonnet limit the function.
The laser light from the sensor in City
Safety™ measures how the light is reflected.
The sensor cannot detect objects with low
reflection capacity. The rear sections of the
vehicle generally reflect the light sufficiently
thanks to the number plate and rear light
reflectors.
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended, which may reduce the
capacity of City Safety™ to avoid a collision.
In such situations the ABS and DSTC systems will provide best possible braking force
with maintained stability.
168
When your own car is reversing, City Safety™
is temporarily deactivated.
City Safety™ is not activated at low speeds under 4 km/h, which is why the system does
not intervene in situations where a vehicle in
front is being approached very slowly, e.g.
when parking.
Driver commands are always prioritised,
which is why City Safety™ does not intervene
in situations where the driver is steering or
accelerating in a clear manner, even if a collision is unavoidable.
NOTE
•
Keep the windscreen surface in front
of the laser sensor free from ice, snow
and dirt (see the illustration for sensor
location, page 167).
•
Do not affix or mount anything on the
windscreen in front of the laser sensor
•
Remove ice and snow from the bonnet
- snow and ice must not exceed a
height of 5 cm.
Fault tracing and action
When City Safety™ has prevented a collision
with a stationary object the car remains stationary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the
car is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving, then speed is reduced to the same speed
as that maintained by the vehicle in front.
If the combined instrument panel shows the
message Windscreen sensors blocked
See manual then it indicates that the laser
sensor is blocked and cannot detect vehicles
in front of the car. This means that City
Safety™ is not operational.
On a car with manual gearbox the engine
stops when City Safety™ has stopped the
car, unless the driver manages to depress the
clutch pedal beforehand.
However, the message Windscreen sensors
blocked See manual is not shown for all situations in which the laser sensor is blocked.
The driver must therefore be diligent about
keeping the windscreen and area in front of
the laser sensor clean.
The following table presents possible causes
for the message being shown, along with
suggestions for appropriate action.
04 Driver support
City Safety™
Cause
Action
The windscreen surface in front of the
laser sensor is dirty or
covered with ice or
snow.
Clean the windscreen surface in
front of the sensor
from dirt, ice and
snow.
The laser sensor field
of vision is blocked.
Remove the
blocking object.
IMPORTANT
If there are cracks, scratches or stone
chips in the windscreen in front of either of
the laser sensor's "windows" and they
cover a surface of approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm
(or larger), then a workshop must be contacted for replacement of the windscreen
(see the illustration for sensor location,
page 167) - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
Failure to take action may result in
reduced performance for City Safety™.
Laser sensor
The City Safety™ function includes a sensor
which transmits laser light. Contact a qualified workshop in the event of a fault or if the
laser sensor needs servicing - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended. It is absolutely essential to follow the prescribed
instructions when handling the laser sensor.
The following two labels are affixed directly
on the laser sensor unit:
04
To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or
reduced operation for City Safety™, the
following also applies:
•
Volvo recommends that you do not
repair cracks, scratches or stone chips
in the area in front of the laser sensor instead, the whole windscreen should
be replaced.
•
Before replacing a windscreen, contact an authorised Volvo workshop to
verify that the correct windscreen is
ordered and fitted.
•
The same type or Volvo-approved
windscreen wipers must be fitted during replacement.
The upper label in the figure describes the
laser beam's classification:
•
Laser radiation - Do not look into the
laser beam with optical instruments Class 1M laser product.
The lower label in the figure describes the
physical data of the laser beam:
169
04 Driver support
City Safety™
•
IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies
with FDA (U.S. Food Administration)
standards for laser product design with
the exception of deviations in accordance
with "Laser Notice No. 50" from
26 July 2001.
If any of these instructions are not followed
then there is a risk of eye injury!
•
Radiation data for the laser sensor
The following table specifies the laser sensor's physical data.
04
Maximum pulse energy
2.64 µJ
Maximum average output
45 mW
Pulse duration
Divergence (horizontal x vertical)
170
Never look into the laser sensor (which
emits spreading invisible laser radiation) at a distance of 100 mm or closer
with magnifying optics such as a magnifying glass, microscope, lens or similar optical instruments.
•
Testing, repair, removal, adjustment
and/or replacement of the laser sensor's spare parts must only be carried
out by a qualified workshop - we recommend an authorised Volvo workshop.
•
To avoid exposure to harmful radiation, do not carry out any readjustments or maintenance other than
those specified here.
33 ns
28° × 12°
laser class 3B as per standard IEC
60825-1. Laser class 3B is not eyesafe and therefore entails a risk of
injury.
WARNING
•
The repairer must follow specially
drawn up workshop information for the
laser sensor.
•
Do not remove the laser sensor (this
includes removing the lenses). A
removed laser sensor does not fulfil
•
The laser sensor's connector must be
unplugged before removal from the
windscreen.
•
The laser sensor must be fitted onto
the windscreen before the sensor's
connector is plugged in.
•
The laser sensor transmits laser light
when the remote control key is in position II and also with the engine
switched off (see page 81 on key positions).
Symbols and text messages
In conjunction with automatic braking by the
City Safety™ system, one or more symbols
may illuminate in the combined instrument
panel and a text message may be shown.
A text message can be acknowledged by
briefly pressing the OK button on the direction indicator stalk.
04 Driver support
City Safety™
SymbolA
Message
Meaning/Action
Auto braking by City Safety
City Safety™ is braking or has automatically braked.
Windscreen sensors blocked
See manual
The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it.
•
Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor.
Read about the limitations of the laser sensor, see page 168.
City Safety Service required
City Safety™ is not operational.
•
A
04
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
The symbols are schematic.
171
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*
Two system levels
General
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver
when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian or vehicle in front that is stationary or
moving in the same direction.
04
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection is activated in situations where
the driver should have started braking earlier,
which is why it cannot help the driver in every
situation.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection is designed to be activated as
late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary
intervention.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection may prevent a collision or
reduce the collision speed.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection must not be used as an
excuse for the driver to change his/her driving
style. If the driver solely relies on Collision
Warning with Auto Brake to do the braking,
there will be a collision sooner or later.
1
2
172
Function
Depending on how the car equipped, the Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian
Protection function may appear in two variants: Level 1 and Level 2.
Level 1
The driver is merely warned of occurring
obstacles by means of visual and acoustic
signals - no automatic braking intervenes, the
driver must himself brake.
Level 2
The driver is warned of occurring obstacles
by means of visual and acoustic signals - the
car is braked automatically if the driver himself does not act within a reasonable time.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of components included in
Collision Warning with Auto Brake &
Pedestrian Detection must only be carried
out in a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
With system Level 2 only.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Function overview1.
Audio-visual warning signal in the event
of a collision risk.
Radar sensor2
Camera sensor
Collision Warning with Auto Brake executes
three steps in the following order:
1. Collision warning
2. Brake support2
3. Auto Brake2
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*
The collision warning system and City
Safety™ complement each other. For more
information on City Safety™, see page 166.
Brake support also reinforces the driver's
braking if the system considers that the braking is not sufficient to avoid a collision.
1 - Collision warning
3 - Auto Brake2
The driver is first warned of a potentially
imminent collision.
The collision warning system detects pedestrians, stationary vehicles as well as vehicles
driving in the same direction in front of the
car.
If there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian
or a vehicle, the driver's attention is attracted
with a flashing red warning signal (no. [1] in
the illustration on page 172) and an acoustic
signal
2 - Brake support2
If the risk of collision has increased further
after the collision warning then the brake support is activated.
This means that the brake system is prepared
for fast braking by applying the brakes gently,
which may be experienced as a slight jerk.
If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently
quickly then full brake function is implemented.
2
The automatic brake function is activated
last.
If in this situation the driver has not yet
started to take evasive action and the risk of
collision is imminent then the automatic braking function is deployed - this takes place
irrespective of whether or not the driver
brakes. Braking then takes place with full
brake force in order to reduce collision speed,
or with limited brake force if it is sufficient to
avoid a collision.
WARNING
The collision warning system does not
engage in all driving situations or traffic,
weather or road conditions. The collision
warning system does not react to vehicles
driving in another direction to the car or to
animals.
Warning only activated in the event of a
high risk for collision. This section "Function" and the section "Limitations" inform
about limitations that the driver must be
aware of before using the Collision Warning system with Auto Brake.
04
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians are switched off at vehicle
speeds exceeding 80 km/h.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians do not work in darkness and
tunnels - not even when streetlights are lit.
The auto-brake function can prevent a collision or reduce collision speed. To ensure
full brake performance, the driver should
always depress the brake pedal - even
when the car auto-brakes.
Never wait for a collision warning. The
driver is always responsible that the correct distance and speed are maintained even when the collision warning system
with auto-brake is used.
With system Level 2 only.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
173
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*
Detection of pedestrians
•
In order for a pedestrian to be detected
he/she must appear full-length and have
a height of at least 80 cm.
•
The system cannot detect a pedestrian
carrying larger items.
•
The camera sensor's ability to see pedestrians at dusk and dawn is limited - just
like the human eye.
•
The camera sensor's capacity to detect
pedestrians is deactivated when driving in
darkness and tunnels - even when streetlights are lit.
04
Optimal examples of what the system regards as
pedestrians with clear body contours.
Optimal performance of the system requires
that the system function that detects pedestrians receives as unambiguous information
as possible about the contours of the body this implies the opportunity to identify the
head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower
body combined with a normal human pattern
of movement.
WARNING
Operation
Settings are made from MY CAR via the centre console's screen and menu system. For
information on how the menu system is used,
see page 209.
Warning signals On and Off
You can select whether the collision warning
system's acoustic and visual warning signals
should be switched on or off.
When starting the engine, the setting that was
selected when the engine was switched off is
obtained automatically.
NOTE
Collision Warning with Auto Brake &
Pedestrian Detection is an assistance tool.
This function cannot detect all pedestrians
in all situations and it cannot see e.g. partially obscured pedestrians, people in clothing that hides the contours of the body or
pedestrians shorter than 80 cm.
•
If large parts of the body are not visible to the
camera then the system cannot detect a
pedestrian.
The driver is always responsible that
the vehicle is driven properly and with
a safety distance adapted to the
speed.
The Brake Support and Auto Brake functions are always activated - they cannot be
deactivated.
Light and acoustic signals
To deactivate the light and acoustic signals:
•
Locate Settings Car settings
Driver support systems Collision
Warning - there select to uncheck the
box.
The warning lamp (no. [1] in the figure page
172) is tested every time the engine is started
by briefly illuminating the warning lamp's separate points of light if the collision warning
174
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*
system's light and acoustic warnings are activated.
Acoustic signal
The warning sound can be activated/deactivated separately:
•
Select On or Off in the menu system
under Settings Car settings Driver
support systems Collision Warning
Warning sound.
Set warning distance
The warning distance regulates the distance
at which the visual and acoustic warnings are
deployed.
•
Select Long, Normal or Short in the
menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Driver support
systems Collision Warning
Warning distance
The warning distance determines the system's sensitivity. Warning distance Long provides an earlier warning. First test with Long
and if this setting produces too many warnings, which could be perceived as irritating in
certain situations, then change to warning
distance Normal.
Only use warning distance Short in exceptional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.
Checking settings
NOTE
The settings required can be controlled on
the centre console's screen. Search with the
menu system MY CAR under Settings Car
settings Driver support systems
Collision Warning, see page 209.
When the adaptive cruise control is in use
the warning lamp and warning sound will
be used by the cruise control even if the
collision warning system is switched off.
The collision warning system warns the
driver in the event of a risk of a collision,
but the function cannot shorten driver
reaction time.
Maintenance
In order for the collision warning system to
be effective, always drive with the Distance Alert set at time interval 4–5, see
page 163.
04
NOTE
Even if the warning distance has been set
to Long warnings could be perceived as
being late in certain situations, e.g. when
there are large differences in speed or if
vehicles in front brake heavily.
WARNING
No automatic system can guarantee
100 % correct function in all situations.
Therefore, never test Collision Warning
with Auto Brake by driving at people or
vehicles - this may cause severe damage
and injury and risk lives.
Camera and radar sensor.
For the sensors to work correctly, they must
be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be
cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
will reduce their function and may prevent
measurement.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
175
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*
Limitations
Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Pedestrian Detection is active from
approx. 4 km/h.
04
The visual warning signal (no. [1] in the illustration on page 172) may be difficult to notice
in the event of strong sunlight, reflections,
when sunglasses are being worn or if the
driver is not looking straight ahead. The warning sound should therefore always be activated.
NOTE
The visual warning signal can be temporarily disengaged in the event of high passenger compartment temperature caused by
strong sunlight for example. If this occurs
then the warning sound is activated even if
it is deactivated in the menu system.
•
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended, which may reduce the
capacity to avoid a collision. In such situations the ABS and DSTC systems will provide
best possible braking force with maintained
stability.
Warnings may not appear if the distance to the vehicle in front is small or
if steering wheel and pedal movements are large, e.g. a very active driving style.
WARNING
Warnings and brake interventions could be
implemented late or not at all if the traffic
situation or external influences mean that
the radar or camera sensor cannot detect
a pedestrian or a vehicle in front correctly.
The sensor system has a limited range for
pedestrians and the system therefore provides effective warnings and brake interventions at vehicle speeds up to 50 km/h.
For stationary or slow-moving vehicles,
warnings and brake interventions are
effective at vehicle speeds up to 70 km/h.
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving
vehicles could be disengaged due to darkness or poor visibility.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians are switched off at vehicle
speeds exceeding 80 km/h.
The collision warning system uses the same
radar sensors as adaptive cruise control. For
more information on the radar sensor and its
limitations, see page 159.
If warnings are perceived as being too frequent or disturbing then the warning distance
can be reduced. This then leads to the system providing a warning at a later stage,
which reduces the total number of warnings;
see the section "Set warning distance" on
page 175.
176
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily deactivated with reverse gear engaged.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not activated at low speeds - under 4 km/h, which is
why the system does not intervene in situations where the car is approaching a vehicle
in front very slowly, e.g. when parking.
In situations where the driver demonstrates
active, aware driving behaviour, a collision
warning may be postponed slightly in order to
keep unnecessary warnings to a minimum.
When Auto Brake has prevented a collision
with a stationary object the car remains stationary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the
car is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving, then speed is reduced to the same speed
as that maintained by the vehicle in front.
On a car with manual gearbox the engine
stops when Auto Brake has stopped the car,
unless the driver manages to depress the
clutch pedal beforehand.
Camera sensor limitations
The car’s camera sensor is also used - as
well as by Collision Warning with Auto Brake
- by the functions:
•
Automatic main/dipped beam dimming see page 92
•
Road sign information - see page 145.
•
•
Driver Alert Control – see page 181
cannot be detected in some situations, or
they are detected later than anticipated.
Lane keeping assistant - see page 184
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist
and dirt.
During very high temperatures the camera is
temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes
after the engine is started in order to protect
camera functionality.
Fault tracing and action
Do not stick or attach anything to the
windscreen in front of the camera sensor
as this may reduce effectiveness or cause
one or more of the systems dependent on
the camera to stop working.
If the combined instrument panel shows the
message Windscreen Sensors blocked
then this means that the camera sensor is
blocked and cannot detect pedestrians, vehicles or road markings in front of the car.
The camera sensors have limitations similar
to the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in
darkness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick
fog for example. Under such conditions the
functions of camera-dependent systems
could be significantly reduced or temporarily
disengaged.
At the same time, this means that - besides
Collision Warning with Auto Brake - the Automatic main/dipped beam dimming, Road Sign
Information, Driver Alert Control and Lane
Keeping Aid functions will not have full functionality either.
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriageway, snow or ice on the road surface,
dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings
could also significantly reduce camera sensor
function when it is used to scan the carriageway and detect pedestrians and other vehicles.
04
The following table presents possible causes
for a message being shown along with the
appropriate action.
The field of vision of the camera sensor is limited, which is why pedestrians and vehicles
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
177
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*
04
Cause
Action
Cause
Action
Cause
Action
The windscreen
surface in front of
the camera is dirty
or covered with ice
or snow.
Clean the windscreen surface in
front of the camera
from dirt, ice and
snow.
Wait. It may take
several minutes for
the camera to
measure the visibility.
Dirt has appeared
between the inside
of the windscreen
and the camera.
Thick fog, heavy
rain or snow means
that the camera
does not work sufficiently well.
No action. At times
the camera does
not work during
heavy rain or snowfall.
The windscreen
surface in front of
the camera has
been cleaned but
the message
remains.
Visit a workshop to
have the windscreen inside the
camera cover
cleaned - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols and text messages
SymbolA
Message
Specification
Collis'n warning OFF
Collision warning system switched off.
Shown when the engine is started.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Collision warn.
Unavailable
The collision warning system cannot be activated.
Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Auto braking was
activated
178
Auto Brake has been active.
The message clears after one press of the OK button.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*
SymbolA
Message
Specification
Windscreen sensors
blocked See manual
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
•
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 177.
Radar blocked See
manual
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if
slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
04
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 159.
Collision warn. Service required
A
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
179
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System*
General information on Driver Alert
System
Driver aid status
The Driver Alert System is intended to assist
drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or
who are inadvertently leaving the lane they
are driving on.
The Driver Alert System consists of different
functions which can either be switched on at
the same time or individually:
04
•
Driver Alert Control – DAC, see
page 181.
•
Lane Keeping Aid - LKA, see page 184.
A switched-on function is set in standby
mode and is not activated automatically until
speed exceeds 65 km/h.
The current status for all driver aids can be
checked in MY CAR, see page 211.
The function is deactivated again when speed
decreases to below 60 km/h.
The functions use a camera which is dependent on the lane having side markings painted
on each side.
WARNING
Driver Alert System does not work in all
situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely.
180
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - DAC*
General information on DAC
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly
deteriorating driving ability and it is primarily
intended for major roads. The function is not
intended for city traffic.
Operation
In some cases driving ability is not affected
despite driver fatigue. In which case there
may not be any warning issued for the driver.
For this reason it is always important to stop
and take a break in the event of any signs of
driver fatigue, irrespective of whether or not
DAC issues a warning.
04
NOTE
The DAC (Driver Alert Control) function is
intended to attract the driver's attention when
he/she starts to drive less consistently, e.g. if
he/she becomes distracted or starts to fall
asleep.
A camera detects the side markings painted
on the carriageway and compares the section
of the road with the driver's steering wheel
movements. The driver is alerted if the vehicle
does not follow the carriageway evenly.
NOTE
The camera sensor has certain limitations see page 177.
The function must not be used to extend a
period of driving. Always plan breaks at
regular intervals, and make sure you are
well rested.
On/Off
Limitation
In some cases the system may issue a warning despite driving ability not deteriorating, for
example:
•
•
in strong side winds.
on rutted road surfaces.
Settings are made from the centre console's
screen and its menu system. For information
on how the menu system is used, see
page 209.
To set Driver Alert in standby mode:
•
In MY CAR, search for Car settings
Driver support systems Driver Alert
and check the box - No check in the box:
Function disengaged.
Function
Driver Alert is activated when speed exceeds
65 km/h and remains active as long as the
speed is over 60 km/h.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
181
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - DAC*
If the vehicle is being driven erratically, the driver is notified with an
audible signal plus the text message
Driver Alert Time for a break - the
linked symbol is illuminated in the combined
instrument panel at the same time. The warning is repeated after a time if driving ability
does not improve.
04
182
The warning symbol can go off:
•
Press the left stalk switch OK button.
WARNING
An alarm should be taken very seriously,
as a sleepy driver is often not aware of
his/her own condition.
In the event of an alarm or a feeling of
tiredness; stop the car in a safe manner as
soon as possible and rest.
Studies have shown that it is equally as
dangerous to drive while tired as it is under
the influence of alcohol.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - DAC*
Symbols and messages
Combined instrument panel
SymbolA
Message
Specification
Driver Alert Time for a
break
The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.
Windscreen sensors
blocked See manual
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
•
04
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 177.
Driver Alert system Service required
A
The system is disengaged.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
The symbols are schematic.
Screen
Symbol
Message
Specification
Driver Alert OFF
The function is disengaged.
Driver Alert Available
The function is activated.
Driver Alert Standby <65 km/h
The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h.
Driver Alert Unavailable
The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 177.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
183
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - Lane Keeping Aid*
WARNING
General information on the Lane
Keeping Aid
LKA is merely a driver's aid and does not
engage in all driving situations or traffic,
weather or road conditions.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely and that applicable laws and road
traffic regulations are followed.
Function
04
The Lane Keeping Aid function (Lane Keeping
Aid) is intended for use on motorways and
similar major roads to reduce the risk of the
vehicle accidentally leaving its own lane in
certain situations.
The Lane Keeping Aid is active within the
speed interval 65-200 km/h on roads with
clearly visible side lines. The function is temporarily deactivated on narrow roads with
less than 2.6 metres between the lane side
lines.
A camera reads the painted side lines of the
road/lane. If the car is about to cross a side
line, the Lane Keeping Aid actively steers the
car back into the lane with slight steering torque in the steering wheel.
If the car reaches or passes a side line, the
Lane Keeping Aid warns the driver with pulsing vibrations in the steering wheel.
184
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Off & On
Press the button in the centre console to activate or deactivate the function. The function
is switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the
button.
Some combinations of the selected equipment leave no vacant space for an On/Off
button in the centre console - in which case
the function is handled instead by the car's
menu system MY CAR. Here, proceed as follows:
•
Select On or Off under Settings
settings Lane Keeping Aid.
Car
For a description of the menu system - see
page 209.
In addition, the following selections can be
made in MY CAR:
•
Warning with vibration in the steering
wheel: Vibration only - On or Off.
•
Active steering: Steering assist only On or Off.
•
Both Warning with vibration in the steering wheel and Active steering: Full
function - On or Off.
Active steering
The Lane Keeping Aid strives to keep the car
within the side lines for the lane.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - Lane Keeping Aid*
Warning with vibration in the steering
wheel
Dynamic cornering
04
LKA intervenes and steers away.
If the vehicle approaches the left or right side
line of the lane and the direction indicator is
not activated, the car is steered back into the
lane.
1
LKA does not engage in sharp inside curves.
LKA steers and warns with pulsing steering
wheel vibrations1.
If the vehicle passes a side line, the Lane
Keeping Aid warns the driver with pulsing
vibrations in the steering wheel. This occurs
regardless of whether the car is actively
steered back by applying a slight steering torque.
In certain cases, the Lane Keeping Aid allows
the car to cross side lines without engaging
active steering or warning with pulsing vibrations in the steering wheel. Using an adjacent
lane for dynamic cornering when there is a
clear line of vision is an example of one such
case.
The figure shows 3 pulsing vibrations when the side line is passed.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
185
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - Lane Keeping Aid*
Operation
NOTE
The function is supplemented with selfexplanatory graphics in different situations.
Here are some examples:
In certain demanding situations LKA may
find it difficult to assist the driver correctly
- in which case it is recommended that
LKA is switched off.
NOTE
Examples of such a situation could be:
LKA is temporarily deactivated for as long
as the direction indicator is switched on.
04
LKA intervenes on the right-hand side (marked in
red in the figure).
The Lane Keeping Aid intervenes and steers
away from the side line - this is indicated
with:
•
RED line for the side in question.
Limitations
•
LKA "sees" and follows the side lines (marked in
red in the figure).
If the Lane Keeping Aid is active and
detects/"sees" the side lines, the LKA symbol
is shown with WHITE lines.
•
186
GREY side line – the Lane Keeping Aid
does not see a line on that side of the car.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The Lane Keeping Aid camera sensor is
restricted in a similar way to the human
eye. For more information, see page 177.
•
•
•
•
•
roadworks
winter road conditions
poor road surface
very sporty driving style
poor weather with reduced visibility.
Hands on the steering wheel
In order for Lane Keeping Aid to operate, the
driver must have his/her hands on the steering wheel. LKA continual monitors this. If
hands are not detected on the steering wheel,
a text message encouraging the driver to
actively steer the car is shown.
If the driver does not follow the request to
begin steering, the Lane Keeping Aid goes
into standby mode and will remain in this
mode until the driver begins to steer the car
again.
Symbols and text messages
In situations where the LKA function fails or is
interrupted, the combined instrument panel
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - Lane Keeping Aid*
may show a symbol, along with an explanatory message. If so, follow the recommendation given.
SymbolA
Message examples:
Message
Specification
Lane Keeping Aid Unavailable
at this speed
The Lane Keeping Aid is set to standby mode because the speed is lower than 65 km/h.
Lane Keeping Aid Unavailable
for current markings
The lane does not have clear side lines or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. Read
about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 177.
Lane Keeping Aid Available
The function scans the lane's side lines.
Windscreen sensors blocked
See manual
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
04
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
•
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 177.
A
Lane Keeping Aid Service
required
The system is disengaged.
Lane Keeping Aid Interrupted
LKA has been set to standby mode. The lines of the LKA symbol indicate when the function is
active again.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
The table symbols are schematic. The symbols shown in the combined instrument panel may have a slightly different appearance.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
187
04 Driver support
Park assist syst*
WARNING
General
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on
the centre console's screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.
04
Parking assistance sound level can be
adjusted during the ongoing acoustic signal
using the centre console's VOL knob or in the
car's menu system MY CAR - see page 209.
Parking assistance is available in two variants:
•
•
•
Parking assistance does not relinquish
the driver's own responsibility during
parking.
•
The sensors have blind spots where
obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Be aware of e.g. people and animals
near the car.
Function
Rear only
Screen view - showing an obstacle left front and
right rear.
Both front and rear.
The centre console's screen shows an overview of the relationship between the car and
detected obstacle.
NOTE
When a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, the protrusion of the
towbar is included when the function
measures the parking space.
On/Off for the sensors for parking assistance and
CTA1.
The system is automatically activated when
the engine is started - the switch's On/Off
lamp is illuminated. If parking assistance is
1
188
switched off with the button, the lamp goes
out.
Side warning, see page 203
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Marked sectors show which of the four sensor(s) detected an obstacle. The closer to the
car symbol a selected sector box is, the
shorter the distance between the car and a
detected obstacle.
The frequency of the signal increases the
shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of
or behind the car. Other sound from the audio
system is muted automatically.
04 Driver support
Park assist syst*
When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is
constant and the active sensor's field nearest
the car is filled in. If the detected obstacle is
within the distance for the constant tone both
behind and in front of the car, then the tone
sounds alternately from the loudspeakers.
Rear parking assistance
Front parking assistance
IMPORTANT
Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or
low barriers may be in the "signal shadow"
and are then temporarily not detected by
the sensors - the pulsating tone may then
unexpectedly stop instead of changing
over to the expected constant tone.
The sensors cannot detect high objects,
such as projecting loading docks.
•
In such situations, pay extra attention
and manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly slowly or stop the current
parking manoeuvre - there may be a
high risk of damage to vehicles or
other objects since the sensors are
temporarily unable to function optimally.
04
The distance covered to the rear of the car is
about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for
obstacles behind comes from one of the rear
loudspeakers.
The distance covered in front of the car is
about 0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for
obstacles in front comes from one of the front
loudspeakers.
Rear parking assistance is activated when
reverse gear is engaged.
Front park assist is active up to
approx. 10 km/h. The lamp in the button is
illuminated in order to indicate that the system is activated. When the speed is below
10 km/h the system is reactivated.
When reversing with e.g. a trailer on the tow
bar, rear parking assistance is switched off
automatically - otherwise the sensors would
react to the trailer.
NOTE
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike
carrier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine trailer wiring - parking assistance may
need to be switched off manually in order
that the sensors do not react to them.
IMPORTANT
When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember
that these must not obscure the sensors the auxiliary lamps may then be perceived
as an obstacle.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
189
04 Driver support
Park assist syst*
Fault indicator
Cleaning the sensors
If the combined instrument panel's
information symbol illuminates with
constant glow and the text message
Park assist syst Service required is shown
then parking assistance is disengaged.
IMPORTANT
04
Under some circumstances, the parking
sensors can give false warning signals due
to external sound sources which emit the
same ultrasound frequencies as those with
which the system works.
Examples of such sources include horns,
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes
and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
Sensor location, front.
Sensor location, rear.
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
ensure that they work properly. Clean them
with water and car shampoo.
190
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
will reduce their function and may prevent
measurement.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Driver support
Park assist camera*
General
Function and operation
When reverse gear is engaged two unbroken
lines are shown graphically which illustrate
where the car's rear wheels will roll with the
current steering wheel angle, this facilitates
tight parking, reversing into tight spaces and
for hitching a trailer. The car’s approximate
external dimensions are illustrated by means
of two dashed lines. These help lines can be
switched off in the settings menu.
The parking camera is an assist system and
is activated when reverse gear is engaged
(can be changed in the settings menu, see
page 209).
The camera image is shown on the centre
console's screen.
NOTE
When a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, the protrusion of the
towbar is included when the function
measures the parking space.
If the car is also equipped with parking assistance sensors* then their information is displayed graphically as coloured fields in order
to illustrate the distance to detected obstacles, see page 188.
CAM button location.
WARNING
The camera shows what is behind the car
and if something appears from the sides.
•
The parking camera is an aid and can
never replace the responsibilities of
the driver when reversing.
The camera shows a wide area behind the
car and part of the bumper and any towbar.
•
The camera has blind spots where
obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Be aware of people and animals near
the car.
04
The camera is active approx. 5 seconds after
reverse gear has been disengaged or until the
car's speed exceeds 10 km/h forward or
35 km/h backward.
Objects on the screen may appear to tilt
slightly - this is normal.
NOTE
Objects on the display screen may be
closer to the car than they appear to be on
the screen.
If another view is active the parking camera
system takes over automatically and the
camera image is displayed on the screen.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
191
04 Driver support
Park assist camera*
Park assist lines
04
NOTE
•
When reversing with a trailer which is
not connected electrically to the car,
the lines on the display show the route
the car will take - not the trailer.
•
The screen shows no lines when a
trailer is connected electrically to the
car's electrical system.
•
The parking camera is deactivated
automatically when towing a trailer if a
Volvo genuine trailer cable is used.
Camera location next to the opening handle.
Light conditions
The camera image is adjusted automatically
according to prevailing light conditions.
Because of this, the image may vary slightly
in brightness and quality. Poor light conditions can result in a slightly reduced image
quality.
Examples of how the park assist lines can be displayed for the driver.
The lines on the screen are projected as if
they were at ground level behind the car and
are directly related to steering wheel movement, which shows the driver the path the car
will take when it turns.
NOTE
Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow
and ice to ensure optimum function. This
is particularly important in poor light.
192
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
IMPORTANT
Remember that the display only shows the
area behind the car - so pay attention to
the sides and front of the car when turning
the steering while reversing.
04 Driver support
Park assist camera*
Boundary lines
Cars with reversing sensors*
Colour / paint
Distance (metres)
Orange
0,3–0,5
Red
0–0.3
Settings
Press OK/MENU when a camera view is
shown. Make the settings as desired.
Miscellaneous
Different lines in the system.
Boundary line, free reversing zone
"Wheel tracks"
The dashed line (1) frames in a zone up to
about 1.5 m back from the bumper. It is also
the limit of the car's most protruding parts,
such as door mirrors and corners - also during turning.
The wide "wheel tracks" (2) between the side
lines indicate where the wheels will roll and
can extend about 3.2 m back from the
bumper if no obstacle is in the way.
Coloured areas (x 4 - one per sensor) show distance.
If the car is also equipped with parking assistance sensors (see page 188) the distance
indication will be more precise and the coloured areas show which of the 4 sensors
is/are registering an obstacle.
The colour of the areas changes with
decreasing distance to the obstacle - from
light yellow to yellow to orange to red.
Colour / paint
Distance (metres)
Light yellow
0.7–1.5
Yellow
0,5–0,7
•
The default setting is that the camera is
activated when reverse gear is engaged.
•
One press on CAM activates the camera
even if reverse gear is not engaged.
•
Change between normal and zoomed
image by turning TUNE or by pressing
CAM.
04
Towbar
The camera can be used to advantage when
hitching a trailer. A help line for the towbar's
intended "course" towards the trailer can be
shown in the display - just as for the "wheel
tracks".
•
The towbar can be zoomed in for precision manoeuvring with one press on
CAM. Pressing again gives normal view.
The towbar's park assist line is activated in
the menu system MY CAR where a selection
can be made between displaying the "wheel
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
193
04 Driver support
Park assist camera*
tracks" or towbar course - both options cannot be displayed simultaneously.
Limitations
NOTE
Bicycle racks or other accessories mounted on the back of the car may obscure
the line of sight of the camera.
04
Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it
only looks like a relatively small part of the
image is obscured, it could be a relatively
large sector that is hidden from view. Obstacles could thereby go undetected until they
are very close to the car.
To bear in mind
194
•
Keep the camera lens free from dirt, ice
and snow.
•
Clean the camera lens regularly with lukewarm water and car shampoo - take care
not to scratch the lens.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Driver support
Park Assist Pilot - PAP*
WARNING
General
PAP does not work in all situations but is
designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always has the final responsibility for driving the vehicle in a safe manner
and for paying attention to the surroundings and other road users approaching or
passing during parking.
Function
04
Principle for PAP.
NOTE
The PAP function measures the space and
turns the steering wheel - the driver's task
is to follow the combined instrument panel's instructions and select the gear
(reverse/forward), control the speed, brake
and stop.
The On/Off button is on the centre console.
The Park Assist Pilot (PAP – Park Assist Pilot)
helps the driver to park by first checking
whether a space is sufficiently large and then
turning the steering wheel and steering the
car into the space. The combined instrument
panel uses symbols, graphics and text to
show when different operations should be
performed.
PAP can be activated if the following criteria
are met once the engine has been started:
•
The functions DSTC or ABS must not
interfere while the PAP function is enabled - these can be activated due to a
steep or slippery surface, for example:
see pages 132 and 142 for more information.
•
•
Trailers must not be connected to the car.
NOTE
When a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, the protrusion of the
towbar is included when the function
measures the parking space.
The PAP function parks the car using the following steps:
1. The function searches for a parking space
and measures it (A & B). During measurement, speed must not exceed 30 km/h.
2. The car is steered into the space while
reversing (C & D).
3. The car is straightened up in the space by
driving back and forth (E & F).
The speed must be below 50 km/h.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
195
04 Driver support
Park Assist Pilot - PAP*
Operation
1. Activate PAP by pressing
this button and do not drive
faster than 30 km/h.
The driver is instructed by means of simple,
clear instructions in the combined instrument
panel - using both graphics and text.
2 - Reversing in
NOTE
Remember that certain steering wheel
positions may obstruct the combined
instrument panel's instructions when you
turn it during the parking manoeuvre.
04
1 - Searching and checking
measurements
2. Keep an eye on the combined instrument
panel and be prepared to stop the car
when the graphics and text so request.
3. Stop the car when the graphics and text
so request.
NOTE
PAP searches the area for a parking
space, displays instructions and guides
the car in on its passenger side. But if
required the car can also be parked on the
driver's side of the street:
•
Activate the direction indicator for the
driver's side - the car is then parked
on that side of the street instead.
During the Reversing step, PAP will steer the
car into the parking space. Proceed as follows:
1. Check that the area behind the car is
clear, then engage reverse gear.
2. Reverse slowly and carefully without
touching the steering wheel - and no
faster than approx. 7 km/h.
3. Keep an eye on the combined instrument
panel and be prepared to stop the car
when the graphics and text so request.
The PAP function searches for a parking
space and checks whether it is big enough.
Proceed as follows:
196
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Driver support
Park Assist Pilot - PAP*
NOTE
•
Keep your hands away from the steering wheel when the PAP function is
activated.
•
Make sure that the steering wheel is
not hindered in any way and can rotate
freely.
•
For optimum results - Wait until the
steering wheel has been turned before
starting to drive backwards/forwards.
3 - Straightening up
1. Engage first gear or D position, wait until
the steering wheel has been turned, then
drive slowly forwards.
A text message indicates where the PAP
sequence was stopped.
NOTE
2. Stop the car when the graphics and text
message so request.
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
will reduce their function and may prevent
measurement.
3. Engage reverse gear and drive backwards slowly until the graphics and text
message tell you to stop.
The function is disengaged automatically
when parking is complete, and the graphics
and text message show that parking is complete. It may be necessary for the driver to
correct the positioning. Only the driver can
determine whether the car is properly parked.
IMPORTANT
Under certain circumstances, PAP is
unable to find parking spaces - one reason
for this may be the fact that there is interference with the sensors from external
sound sources which emit the same ultrasound frequencies as those with which the
system works.
IMPORTANT
04
Examples of such sources include horns,
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes
and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
The warning distance is shorter when the
sensors are used by Active Park Assist
compared with when Park Assist uses the
sensors.
To bear in mind
•
if the car is driven too quickly - above
7 km/h
The driver should bear in mind that the Park
Assist Pilot is an aid – not an infallible, fullyautomatic function. The driver must therefore
be prepared to intervene. There are also
details to bear in mind while parking, e.g.:
•
•
if the driver touches the steering wheel
•
Limitations
The PAP sequence is stopped:
When the car has reversed into the parking
space, it must be straightened up and stopped.
if the ABS or DSTC function is enabled e.g. if a wheel loses grip on a slippery
road.
PAP starts out from the current location
of the parked vehicles - if they are inappropriately parked then the car's tyres
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
197
04 Driver support
Park Assist Pilot - PAP*
and wheel rims may be damaged against
kerbs.
•
PAP is designed for parking on straight
streets, not sharp curves or bends. For
this reason, make sure the car is parallel
to the parking space when PAP measures
the space.
•
It is not always possible to find parking
spaces on narrow streets since there is
not enough space for manoeuvring. In
such parking situations, it helps the system to drive as close to the side of the
road as possible where you intend to
park.
04
•
•
Objects situated higher than the detection
areas of the sensors are not included
when calculations are made for the parking manoeuvre. This may cause PAP to
swing into the parking space too early for this reason, such parking slots should
be avoided.
•
The driver is responsible for determine
whether the space selected by PAP is
suitable for parking.
1
198
Bear in mind that the front of the car may
swing out towards oncoming traffic while
being parked.
•
Use approved tyres1 with the correct tyre
pressure as this affects PAP's ability to
park the car.
•
Heavy rain or snow may cause the system to measure the parking space incorrectly.
•
Do not use PAP if snow chains or a spare
wheel are fitted.
•
Do not use PAP if loaded objects are protruding from the car.
Maintenance
IMPORTANT
The PAP system's parameters may need
to be updated when changing to another
approved wheel rim size involving changed
tyre circumference. Consult a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
"Approved tyres" refers to tyres of the same type and make as those fitted new on delivery from the factory.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The PAP sensors are located in the bumpers - 6
front and 4 rear.
For the PAP function to work correctly, its
sensors must be cleaned regularly with water
and car shampoo - these are the same sensors as are used by parking assistance, see
page 190.
04 Driver support
Park Assist Pilot - PAP*
Symbols and text messages
The combined instrument panel can show different combinations of symbols and text with
varying content - sometimes with a selfexplanatory piece of advice on appropriate
action.
If a message says that PAP is disengaged,
contact with an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
199
04 Driver support
BLIS and CTA*
Operation
The BLIS function (Blind Spot Information
System) is designed for driving in dense traffic on roads with several lanes in the same
direction. BLIS is a driver's aid intended to
provide a warning about:
•
•
04
Activate/deactivate BLIS
vehicles in the car's blind spot
quickly approaching vehicles in the left
and right lanes closest to the car.
The BLIS function CTA (Cross Traffic Alert) is
a driver's aid intended to provide a warning
about:
•
Position of the BLIS lamp1.
Indicator lamp
crossing traffic when the car is reversed.
BLIS symbol
WARNING
BLIS and CTA are supplementary aids and
do not work in all situations.
BLIS and CTA are no substitutes for a safe
driving style and the use of rearview and
door mirrors.
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car
where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at
the same time then both lamps illuminate.
BLIS and CTA can never replace the driver's responsibility and attention - it is
always the driver's responsibility to reverse
and change lanes in a safe manner.
1
2
200
Function
BLIS and CTA are activated when the engine
is started. This is confirmed by the indicator
lamps in the door panels flashing once.
General information on BLIS and CTA
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
For information on the menu system - see page 209.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Button for activating/deactivating.
The BLIS function can be deactivated/activated by pressing the BLIS button on the
centre console.
Some combinations of the selected equipment leave no vacant space for a button in
the centre console - in which case the function is handled by the car's menu system MY
CAR2:
04 Driver support
BLIS and CTA*
•
Select On or Off at Settings
settings BLIS.
Car
When BLIS is deactivated/activated the lamp
in the button goes out/illuminates and the
combined instrument panel confirms the
change with a text message. The door panel
indicator lamps flash once upon activation.
To extinguish the message:
•
Press the left stalk switch OK button.
or
•
Wait approx. 5 seconds – the message
extinguishes.
When BLIS operates
The BLIS function is active at speeds above
approx. 10 km/h.
The system is designed to react when:
•
•
the vehicle is overtaken by other vehicles
another vehicle is quickly approaching
the vehicle
When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a
quickly approaching vehicle in zone 2, the
door panel BLIS lamp illuminates with a constant glow. If the driver activates the direction
indicator on the same side as the warning in
this situation then the BLIS lamp will change
from a constant glow to flashing with a more
intense light.
04
On/Off for parking assistance and CTA sensors.
CTA itself can be deactivated in the MY CAR2
menu system as follows:
•
WARNING
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is being
reversed.
Go to Settings Car settings BLIS
Cross Traffic Alert and deselect. The
CTA function is then deactivated. BLIS
remains activated.
Activate/deactivate CTA
In cars equipped with parking assistance (see
page 188), the CTA function can be deactivated/activated with the parking assistance
On/Off button.
Principle for BLIS: 1. Zone in blind spot. 2. Zone
for quickly approaching vehicle.
2
For information on the menu system - see page 209.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
201
04 Driver support
BLIS and CTA*
which direction the approaching object is
coming from.
When CTA operates
•
CTA also warns by illuminating the BLIS
lamps.
•
An additional warning is provided in the
form of an illuminated icon in the screen's
PAS graphics, see page 188.
Limitations
Principle for CTA.
CTA does not perform optimally in all situations, but has a certain limitation - for example, the CTA sensors cannot "see" through
other parked vehicles or obstructing objects.
CTA supplements the BLIS function by being
able to see crossing traffic from the side during reversing, such as when reversing out of a
parking space.
Here are some examples of when CTA's "field
of vision" may be limited from the beginning
and approaching vehicles cannot therefore be
detected until they are very close:
04
The car is parked deep inside a parking slot.
Blind CTA sector.
Sector where CTA can detect/"see".
CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles.
In favourable conditions, it may also be able
to detect smaller objects, such as cyclists
and pedestrians.
CTA is only active during reversing and is
activated automatically when reverse is
selected at the gearbox.
•
202
If CTA detects something approaching
from the side, an acoustic warning signal
sounds. The signal comes from either the
left or the right speaker depending on
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
In an angled parking slot CTA can be completely
"blind" on one side.
04 Driver support
BLIS and CTA*
However, when the driver is slowly reversing
the car, the angle is changed in relation to the
vehicle/object that is blocking, at which the
blind sector rapidly decreases.
Maintenance
Examples of further limitations:
•
Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can
reduce functionality and make it impossible to provide warnings. BLIS and CTA
are unable to detect hazards if covered.
•
Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in
the area of the sensors.
•
BLIS and CTA are deactivated when a
trailer is connected to the car’s electrical
system.
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions'
components must only be performed by a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
Location of BLIS and CTA sensors.
The BLIS and CTA sensors are located inside
the rear wing/bumper on each side of the car.
•
To ensure optimal functionality, the areas
in front of the sensors must be kept
clean.
Message
Specification
CTA OFF
CTA has been deactivated
manually. BLIS is active.
BLIS and
CTA OFF
Trailer
attached
BLIS and CTA are temporarily disabled because a
trailer is connected to the
car’s electrical system.
BLIS and
CTA Service required
BLIS and CTA are not
working.
•
04
Visit a workshop if the
message remains - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be acknowledged by
briefly pressing the OK button on the direction indicator stalk.
Messages
In situations where the BLIS and CTA functions fail or are interrupted, the combined
instrument panel may show a symbol, supplemented by an explanatory message. Follow any recommendation given.
Message examples:
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
203
Menus and messages...........................................................................
Menu source MY CAR..........................................................................
Climate control......................................................................................
Engine and passenger compartment heater*.......................................
Additional heater*..................................................................................
Trip computer........................................................................................
Adapting driving characteristics...........................................................
Comfort inside the passenger compartment........................................
204
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
206
209
217
228
232
234
242
243
COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
Combined instrument panel
Menu overview
Some of the following menu options require
the function and hardware to be installed in
the car.
Analogue combined instrument panel
Digital speed
Parking heater*
Additional heater*
TC options
05
Information display (analogue combined instrument panel) and controls for menu navigation.
Information displays (digital combined instrument
panel) and controls for menu navigation.
OK - access the menu, acknowledge
messages and confirm menu selections.
Thumbwheel – browse between menu
options.
RESET - reset data in the selected trip
computer step and go back in the menu
structure.
The menus shown on the display in the combined instrument panel are controlled with the
left-hand stalk switch. The menus shown
depend on key position, see page 81. If a
message appears then this must be acknowledged with OK for the menus to be shown.
1
2
206
Certain engines.
The number of messages is indicated in brackets.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Service status
Oil level1
Messages (##)2
Digital combined instrument panel
Settings*
Themes
Contrast mode/Colour mode
Service status
Messages2
Oil level1
Parking heater*
Trip computer reset
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
Message
When a warning, information or indicator
symbol illuminates, a corresponding message
appears in the display. An error message is
stored in a memory list until the fault has
been rectified.
Press OK (see the figure in the section "Combined instrument panel" on page 206) in order
to confirm3 a message. Scroll through messages with the thumbwheel.
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you
are using the trip computer, the message
must be read (press OK) before the previous activity can be resumed.
3
Message
Specification
Stop safelyA
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a workshopB.
Stop engineA
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a workshopB.
Message
Specification
Message
Specification
Service
urgentA
Contact a workshopB to
check the car immediately.
Transmission
Oil change
needed
Contact a workshopB to
check the car as soon as
possible.
Service
requiredA
Contact a workshopB to
check the car as soon as
possible.
Transmission
Reduced
performance
See manualA
Read the owner's manual.
The gearbox cannot handle full capacity. Drive
carefully until the message clearsC.
Book time
for maintenance
Time to book regular
service - contact a workshopB.
Time for regular maintenance
Time for regular service contact a workshopB. The
timing is determined by
the number of kilometres
driven, number of months
since the last service,
engine running time and
oil grade.
Maintenance
overdue
If shown repeatedly contact a workshopB.
Transmission
hot Reduce
speed
Drive more smoothly or
stop the car in a safe
manner. Disengage the
gear and run the engine
at idling speed until the
message clearsC.
Transmission
hot Stop
safely Wait
for cooling
Critical fault. Stop the car
immediately in a safe
manner and contact a
workshopB.
05
If the service intervals are
not followed then the
warranty does not cover
any damaged parts contact a workshopB.
A message can also be acknowledged via the thumbwheel or RESET button.
207
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
A
05
208
B
C
Message
Specification
Temporarily
offA
A function has been temporarily switched off and
is reset automatically
while driving or after starting again.
Low battery
charge
Power save
mode
The audio system is
switched off to save
energy. Charge the battery.
Part of message, shown together with information on
where the problem has arisen.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
For more messages concerning automatic transmission,
see page 123.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
Operation
General information on MY CAR
Many of the car's functions are handled in this menu source, such as setting the clock, door mirrors and locks.
Centre console controls
Navigation in the menus is carried out using
buttons on the centre console or with the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
•
•
•
•
•
phone call is rejected
current function is interrupted
input characters are deleted
most recent selections are undone
leads up in the menu system.
Short and long presses can also produce
varying results.
A long press leads to the highest menu level
(Parent view), from where all of the car's functions/menu sources can be accessed, see
page 253.
Certain functions are standard, others are
optional - the range also varies depending on
the market.
Centre console controls for menu navigation.
05
Press MY CAR to open the menus under
MY CAR.
Press OK MENU to select/tick in the
highlighted menu option or to store the
selected function in the memory.
Turn the TUNE knob to scroll up/down
among the menu options.
EXIT
EXIT functions
Depending on the function the cursor is on
when EXIT is pressed, and on the menu level,
one of the following occurs:
}}
209
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
Steering wheel keypad*
The following is an example of how a function
can be accessed and adjusted using the
steering wheel keypad:
MY CAR
The following options are available in menu
source MY CAR:
1. Press the centre console button MY
CAR.
2. Scroll to the desired menu, e.g. Settings,
with the thumbwheel (1) and then press
the thumbwheel - a submenu opens.
3. Scroll to the desired menu, e.g. Car
settings and press the thumbwheel - a
submenu opens.
The keypad may vary depending on audio level,
see page 250.
05
Turn the thumbwheel knob to scroll up/
down among the menu options.
Press the thumbwheel to select/tick in
the highlighted menu option or to store
the selected function in the memory.
EXIT (see heading "EXIT functions" page
209).
Search paths
Current menu level is shown at the top right
of the centre console's screen. Search paths
to the menu system functions are described
in this manual in the following form:
Settings Car settings Lock settings
Doors unlock Driver door, then all.
210
4. Scroll to Lock settings and press the
thumbwheel - a new submenu opens.
5. Scroll to Doors unlock and press the
thumbwheel - a submenu of selectable
functions opens.
6. Choose between the options All doors
and Driver door, then all and press the
thumbwheel - a cross is marked in the
option's empty box.
7. Exit the programming by backing out of
the menus incrementally with short
presses on EXIT (2) or with one long
press.
The procedure is the same as with the centre
console's buttons - see page 209: OK MENU
(2), EXIT (4) and the TUNE knob (3).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
•
•
•
•
•
My V40
Trip statistics
DRIVe
Support systems
Settings
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
My V40
• Start/Stop
• Eco driving guide
Menu level 1
For more information - see page 125.
Menu level 2
p. ....
Menu level 3
Driver support system
Menu level 4
Shown here are the 4 first menu levels under
MY CAR Settings. Some menus have further submenus - these are then described in
detail in their respective sections.
MY CAR
My V40
The screen shows a grouping of all of the
car's driver support systems - these can be
activated or deactivated here.
Trip statistics
MY CAR
Trip statistics
The screen shows the history as a bar chart
with average fuel consumption and average
speed, see page 240.
DRIVe
05
On: Selected square.
MY CAR
Support systems
The screen shows a summary of the current
status of the car's driver support systems.
Setup - menus
The menus are structured as follows:
Off: Empty square.
•
Select On/Off with OK - then back out of
the menu with EXIT.
Car settings
Car key memory
On
DRIVe
MY CAR
When selecting whether a function should be
activated/On or deactivated/Off a square is
displayed:
Off
p. 84
and
106
An introduction of Volvo's Start-Stop system
is presented here, as well as recommendations for energy-saving driving techniques.
}}
211
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
Lock settings
Automatic door locking
On
Off
p.
46,
54
and
57
Doors unlock
Off
Tilt left mirror
60 sec
90 sec
p.96
Home safe light duration
Doors on same side
Door lock confirmation light
Both front doors
60 sec
90 sec
p.44
Triple indicator
On
Audible confirmation
Off
Unlock confirmation light
Off
On
p. 60
and
64
Temporary LH traffic
Off
On
Off
or
Temporary RH traffic
On
Off
212
p.95
On
Off
On
p.97
30 sec
Ambient light colours
Any door
p. 46
and
97
30 sec
Tilt right mirror
Ambient light
All doors
Ask when exiting
Approach light duration
Floor lights
Keyless entry
Activate once
p.
106
Interior light
Driver door, then all
Reduced Guard
Fold mirrors
Light settings
All doors
05
Side mirror settings
p.97
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
Active bending lights
p.93
On
On
Off
Auxiliary lights
p.91
On
Low
Medium
p.
242
p.
172
Lane Keeping Aid
On
Off
Off
Warning distance
On at start-up
Long
On
Normal
Off
Short
Off
Steering wheel force
Collision Warning
Increased sensitivity*
Warning sound
On
On
Off
Off
Assistance alternatives
Vibration only
High
Off
Reset car settings
All menus in Car settings are
given original factory settings.
Driver support systems
05
Steering assist only
Full function
Speed in infotainment display
On
p.
184
Road Sign Information
On
p.
145
Off
Speed alert
On
Off
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
213
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
DSTC
On
p.
142
Off
City Safety
On
p.
166
On
p.
200
On
Off
On
p.
163
On
Off
System options
214
On
The current screen content returns
if any of the screen's buttons or
controls are actuated.
Language
Off
Driver Alert
Screen saver
Selects language for menu texts.
p.
181
Show help text
On
Off
p.79
12 h
The screen's current content fades
out after a period of inactivity and
is replaced by a blank screen if this
option is selected.
Cross Traffic Alert
Distance Alert
Time format
Off
Off
05
p.79
24 h
Off
BLIS
Time
The combined instrument panel's
clock is adjusted here.
Explanatory text for the screen's
current content is shown with this
option selected.
Distance and fuel units
p.
209
MPG (UK)
MPG (US)
km/l
l/100km
Temperature unit
Celsius
Fahrenheit
Selects the unit for the display of
outside temperature and setting of
the climate control system.
Volume levels
Voice output volume
Front park assist volume
Rear park assist volume
Phone ringing volume
p.
234
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
Reset system options
All menus in System options are
given original factory settings.
Voice settings
Only in cars with Volvo GPS navigator RTI* - see separate manual.
Voice command list
Voice user setting
Phone commands
Default setting
Phone
User 1
Phone call contact
User 2
Phone dial number
Voice tutorial
Navigation
This menu option + OK provides
spoken information about how the
system works.
Navigation repeat instruction
Here there is the option to create a
second user profile - an advantage
if more than one person shall use
the car/system regularly. Default
setting resets to factory settings.
Navigation go to address
Voice training
Navigation commands
General commands
User 1
Help
User 2
Cancel
Voice tutorial
The menu options under Phone
commands show several examples of available voice commands only with a Bluetooth®-enabled
mobile phone installed. For more
and detailed information - see
page 278.
The menu options under Navigation commands show several
examples of available voice commands in the navigation system.
05
With Voice training the voice recognition system is taught to recognise the driver's voice and pronunciation. A number of phrases are
presented on the screen for the
driver to read aloud. When the system has learnt how the driver talks,
the presentation of the phrases
stops. Following which e.g. User 1
can be selected in Voice user setting in order that the system shall
listen to the right user.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
215
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
Voice output volume
Automatic blower adjustment
A volume control appears on the
screen - at which point, proceed as
follows:
Normal
High
Low
1. Adjust the volume with the
thumbwheel.
Recirculation timer
2. Test-listen using OK.
On
3. Use EXIT to store the setting
and the menu is switched off.
Off
Automatic rear defroster
Voice POI list
Interior air quality system
On
Off
For more information on Facilities
and Voice recognition - see the
Navigation system's owner's manual.
Audio settings
Climate settings
Reset climate settings
All menus in Climate settings are
given original factory settings.
p.
250
Favourites (FAV)
Volvo On Call
Described in a separate manual.
Information
216
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
p.44
VIN number
p.
378
DivX® VOD code
p.
271
Bluetooth software
version in car
p.
277
Only in cars with Volvo GPS navigator - see separate manual.
Off
The number of facilities is extensive and varies depending on market. Maximum 30 favourite facilities
can be stored in this list.
Number of keys
Map and software version*
On
Edit list
05
p.
222
p.
254
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
General
Climate control
The car is equipped with electronic climate
control. The climate control system cools or
heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the
passenger compartment.
NOTE
The air conditioning system (AC) can be
switched off, but to ensure the best possible climate comfort in the passenger compartment and to prevent the windows from
misting, it should always be on.
Actual temperature
The temperature you select corresponds to
the physical experience with reference to factors such as air speed, humidity and solar
radiation etc. in and around the car.
The system includes a sun sensor which
detects on which side the sun is shining into
the passenger compartment. This means1
that the temperature can differ between the
right and left-hand air vents despite the controls being set for the same temperature on
both sides.
1
Sensor location
•
The sun sensor is located on the top side
of the dashboard.
•
The temperature sensor for the passenger compartment is located below the climate control panel.
•
The outside temperature sensor is
located in the door mirror.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with
clothing or other objects.
Side windows
To ensure that the air conditioning works
optimally, the side windows must be closed.
Misting windows
Remove misting on the insides of the windows by primarily using the defroster function.
To reduce the risk of misting, keep the windows clean and use window cleaner.
Temporary shut-off of the air
conditioning
switched off. There may then be a temporary
increase in temperature in the passenger
compartment.
Condensation
In warm weather, condensation from the air
conditioning may drip under the car. This is
normal.
Ice and snow
Remove ice and snow from the climate control system air intake (the grille between the
bonnet and the windscreen).
Total airing function
The function opens/closes all side windows
simultaneously and can be used for example
to quickly air the car during hot weather, see
page 57.
05
Passenger compartment filter
All air entering the car's passenger compartment is cleaned with a filter. This must be
replaced at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo
Service Programme for the recommended
replacement intervals. If the car is used in a
severely contaminated environment, it may
be necessary to replace the filter more often.
When the engine requires full power, e.g. for
full acceleration or driving uphill with a trailer,
the air conditioning can be temporarily
Only applies to ECC.
217
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
NOTE
There are different types of passenger
compartment filter. Make sure that the correct filter is fitted.
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*
This option keeps the passenger compartment clear of allergy and asthma inducing
substances. For more information on CZIP,
see the brochure included with the purchase
of the car.
The following is included:
•
An enhanced fan function that means that
the fan starts when the car is opened with
the remote control key. The fan fills the
passenger compartment with fresh air.
The function starts when required and is
disengaged automatically after a time or
when one of the passenger compartment
doors is opened.
•
The air quality system IAQS is a fully
automatic system that cleans the air in
the passenger compartment from contaminants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level
ozone.
05
218
NOTE
To maintain the CZIP standard in cars with
CZIP the IAQS filter should be changed
after 15 000 km or once per year depending on whichever occurs first. However, up
to 75 000 km over 5 years. In cars without
CZIP and where the customer does not
want to retain the CZIP standard, the IAQS
filter must be replaced during a regular
service.
Use of tested materials in the interior
equipment.
The materials have been developed in order
to minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger compartment and they contribute to
making the passenger compartment easier to
keep clean. The carpets in both the passenger compartment and the cargo area are
removable and easy to remove and clean.
Use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo, see page 372.
•
•
•
•
Fan level for automatic climate control*,
see page 223.
Recirculation timer, see page 225.
Automatic start of rear window defroster,
see page 107.
Air quality system*, see page 226
The climate control system's functions can be
reset to the default settings via the menu system in MY CAR and this is carried out under:
Settings Climate settings Reset
climate settings.
Air distribution
Menu settings
It is possible to activate/deactivate or change
the default settings for four of the climate
control system's functions via the centre console. For general information about menu
navigation, see page 210:
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The incoming air is divided between a number of different vents in the passenger compartment.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO
mode*.
If necessary it can be controlled manually,
see page 226.
Air vents in the dashboard
05
Open
Closed
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow
Aim the vents at the side windows to remove
misting.
NOTE
Remember that small children may be sensitive to air flows and draughts.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
219
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC*
05
Fan
AUTO
Electrically heated front seat, left-hand
side
Heated windscreen* and max. defroster
Air distribution - ventilation floor
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Rear window and door mirror defrosters,see page 107
220
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Setting, left/right side for temperature
regulation
Electrically heated front seat, right-hand
side
Temperature control
Recirculation
AC – – Air conditioning on/off
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
Electronic Temperature Control, ETC
05
Fan
Recirculation
Operating the controls
Electrically heated front seat, left-hand
side
Electrically heated front seat, right-hand
side
Heated seats*
AC – – Air conditioning on/off
Temperature control
Heated windscreen* and max. defroster
Air distribution - ventilation floor
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase
in temperature due to a lack of sensation
or who otherwise have problems operating
the controls for the heated seats. Otherwise they may suffer burn injuries.
Rear window and door mirror defrosters,see page 107
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
221
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
Front seats
•
Switch off the heat - no field illuminates.
Rear seat
Fan
NOTE
If the fan is fully switched off then the air
conditioning is not engaged - which can
cause a risk of misting on the windows.
Fan knob for ECC*
Current heat level is shown in the centre console
display screen.
05
Current heat level is shown in the pushbutton's
lamps:
Press the button repeatedly in order to activate the function:
•
Press the button repeatedly in order to activate the function:
222
•
Highest heat level - three orange fields
illuminate in the centre console's screen
(see figure above).
•
Lower heat level - two orange fields illuminate in the screen.
•
Lowest heat level - one orange field illuminates in the screen.
•
•
•
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Highest heat level - three lamps illuminate.
Lower heat level - two lamps illuminate.
Lowest heat level - one lamp illuminates.
Switch off the heat - no lamp illuminates.
Turn the knob to increase or
decrease fan speed, AUTO
is disengaged. If AUTO is
selected, the fan speed is
regulated automatically - the
fan speed previously set is
disengaged.
Fan knob for ETC
Turn the knob to increase or
decrease fan speed.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
Air distribution
Climate settings Automatic blower
adjust. Choose between Low, Normal or
High:
• Low - Automatic fan control. Low airflow
is prioritised.
• Normal - Automatic fan control.
• High - Automatic fan control. A more
intense airflow is prioritised.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 210.
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - ventilation floor
The figure consists of three buttons. When
pressing the buttons the corresponding figure
is illuminated in the display screen (see figure
below) and an arrow in front of each part of
the figure shows the air distribution that is
selected. For more information on air distribution, see page 226.
The selected air distribution is shown in the centre console display screen.
AUTO1
The Auto function automatically regulates temperature,
air conditioning, fan speed,
recirculation, and air distribution.
Temperature control
When the car is started, the most recent setting is resumed.
05
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
selecting a higher or lower temperature
than the actual desired temperature.
If you select one or more manual functions,
the other functions continue to be controlled
automatically. All manual settings are disengaged when AUTO is pressed. The display
screen shows AUTO CLIMATE.
Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in
the menu system MY CAR under: Settings
1
Only applies to ECC.
223
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
Temperature regulation ECC*
Temperature regulation ETC
Heated windscreen* and max. defroster
The temperature in the passenger compartment can be
adjusted with the knob.
AC – Air conditioning on/off
When the lamp in the AC
button illuminates, the air
conditioning is controlled by
the system's automatic function. This way, incoming air
is cooled and dehumidified
as required.
Current temperature for each side is shown in
the centre console's display screen.
05
224
The temperatures on the
driver and passenger sides
can be set independently.
Repeatedly press L/R in the
button to select the setting
for left, right or both sides.
Set the temperature using
the knob - the selected temperature for either
side is displayed in the centre console display.
When the lamp in the AC button is switched
off the air conditioning is disconnected. Other
functions are still controlled automatically.
When the max. defroster function is activated
the air conditioning is switched on automatically, so that the air is dehumidified at the
maximum setting.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The selected setting is shown in the centre console display screen.
Electric heating*
Max. defroster
Used to quickly remove misting and ice from the windscreen and side windows.
The light in the defroster button illuminates when the
function is active.
Press the button repeatedly in order to activate the function.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
For cars without heated windscreens:
•
Air flows to the windows - symbol (2) illuminates in the screen.
•
Switch off the function - no symbol illuminates.
For cars with heated windscreens:
•
Start the heating for the
symbol (1) illuminates in the screen.
•
Start the heating for the windscreen2 and
air flow to the windows - symbols (1) and
(2) illuminate in the screen.
•
Switch off the function - no symbol illuminates.
windscreen2
NOTE
Electrically heated windscreen and IR window, see page 104, can have an impact on
the performance of transponders and
other communication equipment.
NOTE
A triangular area at the end of each side of
the windscreen is not electrically heated,
where de-icing may take longer.
2
NOTE
Electrically heated windscreen is not available when the engine is auto-stopped, see
page 125.
The following also takes place when the function is active in order to provide maximum
dehumidification in the passenger compartment:
•
the air conditioning is automatically
engaged
•
recirculation and the air quality system
are automatically disengaged.
NOTE
The noise level increases as the fan is
operating at max.
When the defroster is switched off the climate
control returns to the previous settings.
Recirculation
When recirculation is
engaged the orange lamp in
the button illuminates. The
function is selected to shut
out bad air, exhaust gases
etc. from the passenger
compartment. The air in the
passenger compartment is recirculated, i.e.
no outside air is taken into the car when this
function is activated.
IMPORTANT
If the air in the car recirculates for too long,
there is a risk of misting on the insides of
the windows.
05
Timer
With the timer function activated the system
will exit manually activated recirculation mode
according to a time that depends on the outside temperature. This reduces the risk of ice,
misting and bad air. Activate/deactivate the
function in the menu system MY CAR under
Settings Climate settings
Recirculation timer. For a description of the
menu system, see page 210.
The compass goes off when the heated windscreen is active.
225
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
NOTE
When max. defroster is selected, recirculation is always deactivated.
Air quality system*
The air quality system (IAQS) separates gases
and particles to reduce the levels of odours
and contaminants in the passenger compartment. If the outside air is contaminated then
the air intake is closed and the air is recirculated.
05
226
Activate/deactivate the function in the menu
system MY CAR under Settings Climate
settings Interior air quality system. For a
description of the menu system, see
page 210.
Cars with Start/Stop*
With an auto-stopped engine certain equipment has its function temporarily reduced,
e.g. climate control air conditioning and fan
speed. For more information, see page 125.
NOTE
The air quality sensor must always be enabled to ensure the best air in the passenger compartment.
In a cold climate, automatic recirculation is
limited so as to prevent misting.
Air distribution table
Air distribution
Use
Air distribution
Use
A large amount of hot air
flows to the windows.
to remove ice and
misting quickly.
Air to the floor and windows. Some air flows
from the dashboard air
vents.
to ensure comfortable
conditions and good
demisting in cold or
humid weather.
Air to windscreen, via
defroster vent, and side
windows. Some air flows
from the air vents.
to prevent misting and
icing in a cold and
humid climate, (not at
too low fan speed to
enable this).
Air to floor and from
dashboard air vents.
in sunny weather with
cool outside temperatures.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
Air distribution
Use
Air distribution
Use
Airflow to windows and
from dashboard air vents.
to ensure good comfort
in warm, dry weather.
Air to floor. Some air
flows to the dashboard
air vents and windows.
to direct heat or cold to
the floor.
Airflow to the head and
chest from the dashboard
air vents.
to ensure efficient cooling in warm weather.
Airflow to windows,
from dashboard air
vents and to the floor.
to provide cooler air
along the floor or warmer
air higher up in cold
weather or hot, dry
weather.
05
227
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Engine and passenger compartment heater*
General
Refuelling
The heater can be started directly or with
timer.
Two different times can be selected using the
timer. Here, time refers to the time when the
car is heated and ready. The car's electronic
system calculates when heating should be
started based on the outside temperature.
05
WARNING
Do not use the fuel-driven heater indoors.
Exhaust gases are secreted.
NOTE
When the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is
active there may be smoke from underneath the car, which is perfectly normal.
228
IMPORTANT
Warning label on fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Fuel-driven heater
The fuel-driven heater cannot start if the outside temperature exceeds 15 °C. At –5 °C or
lower the maximum running time of the heater
is 50 minutes.
Battery and fuel
If the battery has insufficient charge or the
fuel level is too low, the heater will be
switched off automatically and a message
appears in the display. Acknowledge the
message by pressing the indicator stalk OK
button once, see page 229.
The parking heater (fuel-driven) prepares the
engine and passenger compartment before
departure so that wear and energy needs
during the journey are reduced. Warming up
your car will also extend the driving distance.
Fuel which spills out could be ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven auxiliary heater
before starting to refuel.
Check in the combined instrument panel
that the heater is switched off. The heat
symbol is shown when it is operating.
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of
the car should point downhill to ensure that
there is a supply of fuel to the fuel-driven
heater.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Repeated use of the heater in combination
with short driving distances may cause low
charge level in the starter battery, this can
lead to the heater stopping or never starting. In the worst case, engine starting will
not be possible.
The car should be driven for the same time
as the heater is used to ensure that the
starter battery is recharged adequately to
replace the energy consumed by the
heater when it is used on a regular basis.
The heater is used for a maximum of 50
minutes each time.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Engine and passenger compartment heater*
Operation
Symbols and messages
When the heater has been activated
the heat symbol illuminates in the
display.
When one of the timers is activated, the symbol for activated timer illuminates in the display at the same time as the set time is
shown next to the symbol.
Symbol for activated timer in analogue combined instrument panel.
Information display (analogue combined instrument panel) and controls for menu navigation.
Information displays (digital combined instrument
panel) and controls for menu navigation.
OK button
Symbol for activated timer in digital
combined instrument panel.
Thumbwheel
RESET
For more information on display and OK, see
pages 71 and 206.
05
The table shows symbols and display texts
that appear.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
229
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Engine and passenger compartment heater*
Symbol
Display
Specification
The heater is switched on and running.
The heater's timer is activated after the remote control key has been removed from the ignition switch
and leaving the car - the engine and passenger compartment are heated at the set time.
Fuel operated heater
stopped Battery saving
mode
The heater has been stopped by the car's electronics in order to facilitate starting the engine.
Fuel operated heater
stopped Low fuel level
Setting the heater is not possible due to fuel level being too low - this is in order to facilitate starting
the engine as well as approx. 50 km driving.
Fuel operated heater
Service required
Heater not working. Contact a workshop for repair. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
05
A display text clears automatically after a time
or after one press on the indicator stalk OK
button.
Direct start and immediate stop
Following the direct start of the heater it will
be activated for 50 minutes.
Heating of the passenger compartment will
begin as soon as the engine coolant has
reached the correct temperature.
230
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
The car can be started and driven while
the heater is running.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking
heater and select with OK.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Engine and passenger compartment heater*
3. Scroll forward in the next menu to Direct
start/Stop in order to activate/deactivate
the heater and select with OK.
9. Go back in the menu structure using
RESET.
4. Deactivate the timer as follows:
4. Exit the menu with RESET.
10. Select the other time (continue from step
2) or exit the menu with RESET.
Timer
Start the timer
The time when the car shall be used and
heated is specified with the timer.
Setting the timer
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking
heater and select with OK.
3. Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
4. Briefly press OK to move to the lit hours
setting.
5. Select the required hour using the thumbwheel.
6. Briefly press OK to move to the lit
minutes setting.
7. Select the required minute using the
thumbwheel.
8. Press OK1 to confirm the setting.
1
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking
heater and select with OK.
3. Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and activate with OK.
4. Exit the menu with RESET.
Deactivating the timer
A timer-started heater can be switched off
manually before the set time has elapsed.
Proceed as follows:
1. Press OK to access the menu.
•
•
long press on OK or
short press on OK to continue in the
menu. Then select to stop the timer
and confirm with OK.
5. Exit the menu with RESET.
A timer-started heater can be switched off as
described in the instructions in the section
"Direct start and immediate stop"; see page
230.
Clock/timer
The heater's time is connected to the car's
clock.
05
NOTE
All timer programming will be cleared if the
car's clock is reset.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking
heater and select with OK.
> If a timer is set but not activated, a
clock icon is shown next to the set
time.
3. Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
Press OK again to activate the timer.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
231
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Additional heater*
General information about the
additional heater
For cars with diesel engines sold in cold climate zones1 an additional heater may be
required to obtain the correct operating temperature in the engine and to obtain sufficient
heating in the passenger compartment.
In such instances, the car is equipped with
either:
•
•
an additional electric heater or
a fuel-driven additional heater2.
Electric additional heater
05
The heater cannot be controlled manually but
is instead activated automatically after the
engine has been started in outside temperatures below 9 °C and is switched off after the
set passenger compartment temperature has
been reached.
1
2
232
Fuel-driven additional heater
The heater starts automatically when extra
heat is required when the engine is running.
The heater is switched off automatically when
the correct temperature is reached or when
the engine is switched off.
NOTE
When the auxiliary heater is active there
may be smoke from underneath the car,
which is perfectly normal.
Auto mode or shutdown
The additional heater's automatic start
sequence can be switched off if required.
An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned.
For cars fitted with parking heaters, see page 228.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Information display (analogue combined instrument panel) and controls for menu navigation.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Additional heater*
5. Exit the menu with RESET.
NOTE
The menu options are only visible in key
position I - any adjustments must therefore
be made before starting the engine.
Information displays (digital combined instrument
panel) and controls for menu navigation.
OK button
05
Thumbwheel
RESET button
1. Before starting the engine: Select key
position I, see page 82.
2. Press OK to access the menu.
3. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional
heater3 or Settings4 and select with OK.
4. Select one of the options ON or OFF
using the thumbwheel and confirm with
OK.
3
4
Analogue combined instrument panel.
Digital combined instrument panel.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
233
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
General
Checking and settings can be made immediately after the combined instrument panel is
automatically illuminated in connection with
unlocking. If none of the trip computer's controls are actuated within approx. 30 seconds
after the driver's door has been opened then
the instrument extinguishes, after which
either key position II1 or engine starting is
required in order to operate the trip computer.
•
•
Functions
Functions
Heading in combined instrument panel
Proceed as follows to open and check/adjust
functions:
The trip computer's functions or headings
are each listed in an infinite loop.
Combined instrument panel "Analog"
4. Finish by pressing RESET twice after
completed checking/ adjustment.
The different functions of the trip computer
are listed in the following table:
If a warning message appears when the
trip computer is used then the message
must first be acknowledged before the trip
computer can be reactivated.
•
Acknowledge the message by briefly
pressing the indicator stalk OK button.
Group menus
The trip computer has two different group
menus:
Information display and controls.
OK - Opens the loop with the trip computer's functions + Activates the selected
option.
Thumbwheel - Opens the loop with the
trip computer's headings + Scrolls
through the options.
RESET - Undoes, zeroes or backs out of
a function after making a selection.
1
234
For information on key positions - see page 81.
2. Press OK - the loop with all functions
opens.
3. Browse through the functions with the
thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.
NOTE
05
1. To ensure that no control is in the middle
of a sequence - "Reset" them first with
2 presses on RESET.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
Functions
Information
Digital speed
Shows the car's speed digitally in the centre of the combined instrument panel:
- km/h
•
Open with OK, select with the thumbwheel, confirm with OK and back out with ENTER.
- mph
- No display
Parking heater*
For a description of programming the timer, see page 228.
- Direct start
- Timer 1 - leads to the menu for selecting time.
- Timer 2 - leads to the menu for selecting time.
Additional heater*
For more information, see page 232.
05
– Auto On
– Off
TC options
- Distance to empty tank
- Fuel consumption
Average speed
Trip meter T1 and total dist.
Trip meter T2 and total dist.
Service status
Here you can select/activate the options that you want to be available as selectable headings
in the trip computer. The symbols for the items already selected are WHITE with a "tick" - others are GREY and have no "tick":
1. Open the function with OK, scroll through the symbols for the options with the thumbwheel and select/stop on the desired symbol.
2. Confirm with OK - the symbol changes colour from GREY to WHITE and is marked with a
"tick".
3. Continue to select the function symbols with the thumbwheel or finish with RESET.
Shows the number of months and the distance until the next service.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
235
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
A
Functions
Information
Oil levelA
For more information, see page 343.
Messages (##)
For more information, see page 207.
Certain engines.
Headings
One of the headings in the following table can
be selected for constant display in the combined instrument panel. Proceed as follows to
determine which:
05
3. Stop on desired heading.
2. Turn the thumbwheel - selectable headings for the trip computer are shown in a
loop.
Trip computer heading in combined instrument
panel
Information
Trip meter T1 and total dist.
•
Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.
Trip meter T2 and total dist.
•
Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.
Distance to empty
For more information - see page 240, "Distance to empty tank".
Fuel consumption
Current consumption.
Average speed
•
No trip computer information.
This option shows a blank display - it also marks the beginning/end of the loop.
The combined instrument panel's trip computer can be changed to another option at
236
1. To ensure that no control is in the middle
of a sequence - "Reset" them first with
2 presses on RESET.
Long press on RESET resets Average speed.
any time during the journey. Proceed as follows:
•
Turn the thumbwheel - stop on the
desired heading.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
Combined instrument panel "Digital"
Functions
Proceed as follows to open and check/adjust
functions:
1. To ensure that no control is in the middle
of a sequence - "Reset" them first with
2 presses on RESET.
2. Press OK - loop with all functions opens.
3. Browse through the functions with the
thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.
4. Finish by pressing RESET twice after
completed checking/ adjustment.
Information displays and controls.
OK - Opens the loop with the trip computer's functions + Activates the selected
option.
The different functions of the trip computer
are listed in the following table:
05
Thumbwheel - Opens the loop with the
trip computer's headings + Scrolls
through the options.
RESET - Undoes, zeroes or backs out of
a function after making a selection.
}}
237
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
Functions
Information
Trip computer reset
Note that this function does not reset both trip meters T1 and T2 - see the table in the section "Headings" page 239 or the heading "Resetting with Digital" page 240 for information
on the process.
Average
Average speed
Messages
For more information, see page 207.
Themes
Combined instrument panel appearance is selected here, see page 72.
Settings*
Select Auto On or Off.
For more information, see page 232.
05
Contrast mode/Colour mode
Adjusting the combined instrument panel's brightness and colour intensity.
Parking heater*
For a description of programming the timer, see page 228.
– Direct start
- Symbol Timer 1 - leads to the menu for selecting
time.
- Symbol Timer 2 - leads to the menu for selecting
time.
A
238
Service status
Shows the number of months and the distance until the next service.
Oil levelA
For more information, see page 343.
Certain engines.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
Headings
Three trip computer headings can be displayed simultaneously - one in each "window" (see previous figure).
play in the combined instrument panel. Proceed as follows to determine which:
1. To ensure that no control is in the middle
of a sequence - "Reset" them first with
2 presses on RESET.
2. Turn the thumbwheel - selectable heading combinations are shown in a loop.
One of the heading combinations in the following table can be selected for constant dis-
3. Stop on desired heading combination.
Heading combinations
Information
Average
Trip meter T1 + Meter reading
Average speed
•
Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.
Instantaneous
Trip meter T2 + Meter reading
Distance to empty
tank
•
Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.
Instantaneous
Meter reading
kmh<>mph
No trip computer information.
The combined instrument panel's heading
combination for the trip computer can be
changed to another option at any time during
the journey. Proceed as follows:
•
Turn the thumbwheel - stop on the
desired heading.
kmh<>mph - see "Digital speed display" page 240.
This option extinguishes all three trip computer displays - it also marks
the beginning/end of the loop.
Supplementary information
Average speed
Average
The average speed is calculated for the driving distance driven since the last reset to
zero.
Average fuel consumption is calculated from
the last resetting.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if
a fuel-driven heater* has been used.
05
Instantaneous
The information for current fuel consumption
is updated continuously - approximately once
per second. When the car is driven at low
speed the consumption is shown per time
unit - at a higher speed it is shown related to
mileage.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
239
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
Different units (km/miles) can be selected for
the display - see the heading "Change unit"
page 240.
puter shows the corresponding speed in
km/h and vice versa.
3. Finish with RESET.
Range - distance to empty tank
Resetting with "Analog"
Trip meter and Average speed
To change unit (km/miles) for distance and
speed - go to MY CAR Settings
System options Distance and fuel units,
see page 209.
The trip computer shows the approximate
distance that can be driven with the fuel
quantity remaining in the tank.
No guaranteed range remains when the heading Distance to empty shows "----".
•
•
Each heading must be zeroed individually.
In which case, refuel as soon as possible.
The calculation is based on the average fuel
consumption over the last 30 km and the
remaining driveable fuel quantity.
05
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if
the driving style has been changed.
An economic driving style generally results in
a longer driving distance. For more information on how fuel consumption can be influenced, see page 10.
Digital speed display2
The speed is shown in the opposite unit
(kmh/mph) in relation to the main instrument.
If it is calibrated in mph then the trip com-
2
240
With current trip computer heading - Trip
meter T1, Trip meter T2 or Average speed shown in the combined instrument panel:
Give a long press on RESET RESET selected heading is zeroed.
Resetting with "Digital"
Trip meter
Turn with the thumbwheel to the heading
combination containing the trip meter to be
reset:
•
Give a long press on RESET RESET selected trip meter is zeroed.
Average speed & Average consumption
1. Select function Trip computer
reset and activate with OK.
2. Select one of the following options with
the thumbwheel and activate with OK:
- l/100 km
- km/h
- Reset both
Only for combined instrument panel "Digital".
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Change unit
NOTE
In addition to the trip computer, these
units are also changed at the same time in
Volvo's GPS navigator RTI.
Journey statistics*
Information is stored about completed trips
containing average fuel consumption and
average speed, which can be viewed in the
centre console's screen as a bar chart.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
• Start new trip - ENTER is used to delete
Function
all previous statistics, back out of the
menu by selecting EXIT.
• Reset for every driving cycle - check
the box by selecting ENTER and back
out of the menu by selecting EXIT.
With the "Reset for every driving cycle"
option checked, all statistics are deleted
automatically once driving is complete and
the car has been stopped for 4 hours. The
journey statistics start again from zero the
next time the engine is started.
Trip statistics3.
Each bar symbolises 1 km or 10 km driven
distance, depending on the scale selected the bar at the far right shows the value for the
current kilometre or 10 km.
The TUNE knob can be used to change the
scale for each bar between 1 km and 10 km the cursor at the far right changes position
between up and down depending on the
scale selected.
If a new drive cycle begins before 4 hours
have passed, the current period has to be
deleted manually first using the "Start new
trip" option.
05
See also information on Eco guide on page
73.
Operation
A setting can be defined in the MY CAR
menu system:
MY CAR
3
My V40
Trip statistics:
The figure is schematic - layout may vary depending on updated software and market.
241
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adapting driving characteristics
Speed related power steering*
Steering force increases with the speed of the
car to give the driver enhanced sensitivity.
The steering is firmer and more immediate on
motorways. Steering is light and requires no
extra effort when parking and at low speed.
The driver can choose between three different levels of steering force for road responsiveness or steering sensitivity. Go to the
menu system MY CAR and locate Settings
Car settings Steering wheel force and
select Low, Medium or High.
05
242
For a description of the menu system, see
page 209. This menu cannot be accessed
while the car is in motion.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
Storage spaces
05
}}
243
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
Storage compartment1 in door panel
Storage compartment, driver’s side
Storage compartment, driver’s side
Ticket clip
Storage compartment
WARNING
Do not keep any sharp objects in the compartment, or objects which protrude.
Glovebox
Jacket holder
Storage compartment, cup holder
The jacket holder is only designed for light
clothing.
Jacket holder
Cup holder* in rear seat
Storage
05
Tunnel console
pocket2
Storage compartment, rear seat
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile
phones, cameras, remote controls for
accessories, etc. in the glove compartment
or other compartments. Otherwise they
may injure people in the car in the event of
sudden braking or a collision.
Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and
USB*/AUX input under the armrest.
Includes cup holder for driver and passenger. (If ashtray and cigarette lighter
1
2
244
With ice scraper holder on the driver’s side.
Not applicable to textile upholstery.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
are specified then there is a cigarette
lighter in the 12 V socket for the front
seat, see page 246, and a detachable
ashtray in the cup holder.)
Armrest
When closed, the armrest can be adjusted*
longitudinally.
Cigarette lighter and ashtray*
The ashtray in the tunnel console is detached
by lifting the tray straight up.
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.
The button pops out when the lighter is hot.
Pull out the lighter and light a cigarette on the
heated coils.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
Glovebox
Cooling is active when the climate control
system is active, i.e. when the key is in position II or the engine is running.
Vanity mirror
Inlay mats*
Volvo supplies specially manufactured inlay
mats.
WARNING
The owner's manual and maps can be kept
here for example. There are also holders for
pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox
can be locked* using the key blade, see
pages 48 and 58.
Before setting off check that the inlaid mat
in the driver area is firmly affixed and
secured in the pins in order to avoid getting caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
Vanity mirror with lighting.
The light illuminates automatically when the
cover is lifted.
05
Cooling3
The glovebox can also be used as a cooled
area.
Start cooling by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment to
the end position.
Switch off the cooling by moving the control forwards to the end position.
3
Applicable only to cars with ECC.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
245
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
12 V socket
NOTE
Optional equipment and accessories - e.g.
display screens, music players and mobile
phones - which are connected to one of
the passenger compartment's 12V electrical sockets, could be activated by the climate control system, even when the
remote control key has been removed or
when the car is locked, for example, when
the parking heater* is activated at a preset
time.
12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat.
05
The electrical sockets can be used for various
accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. display
screens, music players and mobile phones.
For the sockets to supply current, the remote
control key must be in at least key position I,
see page 81.
For this reason remove the plugs from the
electrical sockets for optional equipment
or accessories when not in use because
the battery could be drained in the event of
such an occurrence!
IMPORTANT
Max. power takeoff is 10 A (120 W) in
either socket.
WARNING
Always leave the plug in the socket when
the socket is not in use.
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo. For information on the
use of Volvo's recommended temporary
emergency puncture repair (TMK), see
page 332.
Electrical socket in cargo area*
For more information, see page 308.
246
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
05
247
General information on infotainment.....................................................
Radio.....................................................................................................
Media player.........................................................................................
External audio source via AUX/USB* input...........................................
250
261
268
272
Media Bluetooth®* ................................................................................ 275
Bluetooth® handsfree*..........................................................................
Voice recognition* mobile phone..........................................................
TV*.........................................................................................................
Remote control* ...................................................................................
248
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
278
287
291
294
INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
General
The Infotainment system consists of a radio,
media player, TV* and the option to communicate with a mobile phone*. Information is
presented on a 5 or 7-inch* screen in the
upper section of the centre console. Functions can be controlled via buttons in the
steering wheel, the centre console below the
screen or via a remote control*.
NOTE
Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch if the infotainment system is
used when the engine is switched off. This
is to avoid discharging the battery unnecessarily.
Dolby, Pro Logic
Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia.
The Audyssey MultEQ system has been used
in the development and tuning of the sound
to ensure a world-class sound experience.
If the Infotainment System is active when the
engine is switched off then it is automatically
activated the next time the key is inserted into
key position I or higher, and it continues with
the same source (e.g. radio) as before the
engine was switched off (the driver's door
must be closed on cars with Keyless systems*).
06
Overview
The infotainment system can be used for 15
minutes at a time without the remote control
key being in the ignition switch by pressing
the On/Off button.
Made under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
When the car is being started the infotainment system is switched off temporarily and
continues when the engine has started.
Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia.
Audyssey MultEQ
AUX (only applies to Performance) - and
USB (does not apply to Performance) -
250
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
inputs for external audio sources (e.g.
iPod®).
Steering wheel keypad (with*/without
thumbwheel).
Display screen. The display screen is
available in two sizes: 5 and 7-inch. The
manual shows a 7-inch display screen.
Centre console control panel.
Operating the system
Scroll/fast wind/search - Short press
scrolls between disc tracks, preset radio stations (does not apply to DAB) or chapters
(only applies to DVD discs). Long press fastwinds disc tracks or searches for the next
available radio station.
SOUND - press for access to audio settings (bass, treble, etc.). For more information, see page 255.
VOL - raise or lower volume.
ON/OFF/MUTE - short press starts
the system and long press (until the screen is
off) switches off. Note that the whole of the
Sensus system (including navigation * and
phone functions*) starts/switches off at the
same time. Briefly press to mute the sound
(MUTE) or restore the sound if it had been
switched off.
06
Disc insert and eject slot.
Disc eject.
Main sources - press to select the main
source (e.g. RADIO, MEDIA). Last active
source is shown (e.g. FM1). A new source
view is selected if the main source button is
pressed while in RADIO or MEDIA. If you are
in TEL* or NAV* and press the main source
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
251
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
06
button then a shortcut menu is shown with
commonly used menu options.
Preset buttons, input of numbers and letters.
OK/MENU - press the thumbwheel in the
steering wheel or the button in the centre
console to accept a menu selection. If OK/
MENU is pressed while in the normal view, a
menu for the selected source opens (e.g.
RADIO or MEDIA). Arrow to the right of the
screen is shown when there are underlying
menus.
FAV – shortcut to a favourite setting. The
button can be programmed for a commonly
used function in AM, FM, etc. For more information, see page 254.
TUNE - turn the thumbwheel in the steering wheel or the knob in the centre console to
scroll among tracks/folders, radio and TV*
stations, phone contacts* or to navigate
among choices on the display screen.
Voice recognition (cars with navigation) press to activate voice recognition (for Bluetooth®-connected mobile phone and navigation system*).
MUTE (cars without navigation) - press to
deactivate the radio/media audio or restore
the audio if it has been switched off.
EXIT - Short press leads upwards in the
menu system, interrupts current function,
interrupts/rejects phone calls or erases
entered characters. Long press leads to normal view, or if you are in normal view to the
highest menu level (main source view), from
where you can reach the same main source
buttons located in the centre console (7).
INFO - If more information than can be
shown on the screen is available, press the
INFO button to see the remaining information.
252
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
Menus
06
The example shows navigation to different functions when a disc is played back. (1) Main source button, (2) Normal view, (3) Shortcut/source menu, (4) Quick
menu, (5) Source menu
}}
253
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
Select main source by pressing a main
source button (1) (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL). To
navigate through the source menus, use the
controls TUNE, OK/MENU, EXIT or the main
source button (1).
For Menu overview, see page 256.
NOTE
Quick menu - fast mode when TUNE is
turned, e.g. for changing disc tracks, radio
station, etc.
Source menu - for menu navigation
(accessed by pressing OK/MENU).
FAV - store a preset
DISC
USB*
iPod*
Bluetooth*
AUX
TV*
To store a function in the FAV button:
Menus and views in the display screen
The appearance depends on the source,
equipment in the car, settings, etc.
1. Select a main source (e.g. RADIO,
MEDIA).
Main source button - press to switch the
main source or to show the Shortcut/Source
menu in the active source.
2. Select a wavelength or source (AM, Disc,
etc.).
Normal view - normal mode for the
source.
Shortcut/Source menu - shows commonly used menu options in the main
sources, e.g. TEL and MEDIA (accessed by
pressing the active source's main source button (1)).
254
•
•
•
•
•
•
It is also possible to select and store a
favourite for MY CAR, CAM* and NAV*.
Favourites can also be selected and stored
under MY CAR. For more information on the
menu system MY CAR, see page 209.
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad with a thumbwheel*, these can be
used instead of the controls in the centre
console (TUNE, OK/MENU, EXIT), see
page 251.
06
In MEDIA mode:
The FAV button can be used to store functions that are used frequently so that the
function can be started simply by pressing
FAV. You can select a favourite (e.g.
Equalizer) for each function as follows:
In RADIO mode:
•
•
•
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
AM
FM1/FM2
DAB1*/DAB2*
3. Press and hold the FAV button until the
"favourites menu" is shown.
4. Turn TUNE to select an option from the
list and press OK/MENU to save.
> When the main source (e.g. RADIO,
MEDIA) is active the stored function is
available via a short press on FAV.
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
General audio settings
Press SOUND to access the audio settings
menu (Bass, Treble, etc.). Scroll forward with
SOUND or OK/MENU to your selection (e.g.
Treble).
Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and save
the setting with OK/MENU.
Continue pressing SOUND or OK/MENU to
access other options:
• Surround1 - Can be set to the On/Off
position. When On is selected, the system selects the setting for optimal sound
reproduction. Normally DPLII and
then appear in the display screen. If the
recording is made with Dolby Digital technology then playback will take place with
this setting,
then appears in the
display screen. When Off is selected, 3channel stereo is available.
•
• Treble - Treble level.
• Fader – Balance between the front and
Bass - Bass level.
rear speakers.
• Balance – Balance between the left and
right-hand speakers.
1
2
3
• Subwoofer*1 - Bass speaker level.
• DPL II centre level3 channel centre
Sound stage1
level1 - Volume for centre speaker.
• DPL II surround level1, 2 – Level for surround.
Advanced audio settings
Equalizer3
The sound experience can be optimised for
the driver's seat, both front seats or the rear
seat. If there are passengers in both the front
and rear seats then the option recommended
is; both front seats. The options can be
selected under Audio settings Sound
stage.
The volume level can be adjusted separately
for different wavelengths.
For general information on menu navigation,
see page 253 and menu overview, see
page 256.
1. Press OK/MENU to access Audio
settings and select Equalizer.
Audio volume and automatic volume
control
2. Select wavelength by turning TUNE and
confirm with OK/MENU.
The audio system compensates for disrupting
noises in the passenger compartment by
increasing the volume in relation to the speed
of the car. The compensation level can be set
to low, medium, high or off. Select the level
under Audio settings Volume
compensation.
3. Adjust the audio settings by turning
TUNE and confirm with OK/MENU. Continue in the same way with other wavelengths you want to change.
4. When you have finished with audio settings, press EXIT to confirm and return to
normal view.
For general information on menu navigation,
see page 253 and menu overview, see
page 256.
06
For general information on menu navigation,
see page 253 and menu overview, see
page 256.
Only Premium Sound Multimedia.
Only when Surround is activated.
Not Performance.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
255
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
External audio source audio volume
If an external audio source (e.g. an MP3
player or iPod®) is connected to the AUX
input then the audio source that is connected
can have a different volume than the audio
system's internal volume (e.g. radio). Correct
this by adjusting the volume of the input:
1. Press the MEDIA button and turn TUNE
to AUX and wait a few seconds or press
OK/MENU.
2. Press OK/MENU and then turn TUNE to
AUX input volume. Confirm with OK/
MENU.
3. Turn TUNE to adjust the volume for the
AUX input.
NOTE
06
If the external audio source's volume is too
high or too low, the quality of the sound
may deteriorate. The audio quality may
also be impaired if the player is charged
while the infotainment system is in AUX
mode. In which case, avoid charging the
player via the 12 V socket.
This calibration takes into account loudspeakers, amplifiers, passenger compartment
acoustics, listener position etc. for each combination of car model and audio system.
The controls explained in these operating
instructions, e.g. Bass, Treble and
Equalizer, are only intended for the user to
be able to adapt the sound reproduction
according to personal taste.
The audio system is pre-calibrated for optimum sound reproduction by means of digital
signal processing.
256
Equalizer
Volume compensation
Reset all audio settings
A
Menu overview
The main sources RADIO, MEDIA and TEL
contain the following menus. For information
about menu navigation, see page 253.
C
D
Main menu AM
Show presets
p.262
See footnote A
p.265
Audio settings
See footnote
B
p.255
p.255
See footnote D
B
Menus RADIO
p.255
See footnote C
There is a also a dynamic calibration that
takes into account the position of the volume
control, radio reception and vehicle speed.
Scan
Optimum sound reproduction
Sound stage
p.255
p.255
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
The menu options for audio settings are the same for all
audio sources.
Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia.
Does not apply to Performance.
Main menu FM1/FM2
TP
p.263
Show radio text
p.264
Show presets
p.262
See footnote A
Scan
p.265
News settings
p.264
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
Advanced settings
REG
Alternative frequency
Turn off PTY filtering
PTY settings
Reset all FM settings
Audio settings
See footnote
A
B
Main menu CD Audio (Disc menu)
Show radio text
p.262
Random
p.270
p.264
Show presets
p.266
Scan
p.270
Audio settings
p.255
p.263
Set TP favourite
Menus MEDIA
p.265
See footnote
EON
p.266
A
Scan
p.266
p.263
Advanced settings
p.267
p.264
DAB linking
p.265
DAB band
p.255
Sub channels
p.267
p.267
See footnote A
A
For submenus, see "Main menu AM".
Main menu CD/DVDA Data (Disc menu)
Play
p.269
Pause
p.267
Stop
p.269
p.267
Random
p.270
Repeat folder
p.270
Change subtitles
p.269
Change audio track
p.269
B
Show PTY text
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
For submenus, see "Main menu AM".
Reset all DAB settings
Main menu DAB1*/DAB2*
Ensemble learn
p.265
PTY filtering
p.266
Audio settings
p.267
p.255
See footnote B
A
B
06
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
For submenus, see "Main menu AM".
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
257
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
Scan
p.270
Audio settings
See footnote
A
B
p.255
A
B
Main menu DVDA Video (Disc menu)
DVD disc menu
06
Select USB device
p.274
See footnote B
Change subtitles
p.273
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
For submenus, see "Main menu AM".
Change audio track
p.273
Scan
p.270
p.271
p.255
Main menu iPodA
p.268
Random
Audio settings
p.270
See footnote
p.255
B
Play/Pause/Continue
p.270
Scan
p.270
Stop
p.270
Audio settings
p.255
Subtitles
p.270
See footnote B
Main menu Media BluetoothA
Audio tracks
p.270
Does not apply to Performance.
For submenus, see "Main menu AM".
Random
p.277
Advanced settings
p.271
Main menu USBA
Change device
p.276
p.271
Play
Remove Bluetooth device
p.276
Scan
p.277
Angle
258
p.270
Audio settings
B
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
For submenus, see "Main menu AM".
Repeat folder
DivX® VOD code
A
B
p.273
Pause
Stop
p.273
Random
p.270
A
B
Does not apply to Performance.
For submenus, see "Main menu AM".
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
Bluetooth software
version in car
Audio settings
See footnote
A
B
p.277
p.255
p.293
Audio settings
p.255
See footnote A
B
A
Does not apply to Performance.
For submenus, see "Main menu AM".
Pop-up
menuAvideo
All calls
and TV*
p.255
Image settings
p.271
A
Source menu
p.253
For submenus, see "Main menu AM".
See footnote B
Main menu TV*
DVD disc menu
Audio settings
See footnote
Select country
p.292
Reorganise presets
p.292
Autostore
p.292
See footnote
C
Missed calls
Answered calls
Dialled calls
Call duration
p.270
C
DVD disc TOP menuC
A
B
Main menu Bluetooth® handsfreeA
(Phone menu)
All calls
p.256
AUX input volume
Menus TEL
For submenus, see "Main menu AM".
Press OK/MENU when a video file is being
played back or TV* is being shown in order
to access the pop-up menu.
Main menu AUX
A
Scan
p.270
Only applies when playing back videos or displaying TV.
What is shown in the pop-up menu for the source menu
depends on what is being played back or displayed, it can
be e.g. CD/DVD data menu or USB menu.
Only applies to DVD video discs.
Phone book
Search
New contact
Speed dials
Receive vCard
p.281
p.281
p.281
p.281
p.281
p.281
p.282
06
p.283
p.284
p.285
p.285
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
259
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
Memory status
Clear phone book
p.285
p.280
Remove Bluetooth device
p.281
Phone settings
Sounds and volume
Download phone book
06
Bluetooth software version in car
p.279
p.281
p.282
p.286
Call options
Auto answer
260
Disconnect phone
p.286
Change phone
Discoverable
Voicemail number
p.281
A
Does not apply to Performance.
p.281
p.280
06 Infotainment system
Radio
General
Automatic tuning
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the buttons in the steering
wheel, see page 251. For a description of
the remote control, see page 294.
2. Hold in
/
in the centre console
(or in the steering wheel keypad*). The
radio searches for the next/previous available station.
Station list1
Menus
The menus inRADIO are controlled from the
centre console and the steering wheel keypad*. For general information on menu navigation, see page 253 and menu overview, see
page 256.
The radio automatically compiles a list of the
strongest FM stations whose signals it is currently receiving. This enables you to find a
station when you drive into an area where you
do not know the radio stations and their frequencies.
Station presets (0-9)
Radio AM/FM
To go to the list and select a station:
Confirm your selection or go to the radio
menu by pressing OK/MENU.
Tuning
1. Select the desired wavelength (FM1 or
FM2).
Centre console, controls for radio functions.
RADIO button for selecting the wavelength (AM, FM1, FM2, DAB1*, DAB2*).
Select the desired frequency/station or
navigate in the radio menu by turning
TUNE.
Hold in the button for next/previous available station. Short press for preset.
1
1. Press RADIO, turn TUNE until the
desired wavelength (AM, FM1 etc.) is
shown, press OK/MENU.
NOTE
The reception is dependent both on how
good the signal strength and signal quality
are. The transmission may be disturbed by
various factors such as tall buildings or the
transmitter being far away. Coverage level
can also vary depending on where in the
country you are located.
06
2. Turn TUNE one step in either direction.
This displays the list of all stations in the
area. The currently tuned station is indicated with enlarged text in the list.
3. Turn TUNE again in either direction to
select a station from the list.
4. Confirm your choice by pressing OK/
MENU.
Does not apply to Performance.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
261
06 Infotainment system
Radio
NOTE
06
•
The list only shows the frequencies of
stations that are currently being
received, not a complete list of all
radio frequencies on the selected
wavelength.
•
If the signal from the currently received
station is weak, this may prevent the
radio from updating the station list. If
this occurs, press the
button
(while the station list is shown in the
display screen) in order to change to
manual tuning and set a frequency. If
the station list is no longer shown, turn
TUNE one step in either direction to
show the list again, and press
to
switch.
The list disappears from the TV screen after a
few seconds.
If the station list is no longer shown, turn
TUNE one step in either direction and press
the
button in the centre console to
change to manual tuning (or to return from
manual tuning to the function for "Station
list").
Manual tuning
The preset from the factory is that the radio
shows the station list of the strongest stations
in the area when you turn TUNE (see the section "Station list", page 261). When the station list is shown, press the
button in
the centre console to change to manual tuning. This allows you to select a frequency
from the list of all available radio frequencies
in the selected wavelength. In other words, if
turn TUNE one step in a manual search the
frequency is changed from e.g. 93.3 to
93.4 MHz, etc.
To manually select a station:
1. Press the RADIO button, turn TUNE until
the required frequency band (AM, FM1
etc.) is displayed, press OK/MENU.
NOTE
The preset from the factory is that the
radio automatically searches for the stations in the area where you are driving (see
previous section "Station list" above).
But if you have changed over to manual
tuning (by pressing the
button in the
centre console when the station list was
shown), then the radio remains set in the
function for manual tuning the next time
you switch on the radio. To change back
to the function for "Station list", turn TUNE
one step (to show the complete list of sta.
tions) and press the button
Note that if you press
when the station list is not shown then INFO is activated. For more information on this function, see page 251.
2. Turn TUNE to select a frequency.
Preset
10 presets can be stored per wavelength
(AM, FM1 etc.).
The stored presets are selected using the
preset buttons.
1. Tune into a station (see "Tuning", page
261).
2. Hold in one of the preset buttons for a
few seconds, the sound disappears dur-
262
06 Infotainment system
Radio
ing this time and returns when the station
is stored. The preset button can now be
used.
A list of pre-selected channels can be shown2
in the TV screen. The function is activated/
deactivated in FM/AM mode under FM menu
Show presets or AM menu Show
presets.
RDS functions
RDS (Radio Data System) links FM transmitters into a network. An FM transmitter in such
a network sends information that gives an
RDS radio the following functions:
•
Automatically switches to a stronger
transmitter if reception in the area is poor.
•
Searches for programme type, such as
traffic information or news.
•
Receives text information on current radio
programme.
NOTE
Some radio stations do not use RDS or
only selected parts of its functionality.
audio source currently in use. For example, if
the CD player is in use, it is paused. The
interrupting transmission is played at a preset
volume, see page 265. The radio returns to
the previous audio source and volume when
the set programme type is no longer broadcast.
The programme functions alarm (ALARM!),
traffic information (TP), news (NEWS), and
programme types (PTY) interrupt one another
in order of priority, where alarm has the highest priority and programme types has the
lowest. For additional settings of programming interruptions (EON Distant and EON
Local), see the section "Enhanced Other Networks – EON" below. Press EXIT to return to
the interrupted audio source, press the OK/
MENU to clear the message.
Alarm
This function is used to warn of serious accidents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot be
temporarily interrupted or deactivated. The
message ALARM! appears on the TV screen
when an alarm message is transmitted.
Traffic information – TP
If a required programme type is located the
radio can switch stations interrupting the
2
3
This function allows traffic information sent
within a set station's RDS network to break
through. The TP symbol indicates that the
function is activated. If the preset station can
send traffic information then this is shown by
TP glowing brightly in the TV screen, otherwise TP will be grey.
–
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under
FM menu TP.
Enhanced Other Networks – EON
This function is useful in urban areas with
many regional radio stations. It allows the distance between the car and the radio station
transmitter to determine when programme
functions should interrupt the current audio
source.
–
Activate/deactivate in FM mode by
selecting one of the options under FM
menu Advanced settings EON:
• Local – interrupts only if the radio station
06
transmitter is close.
• Distant3 – interrupts if the station trans-
mitter is far away, even if there is a lot of
static.
TP from selected station/all stations
The radio can only interrupt for traffic information from the selected station or all stations within the RDS network.
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
Factory settings.
263
06 Infotainment system
Radio
–
Go in FM mode to FM menu
Advanced settings Set TP favourite
to change.
News
This function allows news broadcasts sent
within a set station's RDS network to break
through. The NEWS symbol indicates that the
function is active.
2. Then the PTY function must be activated
under FM menu Advanced settings
PTY settings Receive traffic
bulletins from other networks.
–
An indicator is shown in the TV screen when
PTY is activated.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under
FM menu News settings News.
News from selected station/all stations
The radio can only interrupt for news from the
selected station or all stations in the RDS network.
–
06
Go in FM mode to FM menu News
settings Set news favourite to
change.
Programme types – PTY
The PTY function can be used to select one
or more programme types, such as pop
music and serious classic. The PTY symbol
indicates that the function is active. This function allows programme types broadcast
within a set station's RDS network to break
through.
4
264
1. Activate in FM mode by first selecting the
programme types under FM menu
Advanced settings PTY settings
Select PTY.
Only cars with 7-inch screen
Deactivation of the PTY function is performed
in FM mode under FM menu Advanced
settings PTY settings Receive traffic
bulletins from other networks. Selected
programme types (PTY) are not reset.
Resetting and removing PTY are performed
under FM menu Advanced settings
PTY settings Select PTY Clear all.
PTY search
This function searches the entire wavelength
for the selected programme type.
1. In FM mode select one or more PTY
under FM menu Advanced settings
PTY settings Select PTY.
2. Go to FM menu
PTY settings
Advanced settings
Seek PTY.
To finish searching, press EXIT.
–
To continue searching for another broadcast of the selected programme types,
or
.
press on
Display of programme type
The programme type of the current station
can be shown on the TV screen.
–
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under
FM menu Advanced settings PTY
settings Show PTY text.
Radio text4
Some RDS stations transmit information on
programme content, artists, etc. This information can be shown on the TV screen.
–
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under
FM menu Show radio text.
Automatic frequency update – AF
The function selects the strongest transmitter
for the set station. In order to find a strong
transmitter the function may, in exceptional
cases, need to search the entire FM wavelength.
06 Infotainment system
Radio
–
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under
FM menu Advanced settings
Alternative frequency.
Regional radio programmes – REG
This function causes the radio to continue
with a regional transmitter even if its signal
strength is low. The symbol REG shows that
the function is active.
–
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under
FM menu Advanced settings REG.
Resetting RDS functions
All radio settings can be reset to the original
factory settings.
–
The reset is carried out in FM mode under
FM menu Advanced settings
Reset all FM settings.
Volume control, programme types
The interrupting programme types, e.g.
NEWS or TP, are heard at the volume
selected for each respective programme
type. If the volume level is adjusted during the
programme interruption, the new level is
saved until the next programme interruption.
Scan wavelength
found, it is played for approx. 10 seconds
before scanning is resumed. When a station
is playing back it can be saved as a preset in
the usual way, see the section Preset, page
262.
–
To start scanning go in FM/AM mode to
FM menu Scan or AM menu Scan.
NOTE
Service - Channel, radio channel (only
audio services are supported by the system).
•
Ensemble - A collection of radio channels on the same frequency.
Storing channel groups (Ensemble
learn)
Programming of channel groups creates an
updated list of all available channel groups.
The list is not updated automatically.
Radio system - DAB*
General
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is a digital
broadcasting system for radio. This system
supports DAB, DAB+ and DMB.
Coverage for DAB is not available in all
locations. If there is no coverage then the
message No reception is shown in the
display screen.
•
When the vehicle is moved to a new broadcasting area, programming of existing channel groups in the area may be necessary.
Scanning stops if a station is saved.
NOTE
Service and Ensemble
Programming is carried out in the menu system in DAB mode under DAB menu
Ensemble learn. Programming can also take
place as follows:
06
1. Turn TUNE one step in either direction.
> Ensemble learn is shown in the list of
available channel groups.
2. Press OK/MENU.
> New programming is started.
Programming can be cancelled with EXIT.
The function automatically searches for available channels and takes into account any
programme type filtering. When a station is
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
265
06 Infotainment system
Radio
Navigation in channel group list
(Ensemble)
To navigate in and access the channel group
list turn TUNE. The name of the Ensemble is
shown in the upper part of the TV screen.
When switching to the new Ensemble the
name changes to the new one.
•
Service - Shows channels irrespective of
the channel group to which they are allocated. The list can also be filtered using
the selection of programme type (PTY
filtering), see below.
Scanning
06
The function automatically searches the current wavelength for strong stations. When a
station is found, it is played for approx. 10
seconds before scanning is resumed. When a
station is playing back it is saved as a preset
in the usual way. For more information on
presets, see "Preset" below.
–
Go in DAB mode to DAB menu
to start scanning.
NOTE
Scanning stops if a station is saved.
5
266
Scan
Scanning can also be selected in DAB-PTY
mode. In which case only channels of the
pre-selected programme type are played.
Programme type (PTY)
Various types of radio programmes can be
selected using the programme type function.
There are a number of different programme
types which also include different programme
categories. After selecting a programme type,
navigation only takes place within the channels that are broadcasting that type.
Programme type is selected in DAB mode
under DAB menu PTY filtering. Exit this
mode as follows:
–
Press EXIT.
> An indicator is shown in the TV screen
when PTY is activated.
In certain cases DAB radio will exit PTY mode
when DAB to DAB linking (see below) is
implemented.
Preset
10 station presets can be stored per wavelength. DAB has 2 memories for presets:
DAB1 and DAB2. Storage of presets is made
by means of a long press on the desired preset button, for more information see
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia
page 262. The stored presets are selected
using the preset buttons.
A preset contains one channel but no subchannels. If a subchannel is being played and
a preset is saved then only the main channel
is registered. This is because subchannels
are temporary. At the next attempt to retrieve
the preset, the channel which contained the
subchannel will be played. The preset is not
dependent on the channel list.
A list of pre-selected channels can be shown5
in the TV screen. The function is activated/
deactivated in DAB mode under DAB menu
Show presets.
NOTE
The audio system's DAB system does not
support all functions in the DAB standard.
Radio text
Some radio stations transmit information on
programme content, artists, etc. This information is shown on the TV screen.
The function is deactivated/activated in DAB
mode under DAB menu Show radio text.
06 Infotainment system
Radio
NOTE
Only one of the functions "Show radio
text" and "Show presets" can be activated at a time. If one of them is activated
when the other is already activated, then
the previously activated function is deactivated automatically. Both functions can be
deactivated.
Advanced settings
DAB to DAB link
DAB to DAB linking means that the DAB radio
can go from one channel with poor or no
reception to the same channel in another
channel group with better reception. There
may be a certain delay when changing channel group. There may be a period of silence
between the current channel no longer being
available to the new channel becoming available.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced
settings DAB linking.
Wavelength
DAB can be transmitted on two6 wavelengths:
6
• Band III - covers most areas.
• LBand - available only in a few areas.
By selecting for example Band III on its own,
channel programming takes place more
quickly than if both Band III and LBand have
been selected. It is not certain that all channel
groups will be found. Wavelength selection
does not affect the stored memories.
Wavelengths can be deactivated/activated in
DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced
settings DAB band.
Subchannel
Secondary components are usually named
subchannels. These are temporary and can
contain e.g. translations of the main programme into other languages.
If one or more subchannels are broadcast
then the
symbol is shown to the left of the
channel name in the TV screen. A subchannel
is indicated by the - symbol appearing to the
left of the channel name in the TV screen.
Press
Display of subchannels can be deactivated/
activated in DAB mode under DAB menu
Advanced settings Sub channels
Programme type text
Some radio stations broadcast information
about programme type and programme category, for information on Programme types –
PTY, see page 264. This information is shown
on the TV screen.
The function is activated/deactivated in DAB
mode under DAB menu Advanced
settings Show PTY text.
Resetting the DAB settings
All DAB settings can be reset to the original
factory settings.
–
The reset is carried out in DAB mode
under DAB menu Advanced settings
Reset all DAB settings.
06
to access the subchannels.
Subchannels can only be accessed on the
selected main channel and not on any other
channel without selecting it.
Not all areas/countries use both wavelengths.
267
06 Infotainment system
Media player
General
MEDIA button, activates last active
media source. If you are already in a
media source and press the MEDIA button then a shortcut menu is shown for
commonly used menu options.
The media player can playback audio and
video from CD/DVD* discs and externally
connected audio sources via the AUX/USB*
input or wirelessly stream audio files from
external devices using Bluetooth®. Certain
media players can show TV* and have the
option to communicate with a mobile phone
(see page 278)* via Bluetooth®.
Input of numbers and letters.
Confirm your selection or go to the menu
for the selected media source by pressing
OK/MENU.
Select the disc tracks/folders, or navigate
through menu options by turning TUNE.
CD/DVD1 functions
Fast forward/reverse and change disc
track or chapter2.
The media player supports and can play the
following main types of discs and files:
•
•
06
•
•
Centre console control panel.
Disc insert and eject slot
Pre-recorded CD discs (CD Audio).
Burned CD discs with audio and/or video
files1.
Pre-recorded DVD video discs1.
Burned DVD discs1 with audio and/or
video files.
For more information about the supported
formats, see page 271.
Disc eject
1
2
268
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
Only applies to DVD discs.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the buttons in the steering
wheel, see page 251. For a description of
the remote control, see page 294.
Menus
The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the
centre console and the steering wheel keypad*. For general information on menu navigation, see page 253 and menu overview, see
page 256.
Starting playback of a disc
Press the MEDIA button, turn TUNE until
Disc is displayed, press OK/MENU. If there
is a disc in the media player then the disc
starts playing back automatically, otherwise
Insert disc is shown in the TV screen. Then
insert a disc, with text side up. The disc starts
to play back automatically.
If a disc with audio/video files is inserted into
the player then the disc's folder structure
needs to be loaded. Depending on the quality
of the disc and the quantity of information
06 Infotainment system
Media player
there may be a certain delay before playback
starts.
Disc eject
A disc remains in the ejected position for
about 12 seconds, after which it is inserted
back into the player for safety reasons.
Pause
When the volume is reduced entirely or MUTE
is pressed, the media player is paused. When
the volume is increased or MUTE is pressed
again, the media player starts. It is also possible to pause via the menu system3, press
OK/MENU, select Play/Pause.
Playback and navigation
CD audio discs
Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and
navigate in the list. Use OK/MENU to confirm
the selection of the disc track and start playback. Press EXIT to cancel and exit the playlist. A long press on EXIT leads to the playlist's root level.
Disc tracks can also be changed by pressing
/
on the centre console or the
on
steering wheel keypad*.
3
1
4
Burned discs audio/video files1
Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist/folder
structure and navigate in the list/structure.
Use OK/MENU to confirm either selection of
subfolder or start of playback of the selected
audio/video file. Press EXIT to either stop and
exit the playlist or go up (back) in the folder
structure. A long press on EXIT leads to the
playlist's root level.
Audio/video files can also be changed by
/
on the centre console or
pressing
the steering wheel keypad*.
Audio files have the symbol
, video files1
have the symbol
and folders have the
symbol
.
When playback of a file is complete the playback of the other files (of the same type) in
that particular folder continues. Change4 of
folder takes place automatically when all the
files in the current folder have been played
back. The system automatically detects and
changes setting when a disc containing only
audio files or only video files is loaded into
the media player and then plays back these
files. However, the system does not change
setting if a disc containing a mixture of audio
and video files is loaded into the media
player, but instead the player continues to
play back the previous file type.
NOTE
A video film is only shown when the car is
stationary. When the car is moving at a
speed of over about 8 km/h no picture is
shown and No visual media available
while driving appears on the display
screen, although the audio is heard during
this time. The picture is shown again as
soon as the car's speed falls below about
6 km/h.
NOTE
Some audio files that are copy-protected
by record companies or privately copied
audio files cannot be loaded by the player.
06
DVD video discs1
For playback of DVD video discs, see
page 270.
Fast forward/reverse
/
to fast forward/
Hold in the buttons
rewind. Audio files are fast forwarded/
rewound at one speed, while video files are
Does not apply to CD Audio
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
If Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
269
06 Infotainment system
Media player
fast forwarded/rewound at several speeds.
/
to
Repeatedly press the buttons
increase the fast forward/rewind speed for
video files. Release the button to return to
viewing at normal speed.
Repeat folder6
This function plays the first ten seconds of
each disc track/audio file. To scan:
This function makes it possible to play files in
a folder over and over again. When the last
file has been played out, playback of the first
file starts again.
1. Press OK/MENU
1. Press OK/MENU
2. Turn TUNE to Scan
> The first 10 seconds of each disc track
or audio file are played.
2. Turn TUNE to Repeat folder
Scan5
3. Cancel the scan with EXIT, the disc track
or audio file being played back will continue playing.
Random5
06
Disc tracks/audio files can be changed by
pressing
/
on the centre console or
the steering wheel keypad*.
This function plays the tracks in random
order. To listen to the tracks in random order:
1. Press OK/MENU
3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate
the function.
NOTE
A video film is only shown when the car is
stationary. When the car is moving at a
speed of over about 8 km/h no picture is
shown and No visual media available
while driving appears on the display
screen, although the audio is heard during
this time. The picture is shown again as
soon as the car's speed falls below about
6 km/h.
Navigation in the DVD video disc's
menu
Playback of DVD video discs1
Playback
When playing back a DVD video disc a disc
menu may appear on the display screen. The
disc menu gives access to additional functions and settings, such as selecting subtitles,
language and scene selection.
2. Turn TUNE to Random
3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate
the function.
5
6
1
270
Does not apply to DVD video discs.
Only applies to audio/video files on burned discs or USB.
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Navigation in the DVD video disc's menu is
performed using the number keys in the centre console as illustrated above.
06 Infotainment system
Media player
DivX® Video On Demand
Compatible file formats
Turn TUNE to access the list of chapters and
navigate through them (if the film is being
played back then it is paused). Press OK/
MENU to select the chapter, this also leads
back to the original position (if the film was
being played back then it is restarted). Press
EXIT to access the title list.
The media player can be registered in order
to play DivX VOD type files from burned discs
or USB. The code for registration can be
found in the menu system MY CAR Settings
Information DivX® VOD code. For
general information on menus, see under
MY CAR, see page 209.
The media player can play back a variety of
file types and is compatible with the formats
in the following table.
Titles are selected in the title list by turning
TUNE and the selection is confirmed with
OK/MENU, this also leads back to the chapter list. Press OK/MENU to activate the
selection and return to the start position. Use
EXIT to cancel the selection and this leads
back to the original position (without any
selection being made).
For more information visit www.divx.com/
vod.
Changing chapter or title
The chapter can also be changed by pressing
/
on the centre console or the
on
steering wheel keypad*.
Advanced settings7
Angle
If the DVD video disc supports it, the function
can be used to choose from which camera
position a particular scene should be shown.
Go in disc mode to Disc menu Advanced
settings Angle.
7
NOTE
Dual format, double-sided discs (DVD
Plus, CD-DVD format) are thicker than regular CD discs and therefore playback cannot be guaranteed and malfunction may
arise.
Picture settings7
If a CD contains a mixture of MP3 and
CDDA tracks, all MP3s will be ignored.
You can adjust the settings (when the car is
stationary) for brightness and contrast.
1. Press OK/MENU and select Image
settings, confirm with OK/MENU.
Audio formatA
Audio
2. Turn TUNE to the adjustment option and
confirm with OK/MENU.
Video formatC
3. Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and
confirm with OK/MENU.
To return to the settings list, press the OK/
MENU or EXIT.
The picture settings can be reset to factory
settings with the Reset option.
formatB
A
B
C
CD audio, mp3, wma
CD audio, mp3, wma, aac,
m4a
CD video, DVD video,
divx, avi, asf
06
Applies to Performance.
Does not apply to Performance.
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
271
06 Infotainment system
External audio source via AUX/USB* input
General
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the buttons in the steering
wheel, see page 251. For a description of
the remote control, see page 294.
An iPod® or MP3 player with rechargeable
batteries is recharged (when the ignition is on
or the engine is running) if the device is plugged into the USB connection.
Connection points for external audio sources.
06
An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or
MP3 player, can be connected to the audio
system via any of the connections in the centre console. An audio source connected to
the USB input can then be handled1 with the
car's audio controls. A device connected via
the AUX input cannot be controlled via the
car.
There is a recess in the right-hand rear edge
of the tunnel console where cables can be
routed so that the hatch can be closed without cables being pinched.
1
272
To connect the audio source:
1. Press MEDIA, turn TUNE to the required
sound source USB, iPod or AUX, press
OK/MENU.
> If USB is selected then Connect USB
is shown in the TV screen.
2. Connect your audio source to one of the
connections in the centre console's storage compartment (see previous illustration).
The text Reading USB is shown in the TV
screen when the system is loading the storage media's file structure. Depending on the
Only applies to the media source connected via the USB connection.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
file structure and number of files there may be
some delay before loading is finished.
NOTE
The system supports most iPod® models
produced in 2005 or later.
NOTE
To prevent damage to the USB connection, this is shut off if the USB connection
is short-circuited or if a connected USB
unit is taking too much power (this may
happen if the unit connected does not
meet the USB standard). The USB connection is reactivated automatically the
next time the ignition is turned on, unless
the fault persists.
Menus
The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the
centre console and the steering wheel keypad*. For general information on menu navigation, see page 253 and menu overview, see
page 256.
06 Infotainment system
External audio source via AUX/USB* input
Playback and navigation2
Turn TUNE to access the playlist/folder structure and navigate in the list/structure. Use
OK/MENU to either confirm selection of subfolder or start of playback of the selected
audio/video file. Press EXIT to either stop and
exit the playlist or go up (back) in the folder
structure. A long press on EXIT leads to the
playlist's root level.
Audio/video files can also be changed by
/
on the centre console or
pressing
the steering wheel keypad*.
Audio files have the symbol
, video files3
have the symbol
and folders have the
symbol
.
When playback of a file is complete the playback of the other files (of the same type) in
that particular folder continues. Change4 of
folder takes place automatically when all the
files in the current folder have been played
back. The system automatically detects and
changes setting when a device containing
only audio files or only video files is connected to the USB port and then it plays back
2
3
4
5
6
these files. However, the system does not
change setting if a device containing a mixture of audio and video files is connected to
the USB port, but instead the player continues to play back the previous file type.
Fast forward/reverse2
See page 269.
Scan2
See page 270.
Repeat folder5
See page 270.
Pause
When the volume is reduced entirely or MUTE
is pressed, the media player is paused. When
the volume is increased or MUTE is pressed
again, the media player starts. It is also possible to pause via the menu system6, press
OK/MENU, select Play/Pause.
Audio sources
Random2
See page 270.
USB memory
Search function2
The keypad on the control panel in the centre
console can be used to find a filename in the
current folder.
The search function is accessed either by
turning TUNE (to access the folder structure)
or by pressing one of the letter keys. As a letter or character in a search string is entered
you get closer to your search target.
To facilitate the use of a USB memory stick,
only store music files on it. It takes a lot
longer for the system to load storage media
that contains anything other than compatible
music files.
06
Start playback of a file by pressing OK/
MENU.
Only applies to USB and iPod®.
Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
If Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place.
Only applies to USB.
Does not apply to iPod®
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
273
06 Infotainment system
External audio source via AUX/USB* input
NOTE
The system supports mobile media compliant with USB 2.0 and the FAT32 file system and can handle 1000 folders with a
maximum of 254 subfolders/files in every
folder. The top level, which can handle up
to 1000 subfolders/files, is an exception to
this.
iPod®
An iPod® is charged and supplied with power
by the USB connection* via the player's connection cable.
NOTE
The system only supports the playback of
audio files from iPod®.
NOTE
NOTE
When using a longer model USB memory
stick the use of a USB adapter cable is
recommended. This is to avoid mechanical
wear to the USB input and the connected
USB memory stick.
USB hub
06
It is possible to connect a USB hub to the
USB connection and thereby connect multiple USB devices simultaneously. Selection of
USB device is made in USB mode under
USB menu Select USB device.
When an iPod® is used as audio source,
the car's infotainment system has a menu
structure that is similar to the iPod® player's own menu structure.
Compatible file formats via the USB
connection
Audio and video files in the following table are
supported by the system for playback via the
USB connection.
MP3 player
Many MP3 players have their own file systems that are not supported by the audio system. For use in the system, an MP3 player
must be set in USB Removable device/
Mass Storage Device mode.
274
A
Audio format
mp3, wma, aac, m4a
Video formatA
divx, avi, asf
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Infotainment system
Media Bluetooth®*
General
The car's media player is equipped with
Bluetooth®1 and can wirelessly play streaming audio files from external devices with
Bluetooth®, such as mobile phones and
PDAs. Navigation and control of the sound
can be carried out via the centre console buttons or via the steering wheel keypad*. In
some external devices it is also possible to
change tracks from the device.
To play back the audio the car's media player
must first be set in Bluetooth mode.
When a mobile phone is connected to the
car, it is also possible to remotely control a
selection of the mobile phone's functions, see
page 278. Switch between the main sources
TEL and MEDIA to operate each one's functions.
Overview
NOTE
The Bluetooth® media player must support
the Audio/Video Remote Control Profile
(AVRCP) and Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile (A2DP). The player should use
AVRCP version 1.3, A2DP 1.2. Otherwise
some functions may not work.
Not all mobile phones and external media
players available in the market are fully
compatible with the Bluetooth® function in
the car's media player. Volvo recommends
that you contact an authorised Volvo
dealer or visit www.volvocars.com for
information on compatible phones and
external media players.
NOTE
VOL – volume.
MEDIA button. Last active source (e.g.
iPod®) is activated automatically. If a
source is activated and you press MEDIA
then a shortcut menu is shown with commonly used menu options.
The car's media player can only play the
audio files via the Bluetooth® function.
Menus
The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the
centre console and the steering wheel keypad*. For general information on menu navigation, see page 253 and menu overview, see
page 256.
1
Centre console control panel.
06
Confirm your selection or go to the menu
by pressing OK/MENU.
Navigate in the menu by turning TUNE.
Applies to High Performance, High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
275
06 Infotainment system
Media Bluetooth®*
EXIT - leads up in the menu system,
stops the function in progress.
EXIT. Connect a new external device, see
"Change to another external device" below.
Short presses are used to scroll between
audio files. Long presses are used to
fast forward and rewind audio files.
Change to another external device
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the buttons in the steering
wheel, see page 251. For a description of
the remote control, see page 294.
Getting started
Connect an external
06
1. Press MEDIA, turn TUNE until Bluetooth
is displayed, press OK/MENU.
2. Check that the external device is searchable/visible via Bluetooth®, see the manual for the external device.
3. Press OK/MENU.
Bluetooth®
device
A maximum of ten external devices can be
registered. The connection is made in the
same way as for the phone, see Connect an
external Bluetooth® device, page 279.
Automatic connection
When the Bluetooth® function is active and
the last external device connected is in range
it is connected automatically. When the infotainment system searches for the last device
connected its name is shown in the TV
screen. To connect to another device, press
276
It is possible to change a connected device
with another device if there are several devices in the car. However, the device must first
have been paired, see "Connect an external
Bluetooth® device" above. To change to
another device:
4. Turn TUNE to Change device, and confirm with OK/MENU.
> After a while, the external device's
name is shown in the TV screen. If several external devices have been paired
then these are also shown.
5. Select the device to be connected by
turning TUNE and confirm with OK/
MENU.
> Connection of the external device
takes place.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Change audio file by pressing
/
on
the centre console or the steering wheel keypad*.
Disconnecting the device
Automatic disconnection takes place if the
external device moves out of the infotainment
system's range. For more information on connection, see page 276.
Remove the connected device
1. Press Bluetooth mode on OK/MENU.
2. Turn TUNE to Remove Bluetooth
device and confirm with OK/MENU.
3. Select the device to be removed by turning TUNE, and confirm with OK/MENU.
> A prompt asking whether or not you
want to remove the connection is
shown in the TV screen.
4. Press OK/MENU to confirm.
EXIT cancels.
06 Infotainment system
Media Bluetooth®*
Random2
This function plays back the audio files on the
external device in random order. Activate/
deactivate the random function in Bluetooth
mode under Bluetooth menu Random.
Change audio file by pressing
/
on
the centre console or the steering wheel keypad*.
Scanning of audio files in external
device2
This function play backs the first ten seconds
of each audio file. Activate/deactivate the
function in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth
menu Scan.
Cancel scanning with EXIT.
06
Version information Bluetooth®
The car's current Bluetooth® version can be
seen in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth
menu Bluetooth software version in car.
2
Not supported by all mobile phones.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
277
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth® handsfree*
General
A mobile phone equipped with Bluetooth®
can be connected wirelessly to the Infotainment system1. The infotainment system then
works handsfree, with the option to control a
range of the mobile phone's functions
remotely. The microphone used is located by
the driver's sun visor (2). The mobile phone
can be operated by its own keys irrespective
of whether or not it is connected.
gation, see page 253 and menu overview, see
page 256.
Phone functions, controls overview
Overview
NOTE
Only a selection of mobile phones are fully
compatible with the handsfree function.
Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo dealer or
visit www.volvocars.com for information
on compatible phones.
06
Centre console control panel.
Number and letter buttons
System overview
When a mobile phone is connected to the
car, it is also possible to stream audio files
from the phone, see page 275. Switch
between the main sources TEL and MEDIA
to operate each one's functions.
Mobile phone.
Microphone.
Steering wheel keypad.
Centre console control panel.
Menus
The menus in TEL are controlled from the
centre console and the steering wheel keypad*. For general information on menu navi-
1
278
Applies to High Performance, High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
TEL button activates/searches last connected phone. If a phone is already connected, and TEL is pressed, a shortcut
menu is shown with commonly used
menu options for the phone.
Accept incoming calls, confirm your
selection or go to the Phone menu by
pressing OK/MENU.
TUNE - Turn in normal view to the right to
access the phone book, and to the left for
the call register for all calls; also used for
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth® handsfree*
navigation among the options on the TV
screen.
EXIT - Cancels/rejects phone calls, deletes input characters, leads up in the menu
system and cancels the current function.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the buttons in the steering
wheel, see page 251. For a description of
the remote control, see page 294.
Remember
Activate
A short press on TEL activates/searches last
connected phone. If a phone is already connected, and TEL is pressed, a shortcut menu
is shown with commonly used menu options
for the phone. The
symbol indicates
that a phone is connected.
Connect an external Bluetooth® device
A maximum of ten external devices can be
registered. Registration is performed once
per device. After registration the device no
longer needs to be activated as visible/
searchable.
NOTE
If the phone's operating system is updated
then it is possible that the registration of
the phone is interrupted. In which case,
disconnect the phone, see page 281 and
then reconnect it, see page 279.
It is possible to have two Bluetooth® devices
connected simultaneously. One phone and
one media device, which it is possible to
switch between, see page 280 or see
page 276. It is also possible to use the phone
while streaming audio files from a connected
device.
Connecting an external device takes place in
different ways depending on whether or not
the device has been connected previously.
The connection options below presume that
this is the first time the device is being connected and that no other device is connected.
There are two possible ways of connecting
devices, either search for the external device
from the car, or search for the car from the
external device. If one option does not work
then try with the other.
Example of normal view for phone.
If you are not already in the normal view,
press TEL in the centre console.
Alternative 1 - search for the external device
via the car's menu system
1. Make the external device searchable/visible via Bluetooth®, see the external device's manual or www.volvocars.com.
06
2. Press OK/MENU and follow the instructions on the TV screen.
> The external device is now connected
to the car and can be controlled from
the car.
If connection failed, press EXIT twice and
connect the device as described under Alternative 2.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
279
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth® handsfree*
Alternative 2 - Search for the car with the
Bluetooth® function of the external device.
tem searches for the last phone connected its
name is shown in the TV screen.
1. Make the car searchable/visible via
Bluetooth®. Turn TUNE to Phone
settings, confirm with OK/MENU, select
Discoverable and confirm with OK/
MENU.
If you want to change the connected mobile
phone, go in phone mode to Phone menu
Change phone.
2. Select My Volvo Car on the screen of the
external device and follow the instructions.
3. Enter a PIN code in the external device
and then select to connect.
4. Press OK/MENU and enter the same PIN
code via the car keypad in the centre
console.
06
Once the external device is connected, its
Bluetooth® name appears on the car's TV
screen and the unit can be controlled from
the car.
Automatic connection
When the handsfree function is active and the
last mobile phone connected is in range it is
connected automatically. If the last connected mobile phone is not available then the
system will try to connect a mobile phone
that was paired earlier. When the audio sys-
2
280
Manual connection
Change to another external device
It is possible to change a connected device
with another device if there are several devices in the car. However, the device must first
have been registered to the car, see Connect
an external Bluetooth® device. To change to
another device:
1. Check that the external device is searchable/visible via Bluetooth®, see the manual for the external device.
2. Press TEL and then select Change
phone.
> The car searches for previously connected devices. The external devices
detected are specified with their
respective Bluetooth® name in the TV
screen.
3. Select the device to be connected by
turning TUNE and confirm with OK/
MENU.
Only Keyless Drive.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
> Connection of the external device
takes place.
To call
1. Make sure that the
symbol appears
at the top of the TV screen and that the
handsfree function is in phone mode.
2. Dial either the desired number or speed
dial number, see page 285. Or in normal
view turn TUNE to the right to access the
phone book, and to the left for the call
register for all calls. For information on
the phone book, see page 282.
3. Press OK/MENU.
The call is interrupted with EXIT.
Disconnecting the mobile phone
Automatic disconnection takes place if the
mobile phone moves out of the audio system's range. The connection to the mobile
phone can be manually broken in phone
mode under Phone menu Disconnect
phone. For more information on connection,
see page 279.
The handsfree function is deactivated when
the engine is switched off and the door is
opened2.
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth® handsfree*
When the mobile phone has been disconnected an ongoing call can be continued by
using the mobile phone's built-in microphone
and speaker.
NOTE
Even when your mobile phone has been
manually disconnected, some mobile
phones may automatically couple up to
the last handsfree unit connected, e.g.
when a new call begins.
Remove the device
A connected mobile phone can be deregistered and removed. This is performed in
phone mode under Phone menu Remove
Bluetooth device.
Making and receiving calls
Incoming call
–
Press OK/MENU to answer the call, even
if the audio system is in e.g. RADIO or
MEDIA mode.
Refuse or end with EXIT.
Automatic answer
The automatic answer function means that
calls are accepted automatically.
–
Activate/deactivate in phone mode under
Phone menu Call options Auto
answer.
NOTE
In call menu
Certain mobile phones show a list of the
last dialled numbers in reverse order.
Press OK/MENU during an ongoing call to
access the following functions:
• Mute - audio system microphone is
Voice mailbox
muted.
• Mobile phone - the call is transferred
from handsfree to the mobile phone. For
some mobile phones the connection is
interrupted. This is normal. The handsfree
function asks if you want to reconnect.
• Dial number - option to call a third party
using the number keys (current call set in
standby).
Call lists
The call lists are copied to the handsfree
function at each new connection and are then
updated during the connection. In normal
view, turn to the left with TUNE to see the call
register for All calls .
In phone mode it is possible to see all the call
lists under Phone menu All calls:
• All calls
• Missed calls
• Answered calls
• Dialled calls
• Call duration
In normal view a speed dial number for the
voice mailbox can be programmed in and
then accessed later via a long press on 1.
Voice mailbox number is changed in phone
mode under Phone menu Call options
Voicemail number Change number. If
there is no number stored then this menu can
be reached with one long press on 1.
Audio settings
06
Phone call volume
The phone call volume can only be changed
during a call. Use the steering wheel keypad*
or turn the VOL control.
Audio system volume
Providing there is no ongoing call taking
place, the audio system volume is controlled
as usual by turning VOL.
If an audio source is active during an incoming call then it can be muted automatically.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
281
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth® handsfree*
Activate/deactivate in phone mode under
Phone menu Phone settings Sounds
and volume Mute radio/media.
Ring volume
In phone mode go to Phone menu Phone
settings Sounds and volume Ring
volume and adjust by turning VOL. Press
OK/MENU to hear the audio volume. Press
EXIT to save.
Ring signals
signal.
There are two phone books. These are
merged into one in the car and are displayed
as a single phone book in the car.
•
The car downloads the mobile phone's
phone book and only displays this phone
book when the mobile phone from which
this phone book was downloaded is connected.
•
The car also has a built-in phone book.
This contains all the contacts stored in
the car irrespective of which phone was
connected when saving them. These contacts are visible for all users, regardless of
the mobile phone that is connected to the
car. If a contact is saved in the car then
the symbol
is shown in front of the
contact in the phone book.
NOTE
06
For some mobile phones, the ringtone on
the phone connected will not be switched
off when one of the inbuilt signals for the
handsfree system is used.
In order to select the connected phone's ring
signal3, go in phone mode to Phone menu
Phone settings Sounds and volume
3
282
Changes made from the car to a record in
the mobile phone's telephone book will
result in a new record in the car's telephone book, i.e. changes will not be saved
to the phone. From the car, this will now
look like you have double records, with different icons. Note also that when a shortcut number is saved or a change to a contact is made, this will result in a new
record in the car's phone book.
Phone book
Ring signals
The handsfree function has integrated ring
signals that can be selected in phone mode
under Phone menu Phone settings
Sounds and volume Ring signals Ring
signal 1 etc.
NOTE
Mobile phone ring
Not supported by all mobile phones.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
All use of the phone book requires that the
symbol appears at the top of the TV
screen and that the handsfree function is in
phone mode.
The audio system stores a copy of the phone
book from each paired mobile phone. The
phone book can be copied automatically to
the audio system during each connection.
–
Activate/deactivate the function in phone
mode under Phone menu Phone
settings Download phone book.
If the phone book contains a ringing caller's
contact information then this is shown in the
TV screen.
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth® handsfree*
Quick search for contacts
In normal view turn TUNE to the right to
obtain a list of contacts. Turn TUNE to select
and press OK/MENU to call.
Under the name of the contact is the phone
number that is selected by default. If the symbol > appears to the right of the contact then
there are several phone numbers stored for
the contact. Press OK/MENU to show the
numbers. Change and dial a number other
than that selected by default by turning
TUNE. Press OK/MENU to dial.
Search in the list of contacts by using the
centre console's keypad to key in the start of
the contact's name (see "Character table keypad in centre console" for button functions).
The list of contacts can also be accessed
from normal view by pressing and holding the
button on the centre console's keypad with
the letter that the contact searched for starts
with. For example, a long press on the button
for 6 gives instant access to that part of the
list where the contacts with the letter M are
located.
Character table keypad in centre
console
Key
Key
Function
Function
+0pw
Space . , - ? @ : ; / ( ) 1
#*
ABCÅÄÆÀÇ2
Searching for contacts
DEFÈΔ3
GHIÌ4
JKL5
MNOΚØÑÒ6
PQRSΤ7
TUVÜÙ8
Search contacts using the text wheel.
06
Character list
WXYZ9
Changing the input mode (see table
below)
Shift between upper and lower
case letter.
Phone book
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
283
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth® handsfree*
To search for or edit a contact, go in phone
mode to Phone menu Phone book
Search.
123/ABC
Change between letters and
numbers with OK/MENU.
More
Change to special characters
with OK/MENU.
NOTE
Leads to the phone book (3).
Turn TUNE to select a contact,
press OK/MENU to see the
saved numbers and other
information.
There is no text wheel for High Performance, so TUNE cannot be used there to
input characters: only the digit and letter
buttons on the control panel in the centre
console can be used for this.
1. Turn4 TUNE to the desired letter, press
OK/MENU to confirm. The number and
letter buttons on the control panel in the
centre console can also be used.
2. Continue with the next letter and so on.
The result of the search is shown in the
phone book (3).
06
3. To change the input mode to numbers or
special characters, or to go to the phone
book, turn TUNE to one of the options
(see explanation in the table below) in the
list for changing the input mode (2), press
OK/MENU.
4
284
New contact
A short press on EXIT deletes an input character. A long press on EXIT will clear all
entered characters.
By pressing a number key in the centre console when the text wheel is shown (see illustration above), a new character list (1)
appears in the TV screen. Continue repeatedly pressing the number key to the desired
letter and then release. Continue with the
next letter and so on. When a button is
depressed the entry is confirmed when
another button is depressed.
To enter a number, hold in the corresponding
number key.
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Entering letters for New contact.
Changing the input mode (see table
below)
Input field
New contacts can be added in phone mode
under Phone menu Phone book New
contact.
NOTE
There is no text wheel for High Performance, so TUNE cannot be used there to
input characters: only the digit and letter
buttons on the control panel in the centre
console can be used for this.
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth® handsfree*
1. When the Name row is selected, press
OK/MENU to reach the input mode (illustration above).
2. Turn4 TUNE to the desired letter, press
OK/MENU to confirm. The number and
letter buttons on the control panel in the
centre console can also be used.
3. Continue with the next letter and so on.
The name entered is shown in the input
field (2) in the TV screen.
When all details have been filled in, select
Save contact in the menu to save the contact.
123/ABC
Change between letters and
numbers with OK/MENU.
More
Change to special characters
with OK/MENU.
OK
Save and go back to Add
contact with OK/MENU.
4. To change the input mode to numbers,
special characters, change between
uppercase/lowercase letters, etc., turn
TUNE to one of the options (see explanation in the table below) in the list (1) and
then press OK/MENU.
When the name has been fully entered, select
OK in the list on the TV screen (1) and press
OK/MENU. Now continue with the telephone
number in the same way as above.
When the telephone number has been
entered, press OK/MENU and select a telephone number type (Mobile phone, Home,
Work or General). Press OK/MENU to confirm.
4
Change between uppercase
and lowercase letters with OK/
MENU.
Press OK/MENU, the cursor
moves to the input field (2) at
the top of the TV screen. The
cursor can now be moved,
with TUNE, to the appropriate
place to e.g. insert new letters
or delete with EXIT. To be able
to insert new letters first go
back to the input mode, by
pressing OK/MENU.
Speed dial numbers
Use phone mode to add speed dial numbers
under Phone menu Phone book
Speed dial.
Dialling with speed dial numbers can be performed in phone mode using the number
keys on the keypad in the centre console, by
pressing a number key and then pressing
OK/MENU. If there is no contact stored on
the speed dial number then an option is
shown to save a contact to the selected
speed dial number.
Receiving a vCard
It is possible to receive a vCard to the car's
phone book from other mobile phones (other
than the one currently connected to the car).
In order to allow this the car is set to visible
mode for Bluetooth®. The function is activated in phone mode under Phone menu
Phone book Receive vCard.
06
Memory status
Memory status of the car's phone book and
the connected mobile phone's phone book
can be seen in phone mode under Phone
menu Phone book Memory status.
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
285
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth® handsfree*
Delete phone book
The car's phone book can be deleted, this is
carried out in phone mode under Phone
menu Phone book Clear phone book.
NOTE
Deleting the car's telephone book only
deletes contacts in the car's telephone
book. Contacts in the mobile phone's
phone book are not deleted.
Version information Bluetooth®
The car's current Bluetooth® version can be
seen in phone mode under Phone menu
Phone settings Bluetooth software
version in car.
06
286
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Infotainment system
Voice recognition* mobile phone
General
The infotainment system's voice recognition1
allows the driver to voice-activate certain
functions in a Bluetooth®-connected mobile
phone or in Volvo's navigation system - RTI
(Road and Traffic Information System).
NOTE
•
•
The information in this section
describes the use of voice commands
to control a mobile phone connected
using Bluetooth®. For detailed information on using a mobile phone connected using Bluetooth® with the car's
Infotainment system see page 278.
The Volvo navigation system RTI
(Road and Traffic Information System)
has a separate user manual which
contains more information on voice
control and voice commands to control that system.
Language
WARNING
The driver always holds overall responsibility for driving the vehicle in a safe manner
and complying with all applicable rules of
the road.
The voice recognition system allows the
driver to voice-activate certain functions of a
Bluetooth®-connected mobile phone and in
Volvo's navigation system - RTI (Road and
Traffic Information System), while the driver
can keep his/her hands on the wheel at the
same time. The input data are in dialogue
form with spoken commands from the user
and verbal replies from the system. The voice
recognition system uses the same microphone as the Bluetooth® handsfree system
(see illustration on page 278) and the voice
recognition system's replies come via the
car's speakers.
Language list.
Voice recognition is not possible for all languages. Languages available for voice recognition are marked with an icon in the lan. Changing the language is perguage list formed in the menu system MY CAR, see
page 211.
06
Voice commands offer convenience and help
the driver to avoid being distracted, and
instead concentrate on driving and focus
attention on the road and traffic conditions.
1
Only applies to vehicles equipped with Volvo's navigation system - RTI (Road and Traffic Information System).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
287
06 Infotainment system
Voice recognition* mobile phone
Remember
Keep the following things in mind when you
use the voice recognition system:
•
For a command - speak after the tone,
with normal voice at normal speed.
•
Do not speak while the system is replying
(the system cannot understand commands during this time).
•
The car's doors and windows must be
closed.
•
Avoid background noise in the passenger
compartment.
NOTE
Steering wheel keypad.
Button for voice recognition
To activate the system
06
Before voice commands to a mobile phone
can be used the mobile phone must be
paired and connected via Bluetooth® handsfree. If a telephone command is given and no
mobile phone is paired, then the system will
provide information about this. For information on pairing and connecting a mobile
phone, see page 279.
•
288
Press the button for voice recognition (1)
in order to activate the system and initiate
a dialogue with voice commands. The
system will then display commonly used
commands in the screen in the centre
console.
If the driver is unsure of which command
to use, he (she) can say "Help" - the system then responds with a few different
commands which can be used in the current situation.
Help functions for voice recognition
•
Instructions: A function that helps you
get familiar with the system and the procedure for giving commands.
•
Voice training: A function that enables
the voice recognition system to learn to
know your voice and your accent. The
function provides an opportunity to voice
train two user profiles.
The help functions can be accessed by
pressing the MY CAR button on the control
panel in the centre console and then turning
TUNE to the desired menu option.
Instructions
The instructions can be started in two ways:
NOTE
This instruction and voice training can only
be started when the car is parked.
Voice commands can be disabled by:
•
•
•
•
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
saying "Cancel"
not speaking
•
a long press on the steering wheel button for Voice recognition
Press the button for Voice recognition
and say "Voice tutorial".
•
Activate the instructions in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Voice
settings Voice tutorial. For a description of the menu system, see page 209.
Press EXIT or another main source
button (e.g. MEDIA).
The instructions are divided into 3 lessons,
which take around 5 minutes in total to complete. The system starts with the first lesson.
06 Infotainment system
Voice recognition* mobile phone
To skip a lesson and go to the next one,
press the button for voice recognition and say
"Next". Go back to the previous lesson by
saying "Previous".
Using voice commands
Exit the instructions by means of a long press
on the button for voice recognition.
Once a dialogue has been started, commonly
used commands will be shown in the screen.
Greyed-out text or text within brackets is not
included in the spoken command.
Voice training
The system displays up to fifteen phrases for
you to say. Voice training can be started in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Voice settings Voice training. Choose
between User 1 or User 2. For a description
of the menu system, see page 209.
The driver initiates a dialogue with the voice
commands by pressing the button for voice
recognition (see illustration on page 288).
When the driver becomes accustomed to the
system, he/she can speed up the command
dialogue and skip the prompts from the system, by briefly pressing the button for voice
recognition.
commands. For a description of the menu
system, see page 209.
Dial a number
The system understands the numbers 0 (zero)
to 9 (nine). These numbers can be pronounced individually, in groups of several
numbers at a time, or the whole number all at
once. Numbers greater than 9 (nine) cannot
be handled by the system, e.g. 10 (ten) or 11
(eleven) are not possible.
The following is an example of a dialogue
with voice commands. The system's reply will
vary depending on the situation.
After voice training has been completed,
remember to set your user profile under
Voice user setting.
Commands can be given in several ways
The user starts the dialogue by saying:
The command "Phone call contact" can be
pronounced as e.g.:
Phone > call number
Additional settings in MY CAR
•
Phone call number
•
•
User setting - Two user profiles can be
set, the function is activated in the menu
system MY CAR under Settings Voice
settings Voice user setting. Choose
between User 1 or User 2. For a description of the menu system, see page 209.
Voice volume - Can be changed in the
menu system MY CAR under Settings
Voice settings Voice output
volume. For a description of the menu
system, see page 209.
or
"Phone > Call contact" - Say "Phone",
wait for the system's reply, and then continue by saying "Call contact."
or
•
System reply
06
Number?
User action
"Phone call contact" - Say the whole
command in one sequence.
Quick commands
Quick commands for the phone can be found
in the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Voice settings Voice command list
Phone commands and General
Start saying the numbers (as individual units,
i.e. six-eight-seven, etc.) in the phone number. If you say several numbers and pause,
the system will repeat them, and then say
"Continue".
Continue to say the numbers. When finished,
finish the command by saying "Call".
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
289
06 Infotainment system
Voice recognition* mobile phone
•
You can also change the number by saying the commands "Correct" (which deletes the last spoken group of numbers) or
"Delete" (which deletes the whole spoken
phone number).
Dialling from the call register
•
If there are several contacts with similar
names, they will be presented in the
screen in the numbered rows and the
system prompts you to select a row number.
•
If there are more rows in the list than can
be displayed simultaneously, saying
"Down" allows you to scroll down in the
list (and saying "Up" allows you to scroll
up in the list).
The following dialogue allows you to make a
phone call from one of your mobile phone's
call registers.
The user starts the dialogue by saying:
Phone > call from the call register
or
Phone call from the call register
Continue by responding to the system's
prompts.
Call a contact
06
The following dialogue allows you to call your
pre-defined contacts in the mobile phone.
The user starts the dialogue by saying:
Phone > call contact
or
Calling voice mailbox
The following dialogue allows you to call your
voice mailbox to check if you have received
any messages. The phone number for your
voice mailbox must be registered in the
Bluetooth® function, see page 281.
The user starts the dialogue by saying:
Phone > call voice mailbox
or
Phone call voice mailbox
Continue by responding to the system's
prompts.
Phone call contact
Continue by responding to the system's
prompts.
Consider the following when you call a contact:
290
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Infotainment system
TV*
General
NOTE
This system only supports TV broadcasts
in the countries that broadcast in MPEG-2
format or MPEG-4 format and follow the
DVB-T standard. The system does not
support analogue broadcasts.
NOTE
The TV picture is only shown when the car
is stationary. When the car is moving at a
speed over about 6 km/h the picture disappears, No visual media available
while driving appears on the display
screen, although the audio is heard during
this time. The picture reappears when the
car has stopped.
shortcut menu is shown with commonly
used menu options.
IMPORTANT
A TV licence is required for this product in
some countries.
Confirm your selection or go to the menu
by pressing OK/MENU.
Navigate in channel lists or menus by
turning TUNE.
Menus
The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the
centre console and the steering wheel keypad*. For general information on menu navigation, see page 253 and menu overview, see
page 256.
EXIT - leads up in the menu system,
stops the function in progress.
The next available channel is shown by
pressing
/
.
Overview
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the buttons in the steering
wheel, see page 251. For a description of
the remote control, see page 294.
NOTE
The reception is dependent both on how
good the signal strength and signal quality
are. The transmission may be disturbed by
various factors such as tall buildings or the
TV transmitter being far away. Coverage
level can also vary depending on where in
the country you are located.
06
Watch TV
–
Centre console control panel.
Station presets, numeric input.
MEDIA button. Last active source (e.g.
iPod® or TV) is activated. If a source is
activated and you press MEDIA then a
Press MEDIA, turn TUNE until TV is
shown in the display, press OK/MENU.
> A search starts and after a short while
the most recently used channel is
shown.
Changing channel
It is possible to change channel as follows:
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
291
06 Infotainment system
TV*
•
•
•
Turn TUNE, a list of all available channels
in the area is shown. If any of these channels is already saved as a preset then its
preset number is shown to the right of the
channel name. Continue turning TUNE to
reach the desired channel and press OK/
MENU.
By pressing the preset buttons (0-9).
Via a short press on the
/
buttons the next available channel in the area
is shown.
NOTE
06
If the car has been moved within the country, for example, from one city to another,
it is not certain that the presets are available at the new location as the frequency
range may have changed. In which case,
carry out a new search and save a new
preset list, see the function "Save the
available TV channels as presets", page
292.
NOTE
If no reception is available on the preset
buttons, it may be because the car is at a
location other than where the scan of TV
channels was run, for example, if the car
was driven from Germany to France. A
new selection of country and a new search
may then need to be carried out.
292
Searching TV channels/Preset list
Channel management
1. Press TV mode on OK/MENU.
The preset list can be edited. You can change
the order of the channels that are shown in
the preset list. A TV channel can have more
than one place in the preset list. The TV channel positions can also vary in the preset list.
2. Turn TUNE to TV menu and press OK/
MENU.
3. Turn TUNE to Select country and press
OK/MENU.
> If one or more countries have previously been selected then they are
shown in a list.
4. Turn TUNE to either Other countries or
one of the previously selected countries.
Press OK/MENU.
> A list of all available countries is
shown.
5. Turn TUNE to the desired country (e.g.
Sweden) and press OK/MENU.
> An automatic scan for available TV
channels starts, this scan takes a little
while. During this time the figure for
each channel found and added as a
preset is shown. When the scan is
complete a message is shown and the
picture is shown. A preset list (max. 30
presets) has now been created and is
available. To change channel, see
page 291.
The scan and preset storage can be cancelled with EXIT.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
To change the order in the preset list, go in
TV mode to TV menu Reorganise
presets.
1. Turn TUNE to the channel you want to
move in the list and confirm with OK/
MENU.
> The selected channel is highlighted.
2. Turn TUNE to the new location in the list
and confirm with OK/MENU.
> The channels change places with each
other.
After the preset channels (max. 30) come all
the other channels available in the area. It is
possible to move a channel up to a place in
the preset list.
Save the available TV channels as
presets
If the car has been moved within the country,
for example, from one city to another, it is not
certain that the presets are available at the
new location as the frequency range may
06 Infotainment system
TV*
have changed. In which case, carry out
another scan and save a new preset list.
Teletext
To return to the TV picture, wait several seconds or press EXIT.
1. Press TV mode on OK/MENU.
It is possible to read Teletext. Follow these
steps:
2. Turn TUNE to TV menu and press OK/
MENU.
1. Press the
control.
3. Turn TUNE to Autostore and press OK/
MENU.
> An automatic scan for available TV
channels starts, this scan takes a little
while. During this time the figure for
each channel found and added as a
preset is shown. When the scan is
complete a message is shown and the
picture is shown. A preset list (max. 30
presets) has now been created and is
available. To change channel, see
page 291.
2. Enter the page number (3 digits) with the
number keys (0-9) to select page.
> The page is shown automatically.
Scanning the TV channels
This function automatically scans through the
frequency range for all channels available in
the area where you are. When a channel is
found, it is shown for approx. 10 seconds
before scanning is resumed. Scanning is
stopped with EXIT, then the channel that you
just watched continues to be shown. Scanning does not affect the preset list.
Activate scanning in TV mode under TV
menu Scan.
Picture settings
button on the remote
Enter new page number, or press the remote
control buttons
/
to go to the next
page.
Return to TV screen with EXIT or by pressing
the
button on the remote control.
It is also possible to control the teletext with
the coloured buttons on the remote control.
Information about the current
programme
Press the INFO button in order to display the
information about the current programme, the
next programme and its start time. If the
INFO button is pressed once more then additional information on the current programme
can sometimes be displayed, such as start
and end times and a brief description of the
current programme. For more information on
the INFO button, see page 251.
The settings for brightness and contrast can
be adjusted. For more information, see
page 271.
The reception is lost
If the reception for the TV channel that is
being shown disappears then the picture will
freeze. Shortly after this a message appears
informing that the reception has been lost for
the current TV channel, and a new search for
the channel continues. When the reception
returns the display of the TV channel starts
immediately. It is possible to change channel
at any time when the message is shown.
If the message Reception lost, searching is
shown then this is because the system has
detected that there is no reception for all TV
channels. One possible reason may be that a
border has been crossed and that the system
is set to the wrong country. In which case,
change to the right country in accordance
with "Searching TV channels/Preset list", see
page 292.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06
293
06 Infotainment system
Remote control*
General
The remote control can be used for all functions in the infotainment system. The remote
control's buttons have the same functions as
the buttons in the centre console or steering
wheel keypad*.
When using the remote control, first press the
to position F.
remote control's button
Then aim the remote control at the IR
receiver, which is located to the right of the
INFO button (see page 251) in the centre
console.
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile
phones, cameras, remote controls for
accessories, etc. in the glove compartment
or other compartments. Otherwise they
may injure people in the car in the event of
sudden braking or a collision.
06
NOTE
Do not expose the remote control to direct
sunlight (e.g. on the instrument panel) otherwise problems may arise with the
batteries.
Functions
Key
Function
F = Front TV screen
Change to navigation*
Change to radio source (AM,
FM1 etc.)
Change to media source (Disc,
TV* etc.)
Change to Bluetooth® handsfree*
Scroll/fast rewind, change track/
song
Play/pause
Stop
Scroll/fast forward, change
track/song
Menu
To previous, cancels function,
deletes input characters
Corresponds to TUNE in the centre console.
294
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Infotainment system
Remote control*
Key
Function
Function
Navigate up/down
Subtitles, selection of language
for text
Navigate right/left
Teletext*, On/Off
Confirm selection or go to the
menu system for the selected
source
Volume, decrease
Volume, increase
0-9
Key
Preset channels, number and
letter input
Shortcuts for favourite setting
Information about the current
programme, song, etc. Also
used when there is more information available than can be
shown in the TV screen
Replacing the battery in the remote
control
NOTE
Battery life is normally 1-4 years and
depends on how much the remote control
is used.
1. Push down the catch on the battery cover
and slide the battery cover in the direction of the infrared lens.
The remote control is powered by four batteries of the AA/LR6 type.
2. Remove the used batteries, turn the new
batteries in accordance with the symbols
in the battery compartment and fit them.
Take along extra batteries for a long journey.
3. Refit the cover.
06
NOTE
Be sure to dispose of the exhausted batteries in an environmentally safe manner.
Selection of language for soundtrack
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
295
Recommendations during driving.........................................................
Refuelling..............................................................................................
Fuel.......................................................................................................
Loading.................................................................................................
Cargo area............................................................................................
Driving with a trailer..............................................................................
Towing and recovery.............................................................................
296
298
301
303
306
309
311
317
DURING YOUR JOURNEY
07 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
General
Economical driving
Driving economically means driving smoothly
while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving style and speed to the prevailing conditions.
•
•
•
Avoid driving with open windows.
Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration
and heavy braking.
•
Remove unnecessary items from the car the greater the load the higher the fuel
consumption.
•
Use engine braking to slow down, when it
can take place without risk to other road
users.
•
A roof load and ski box increase air resistance, leading to higher fuel consumption
- remove the load carriers when not in
use.
•
Do not run the engine to operating temperature at idling speed, but rather drive
with a light load as soon as possible - a
cold engine consumes more fuel than a
warm one.
07
298
Drive in the highest gear possible, adapted to the current traffic situation and
road - lower engine speeds result in lower
fuel consumption.
•
Cars with manual transmission are
started in 2nd gear under normal conditions on flat ground.
For more information and further advice, see
the pages 11 and 390.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while moving,
such as downhill, this deactivates important systems such as the power steering
and brake servo.
Driving in water
The car can be driven through water at a
maximum depth of 30 cm at a maximum
speed of 10 km/h. Extra caution should be
exercised when passing through flowing
water.
During driving in water, maintain a low speed
and do not stop the car. When the water has
been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly
and check that full brake function is achieved.
Water and mud for example can make the
brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake
function.
•
Clean the electric contacts of the electric
engine block heater and trailer coupling
after driving in water and mud.
•
Do not let the car stand with water over
the sills for any long period of time - this
could cause electrical malfunctions.
IMPORTANT
Engine damage can occur if water enters
the air filter.
In depths greater than 30 cm, water could
enter the transmission. This reduces the
lubricating ability of the oils and shortens
the service life of these systems.
In the event of the engine stalling in water,
do not try restart - tow the car from the
water to a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. Risk of engine
breakdown.
Engine, gearbox and cooling system
Under special conditions, for example hard
driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is
a risk that the engine and drive system may
overheat - in particular with a heavy load.
For information about overheating when driving with a trailer, see page 312.
07 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
•
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front
of the grille when driving in hot climates.
•
If the temperature in the engine's cooling
system is too high then a warning symbol
is illuminated and a text message High
engine temp Stop safely is shown in the
combined instrument panel's information
display - stop the car in a safe way and
allow the engine to run at idling speed for
several minutes in order to cool down.
•
If the text message High engine temp
Stop engine or Coolant level low, Stop
engine is shown then the engine must be
switched off after stopping the car.
•
In the event of overheating in the gearbox
a built-in protection function is activated,
which is indicated by the combined
instrument panel with a warning symbol
and the text message Transmission hot
Reduce speed or Transmission hot
Stop safely - follow the recommendation
given and lower the speed and stop the
car in a safe way and allow the engine to
run at idling speed for a few minutes in
order to allow the gearbox to cool down.
•
If the car overheats, the air conditioning
may be switched off temporarily.
•
Do not turn the engine off immediately
you stop after a hard drive.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
operate for a time after the engine has
been switched off.
Open tailgate
WARNING
If the starter battery's voltage is low then the
information display in the combined instrument panel shows the text Low battery
Power save mode. The energy-saving function then shuts down certain functions or
reduces certain functions such as the ventilation fan and/or audio system.
–
Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic
exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car
through the cargo area.
Do not overload the battery
The electrical functions in the car load the
battery to varying degrees. Avoid using the
key position II when the engine is switched
off. Instead use the I mode - which uses less
power.
Also, be aware of different accessories that
load the electrical system. Do not use functions which use a lot of power when the
engine is switched off. Examples of such
functions are:
•
•
•
•
In which case, charge the battery by starting the engine and then running it for at
least 15 minutes - battery charging is
more effective during driving than running
the engine at idling speed while stationary.
Before a long journey
•
Check that the engine is working normally
and that fuel consumption is normal.
•
Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil
or other fluid).
•
•
Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths.
Carrying a warning triangle is a legal
requirement in certain countries.
Winter driving
ventilation fan
Check the following in particular before the
cold season:
headlamps
•
windscreen wiper
audio system (high volume).
07
The engine coolant must contain at least
50% glycol. This mixture protects the
engine against frost erosion down to
approximately –35 °C. To achieve opti-
299
07 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
mum antifreeze protection, different types
of glycol must not be mixed.
•
The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent condensation.
•
Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting in cold weather and also reduce fuel
consumption while the engine is cold. For
more information on suitable oils, see
page 385.
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard
driving or in hot weather.
07
•
The condition of the battery and charge
level must be inspected. Cold weather
places great demands on the battery and
its capacity is reduced by the cold.
•
Use washer fluid to avoid ice forming in
the washer fluid reservoir.
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recommends using winter tyres on all wheels if
there is a risk of snow or ice.
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement in certain countries. Studded tyres
are not permitted in all countries.
300
Slippery driving conditions
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under
controlled conditions to learn how the car
reacts.
07 During your journey
Refuelling
Refuelling
Opening the fuel filler flap manually
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
Open the fuel filler flap by slightly pressing in the rear part of the hatch.
Take out the flap.
Close the flap after fuelling.
To lock/unlock the fuel filler flap, see page 59.
The fuel filler flap's lock logic also follows
keyless-drive and central locking's locking
and unlocking respectively.
The fuel filler flap can be opened manually
when it cannot be opened from outside.
•
Insert the pump nozzle in the fuel filler
opening. Take care to insert the nozzle
properly into the filler pipe. The filler pipe
consists of two opening covers. The nozzle must be pushed past both covers
before refuelling is started.
•
Do not overfill the tank but fill until the
pump nozzle cuts out.
Open/remove the side hatch in the cargo
area (same side as fuel filler flap).
Carefully pull the line back in a straight
line. The flap can now be opened from
outside.
IMPORTANT
Pull the wire gently - minimal force is
required to disengage the hatch lock.
Filling up with fuel
The fuel tank is fitted with a coverless fuel
filler system.
NOTE
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
weather.
07
NOTE
Avoid spillage by waiting approx.
5-8 seconds after refuelling before carefully removing the nozzle.
301
07 During your journey
Refuelling
Filling with a fuel can
When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel
located under the floor hatch in the cargo
area. Take care to insert the funnel properly
into the filler pipe. The filler pipe consists of
two opening covers. The funnel must be
pushed past both covers before filling is
started.
07
302
07 During your journey
Fuel
General information on fuel
Fuel of a lower quality than that recommended by Volvo must not be used as engine
power and fuel consumption is negatively
affected.
IMPORTANT
Mixtures of various fuel types or use of
fuels which are not recommended will
invalidate Volvo's guarantees and any supplementary service agreements; this is
applicable to all engines.
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and fuel
splashing in the eyes.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty
of water for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol
and diesel are highly toxic and could
cause permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical attention immediately
if fuel has been swallowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be
ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before
starting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone
when refuelling. The ring signal could
cause spark build-up and ignite petrol
fumes, leading to fire and injury.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel grade are factors that
could affect the car's performance.
Catalytic converters
The purpose of the catalytic converters is to
purify exhaust gases. They are located close
to the engine so that operating temperature is
reached quickly.
The catalytic converters consist of a monolith
(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel
walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/
rhodium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate a
chemical reaction without being used up
themselves.
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content of the exhaust gases leaving the engine.
This value is fed into an electronic system
that continuously controls the injectors. The
ratio of fuel to air directed to the engine is
continuously adjusted. These adjustments
create optimal conditions for efficient combustion, and together with the three-way catalytic converter reduce harmful emissions
(hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide and nitrous
oxides).
Petrol
Petrol must fulfil the EN 228 standard. Most
engines can be run with octane ratings of 95
and 98 RON. Only in exceptional cases
should 91 RON be used.
•
•
95 RON can be used for normal driving.
98 RON is recommended for optimum
performance and minimum fuel consumption.
When driving in temperatures above +38 °C,
fuel with the highest possible octane rating is
recommended for optimum performance and
fuel economy.
07
Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system
intended to reduce emissions and improve
fuel economy.
303
07 During your journey
Fuel
IMPORTANT
•
•
Use only unleaded petrol to avoid
damaging the catalytic converter.
Do not use any additives which have
not been recommended by Volvo.
Diesel
Only use diesel fuel from well-known producers. Never use diesel of dubious quality. Diesel should fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204
standards. Diesel engines are sensitive to
contaminants in the fuel, such as excessively
high volumes of sulphur particles for example.
07
At low temperatures (-6 °C to -40 °C), a paraffin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel,
which may lead to ignition problems. Special
diesel fuel designed for low temperatures
around freezing point is available from the
major oil companies. This fuel is less viscous
at low temperatures and reduces the risk of
paraffin precipitate.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When
refuelling, check that the area around the fuel
filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the
1
304
paintwork. Wash off any spillage with detergent and water.
IMPORTANT
Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European
diesel standard.
The sulphur content must be a maximum
of 50 ppm.
IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels that must not be used:
•
•
•
•
workshop in order to restart the engine after
fuelling.
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel
starvation, the fuel system needs a few
moments to carry out a check. Do this before
starting the engine, once the fuel tank has
been filled with diesel:
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and push it in to the end position (see page 81).
2. Press the START button without
depressing the brake and/or clutch pedal.
Special additives
3. Wait approx. 1 minute.
Marine diesel fuel
4. To start the engine: Depress the brake
and/or clutch pedal and then press the
START button again.
Heating oil
FAME1 (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) and
vegetable oil.
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in
accordance with Volvo recommendations
and generate increased wear and engine
damage that is not covered by the Volvo
warranty.
Empty tank
The design of the fuel system in a diesel
engine means that if the vehicle runs out of
fuel, the tank may need to be vented in the
Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of FAME, but further amounts must not be added.
NOTE
Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel
shortage:
•
Stop the car on as flat/level ground as
possible - if the car is tilting there is a
risk of air pockets in the fuel supply.
07 During your journey
Fuel
Draining condensation from the fuel
filter
The fuel filter separates condensation from
the fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine
operation.
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet
or if you suspect that the car has been filled
with contaminated fuel.
IMPORTANT
Certain special additives remove the water
separation in the fuel filter.
Diesel particle filter (DPF)
Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter,
which results in more efficient emission control. The particles in the exhaust gases are
collected in the filter during normal driving.
So-called "regeneration" is started in order to
burn away the particles and empty the filter.
This requires the engine to have reached normal operating temperature.
Filter regeneration takes place automatically
and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may
take a little longer at a low average speed.
Fuel consumption may increase slightly during regeneration.
Regeneration in cold weather
If the car is frequently driven short distances
in cold weather then the engine does not
reach normal operating temperature. This
means that regeneration of the diesel particle
filter does not take place and the filter is not
emptied.
When the filter has become approximately
80% full of particles, a yellow warning triangle
is shown in the combined instrument panel,
and the message Soot filter full See manual
is shown in the information display.
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the
car until the engine reaches normal operating
temperature, preferably on a main road or
motorway. The car should then be driven for
approximately 20 minutes more.
The following may arise during regeneration:
a smaller reduction of engine power
may be noticed temporarily
•
fuel consumption may increase temporarily
•
a smell of burning may arise.
IMPORTANT
If the filter is completely filled with particles, it may be difficult to start the engine
and the filter is non-functional. Then there
is a risk that the filter will need to be
replaced.
Fuel consumption and emissions of
carbon dioxide
Fuel consumption figures may change if the
car is equipped with extra equipment that
affects the car's weight. See information on
weights page 381 and table page 390.
The manner in which the car is driven, and
other non-technical factors can also affect
fuel consumption.
NOTE
•
Use the parking heater* in cold weather so
that the engine reaches normal operating
temperature more quickly.
Consumption is higher and power output
lower for fuel with an octane rating of
91 RON.
07
NOTE
When regeneration is complete the warning
text is cleared automatically.
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel grade are factors that
could affect the car's performance.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
305
07 During your journey
Loading
General information on loading
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight.
The total of the weight of the passengers and
all accessories reduces the car's payload by
a corresponding weight. For more detailed
information on weights, see page 381.
The tailgate is opened via a button
on the lighting panel or the remote
control key, see page 58.
WARNING
The car’s driving properties change
depending on the weight and positioning
of the load.
To bear in mind when loading
•
07
306
Position the load firmly against the rear
seat's backrest.
Note that objects must not prevent the function of the WHIPS system for the front seats if
any of the rear seat's backrests is folded
down,see page 26.
•
•
Centre the load.
•
Cover sharp edges with something soft to
avoid damaging the upholstery.
Heavy objects should be placed as low
as possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on
lowered backrests.
•
Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets with straps or web lashings.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a
frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h,
carry the impact of an item weighing
1000 kg.
WARNING
The protection provided by the inflatable
curtain in the headlining may be compromised or eliminated by high loads.
•
Never load cargo above the backrest.
Front seat
The passenger seat backrest can also be
folded for an extra long load, see page 83.
Roof load
Using load carriers
To avoid damaging the car and for maximum
possible safety while driving, the load carriers
designed by Volvo are recommended.
Carefully follow the installation instructions
supplied with the carriers.
•
Load carriers must always be mounted
on the aluminium rail.
•
Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured. Lash the
load securely with retaining straps.
•
Distribute the load evenly over the load
carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the
bottom.
•
The size of the area exposed to the wind,
and therefore fuel consumption, increase
with the size of the load.
•
Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,
heavy braking and hard cornering.
WARNING
Always secure the load. Always secure the
load. During heavy braking the load may
otherwise shift, causing personal injury to
the car's occupants.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
something soft.
Switch off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading/unloading long
items. Otherwise you may accidentally
knock the gear lever or gear selector with
the load into a drive position - and the car
could then move off.
07 During your journey
Loading
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving characteristics are altered by roof loads. For
information about the maximum allowable
load on the roof, including load carriers
and any space box, see page 381.
Lowering the rear seat backrest
To simplify loading in the cargo area, the rear
seat backrest can be folded down, see
page 86.
Load retaining eyelets
The load retaining eyelets are used to fasten
straps in order to anchor items in the cargo
area.
Folding bag holder*
WARNING
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which
protrude may cause injury under violent
braking.
Always secure large and heavy objects
with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
Bag holder
The bag holders keep carrier bags in place
and prevent them from overturning and
spreading their contents around the cargo
area. The holder has a capacity of max. 3 kg.
Folding bag holder
A folding bag holder in the floor can be
opened up in three positions. It can be set to
two adjustment positions and one service
position, as it is known, where it is fully unfolded. There are also two floor combination
variants, one with adjustment positions in a
tub under the floor and one with adjustment
positions in plastic rails. The raising below
shows the adjustment position in a tub under
the floor.
Bag holder
07
The load on the central holder is max. 3 kg,
and max. 10 kg on the outer holder.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
307
07 During your journey
Loading
12 V socket*
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo. For information on the
use of Volvo's recommended temporary
emergency puncture repair (TMK), see
page 332.
Lift the handle* on the upper floor and
fold up the floor.
Move the floor forwards to an appropriate
position and place it in the adjustment
groove.
3. In service position, the floor is moved all
the way forwards towards the rear seat
back and placed in the plastic support in
the centre.
Lower the cover to access the electrical
socket.
•
The socket also provides voltage when
the remote control key is not in the ignition switch.
IMPORTANT
Max. socket current is 10 A (120 W).
07
NOTE
Remember that using the electrical socket
with the engine switched off involves the
risk of discharging the car's battery.
308
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 During your journey
Cargo area
Cargo net*
Attaching
NOTE
The easiest way to fit the safety net is via
one of the rear doors.
WARNING
It is necessary to ensure that the upper
securing points of the safety net are fitted
correctly and that the puller-straps are
secured properly. Damaged nets must not
be used.
The cargo net is fitted into four mounting points.
A cargo net prevents cargo from being
thrown forward in the passenger compartment in the event of heavy braking. For safety
reasons, the cargo net must always be correctly fastened and secured. The mesh is
made of a strong nylon fabric and secured
behind the front seat backrests.
WARNING
Loads in the luggage compartment must
be anchored well, and also have a correctly fitted safety net.
1. Unfold the cargo net and make sure that
the split upper rod is locked in the
extended position.
2. Hook one end of the rod into the roof
mounting with the anchoring strap locks
turned towards you.
3. Hook the other end of the rod into the
roof mounting on the opposite side - the
telescopic spring-loaded retaining hooks
facilitate alignment. Take care to press
forward the rod's retaining hooks for each
respective roof mounting's front end position.
4. Hook the cargo net's anchoring straps
into the eyes on the rear of the seat slide
rails - it is easier if the backrests are
straightened and the seats are moved
forward slightly.
Pay attention to make sure that you do
not press the seat/backrest hard against
the net when the seat/backrest is moved
back again - only adjust until the seat/
backrest makes contact with the net.
IMPORTANT
07
If a seat/backrest is pushed backwards
hard into the safety net then the net and/or
its roof mounts may be damaged.
5. Tension the cargo net with the anchoring
straps.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
309
07 During your journey
Cargo area
Removal and storage
4. Break the rod in the centre, fold it
together and roll up the net.
Parcel shelf
Insert the net in the storage bag.
The folded cargo net is stored in its bag in the
cargo area.
The cargo net can be easily removed and folded
up.
Release the tension in the net by pressing
in the button on the anchoring strap's
lock and feeding out part of the strap.
Press in the catch and detach both of the
anchoring strap's hooks.
07
Unhook the rod from its roof mounting by
pulling back on the rod in the roof mountings' rear end position. Press the rod in
any direction so that the hook engages in
the rod, which at the same time releases
the hook on the other side.
Finally, remove the remaining roof mounting hook from the roof mounting.
310
The parcel shelf can be removed to provide
additional cargo space.
Parcel shelf removal
Undo the parcel shelf lifting eyes on both
sides.
Unhook the front edge of the parcel shelf
and remove it.
07 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
General
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight.
The total of the weight of the passengers and
all accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's
payload by a corresponding weight. For more
detailed information on weights, see
page 381.
If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo,
then the car is delivered with the necessary
equipment for driving with a trailer.
•
The car's towing bracket must be of an
approved type.
•
If the towbar is retrofitted, check with
your Volvo dealer that the car is fully
equipped for driving with a trailer.
•
Distribute the load on the trailer so that
the weight on the towing bracket complies with the specified maximum towball
load.
•
Increase the tyre pressure to the recommended pressure for a full load. For tyre
pressure label location, see page 330.
•
The engine is loaded more heavily than
usual when driving with a trailer.
•
Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Wait until it has been driven
at least 1000 km.
•
The brakes are loaded much more than
usual on long and steep downhill slopes.
Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your
speed.
•
For safety reasons, the maximum permitted speed for the car when coupled with
a trailer should not be exceeded. Follow
the regulations in force for the permitted
speeds and weights.
•
Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep ascents.
•
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
more than 12%.
Trailer cable
An adapter is required if the car's towing
bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer
has 7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable
approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does
not drag on the ground.
Direction indicators and brake lights on
the trailer
If any of the trailer's lamps for direction indicators are broken, then the symbol for direction indicators in the combined instrument
panel flashes faster than normal and the
information display shows the text Bulb fail Ind. signal trailer.
Level control*
The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant
height irrespective of the car's load (up to the
maximum permissible weight). When the car
is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly,
which is normal.
Trailer weights
For information on Volvo's permitted trailer
weights, see page 382.
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer
weights are those permitted by Volvo. The
maximum permitted speed for a car with a
trailer attached is 100 km/h. National vehicle regulations may further restrict the
trailer weight and speed. Towbars can be
certified for higher towing weights than the
car can actually tow.
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for
trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and
trailer may be difficult to control in the
event of sudden movement and braking.
07
If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake light
are broken then the Bulb fail - Stop lamp
trailer text is shown.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
311
07 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
Manual gearbox
Overheating
Steep inclines
•
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a
hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.
•
Do not run the engine at higher revolutions than 4500 rpm
(diesel engines: 3500 rpm) - otherwise the
oil temperature may become too high.
IMPORTANT
See also the specific information on slow
driving with trailer for cars with the
Powershift automatic transmission on
page 122.
Diesel engine 5-cyl
•
In the event of a risk of overheating the
optimal speed for the engine is
2300-3000 rpm for optimal circulation of
the coolant.
Automatic gearbox
Overheating
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a
hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.
07
•
•
312
An automatic gearbox selects the optimum gear related to load and engine
speed.
In the event of overheating a warning
symbol is illuminated in the combined
instrument panel and a text message is
shown in the information display - follow
the recommendation given.
Do not lock the automatic transmission in
a higher gear than the engine "can cope
with" - it is not always a good idea to
drive at a high gear with low engine revolutions.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Release the foot brake and start driving
off.
Towing bracket
If the car is equipped with a removable towbar, the installation instructions for the loose
section must be followed carefully, see
page 314.
WARNING
Parking on a hill
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable
towbar:
1. Depress the foot brake.
•
Follow the installation instructions
carefully.
•
The detachable section must be
locked with the key before setting off.
•
Check that the indicator window
shows green.
2. Activate the parking brake.
3. Move the gear selector to position P.
4. Release the foot brake.
•
•
Move the gear selector to park position P
when parking an automatic car with a
hitched trailer. Always use the parking
brake.
Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car with hitched trailer on a hill.
Starting on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Move the gear selector to driving position D.
Important checks
•
The towbar's towball must be cleaned
and greased regularly.
WARNING
The moving parts of the detachable towbar
must not be lubricated/oiled. This may
reduce safety.
07 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
NOTE
Specifications
When a hitch with a vibration damper is
used, the towball must not be lubricated.
G021485
Storing the detachable towbar
Dimensions, mounting points (mm)
The storage location for the removable towbar.
IMPORTANT
Always remove the detachable towbar
after use and store it in the designated
location in the car.
A
887
B
73
C
881
D
441
E
109
F
306
G
Side member
H
Ball centre
07
313
07 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
The indicator window must show red.
G021490
G021488
Fitting of removable towbar
The indicator window must show green.
G021487
07
314
Ensure that the mechanism is in the
unlocked position by turning the key
clockwise.
Insert the towball section until you hear a
click.
G000000
G021489
Remove the protective cover by first
pressing in the catch
and then pulling
the cover straight back
.
Turn the key anticlockwise to locked
position. Remove the key from the lock.
07 During your journey
Check that the towball section is secure
by pulling it up, down and back.
WARNING
If the towball is not fitted correctly then it
must be detached and reattached in
accordance with the previous instructions.
IMPORTANT
G021495
G021494
Driving with a trailer
Safety cable.
Push in the locking wheel
and turn it
anticlockwise
until you hear a click.
WARNING
Take care to secure the trailer's safety
cable in the intended bracket.
Removal of removable towbar
Only grease in the ball for the towball
hitch, the remainder of the towbar must be
clean and dry.
Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it
comes to a stop. Hold it in this position
while pulling the towball rearward and
upward.
07
WARNING
Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the
unlocked position.
Secure the detachable towbar safely if it is
stored in the car, see page 313.
315
07 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
•
Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and
powerful side wind.
•
Car with trailer drives on an uneven road
surface or in a pothole.
•
Sweeping steering wheel movements.
Operation
Push the protective cover until it snaps
tight.
Trailer Stability Assist - TSA*
The TSA system (Trailer Stability Assist)
serves to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it begins to snake.
The TSA function is part of the DSTC system
(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control), see
page 142.
Function
07
The snaking phenomenon can occur with any
car/trailer combination. Snaking normally
occurs at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it
occurring at lower speeds (70-90 km/h) if the
trailer is overloaded or the load is improperly
distributed, e.g. too far back.
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or
even impossible to suppress. This makes the
car/trailer combination difficult to control and
there is a risk that you could, for example,
end up in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway.
TSA system continually monitors car movements, particularly lateral movements. If
snaking is detected, the front wheels are individually braked. This serves to stabilise the
car/trailer combination. This is often enough
to help the driver regain control of the car.
If snaking is not eliminated the first time the
TSA system comes into action, the car/trailer
combination is braked with all wheels and
engine power is reduced. Once snaking has
been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer
combination is once again stable, the TSA
system stops regulating and the driver once
again has full control of the car.
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a
triggering factor, e.g.:
316
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Miscellaneous
The TSA system can engage within the speed
interval 65 to 160 km/h.
NOTE
TSA function is switched off if the driver
selects Sport mode, see page 142.
TSA may fail to engage if the driver uses
severe steering wheel movements to try to
rectify the snaking because in such a situation the TSA system cannot determine
whether it is the trailer or the driver that is
causing the snaking.
The DSTC symbol in the combined
instrument panel flashes when the
TSA system is working.
07 During your journey
Towing and recovery
Towing
WARNING
Find out the statutory maximum speed limit
for towing before towing begins.
1. Unlock the steering lock by inserting the
remote control key in the ignition switch
and giving a long press on the START/
STOP ENGINE button - key position II is
activated, see page 81 for more information on key positions.
2. The remote control key must remain in
the ignition switch while the car is being
towed.
3. Keep the towline taut when the towing
vehicle reduces speed by holding your
foot gently pressed on the brake pedal thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking.
The brake servo and power steering do not
work when the engine is switched off - the
brake pedal needs to be depressed
about 5 times more heavily and the steering is considerably heavier than normal.
Manual gearbox
Prior to towing:
–
Automatic gearbox Geartronic
IMPORTANT
•
WARNING
Check that the steering lock is
unlocked before towing.
•
The remote control key must be in key
position II - in position I all airbags are
deactivated.
•
Never remove the remote control key
from the ignition switch when the car
is being towed.
The model with Powershift transmission
should not be towed as it is dependent on the
engine running in order to receive sufficient
lubrication. If towing still has to take place,
the route must be as short as possible and
then with very low speed.
In the event of uncertainty as to whether or
not the car is equipped with Powershift transmission, this can be verified by checking the
designation on the transmission's label under
the bonnet - see page 378. The designation ”MPS6” means that it is Powershift –
transmission otherwise it is Geartronic automatic transmission.
Note that the car must always be towed
with the wheels rolling forward.
4. Be prepared to brake to stop.
•
Move gear lever into neutral and release
the parking brake.
Automatic gearbox Powershift
Do not tow cars with automatic transmission at speeds higher than 80 km/h
or for distances in excess of 80 km.
Follow the speeds that are permitted
in accordance with local traffic regulations.
07
Prior to towing:
–
Move the gear selector to position N and
release the parking brake.
317
07 During your journey
Towing and recovery
IMPORTANT
Avoid towing.
•
•
However, the car can be towed for a
short distance at low speed to move it
from a dangerous position - not further
than 10 km and not faster than
10 km/h. Note that the car must
always be towed with the wheels rolling forward.
In the event of moving a longer distance than 10 km, the car must be
transported with the drive wheels
raised from the road - professional
recovery is recommended.
Prior to towing:
–
Move the gear selector to position N and
release the parking brake.
Jump starting
07
Do not tow the car to bump start the engine.
Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged and the engine does not start, see
page 117.
IMPORTANT
The catalytic converter may be damaged
during attempts to tow-start the engine.
318
Towing eye
Take out the towing eye that is located
under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
The towing eye is screwed into a threaded
socket behind a cover on the right-hand side
of the bumper, front or rear.
Attaching the towing eye
NOTE
To access the towing eye/wheel wrench in
the foam block:
•
Version 1: Lift the compressor unit for
the emergency puncture repair kit (point
5) to access the wheel wrench. Lift out
the bottle of sealant (point 6) to access
the towing eye.
•
Version 2: Lift the compressor unit for
the emergency puncture repair kit (point
5) to access the towing eye. The wheel
wrench is located underneath the jack.
The cover for the towing eye's attachment point is available in two variants
which must be opened in the following
way:
•
Open the rear bumper's recess using a
coin or similar inserted in the recess,
carefully turning it outwards. Then turn
out the cover completely and remove
it.
•
The front bumper's recess has a marking along one side or in a corner: Press
the marking with a finger and fold out
the opposite side/corner at the same
07 During your journey
Towing and recovery
time - the cover turns around its axis
and can then be removed.
Screw the towing eye right in up to its
flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g.
using the wheel wrench.
The towing eye is unscrewed after use.
Place the towing eye back in its position.
Finish by refitting the cover onto the
bumper.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing
on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck
or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for
recovery assistance.
Recovery
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be transported with the wheels rolling forward.
•
07
An All Wheel Drive car (AWD) with
raised front suspension must not be
towed at speeds above 70 km/h. It
should not be towed further than 50
km.
319
General .................................................................................................
Changing wheels ..................................................................................
Tyre pressure .......................................................................................
Warning triangle and first-aid kit*..........................................................
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)* ......................................................
320
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
322
326
330
331
332
WHEELS AND TYRES
08 Wheels and tyres
General
Driving characteristics
Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre
pressure and speed rating are important for
how the car performs.
Tyres with the greatest tread depth should
always be fitted to the rear of the car (to
decrease the risk of skidding).
New tyres
NOTE
Make sure that both pairs of wheels have
the same type and dimension, and also the
same make.
Direction of rotation
Follow the recommended tyre pressures
specified in the tyre pressure table, see
page 393.
Tyre care
G021778
Tyre age
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
08
322
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed
to only turn in one direction have the direction
of rotation marked with an arrow. The tyre
must always rotate in the same direction
throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only be
switched between front and rear positions,
never between left and right-hand sides, or
vice versa. If the tyres are fitted incorrectly,
the car's braking characteristics and capacity
to force rain and slush out of the way are
adversely affected.
All tyres older than 6 years old should be
checked by an expert even if they seem
undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even
if they are hardly ever or never used. The
function can therefore be affected. This
applies to all tyres that are stored for future
use. Examples of external signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are
cracks or discoloration.
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they
begin to harden at the same time as the friction capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh
tyres as possible when you replace them.
This is especially important with regard to
winter tyres. The last four digits in the
sequence mean the week and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking
(Department of Transportation), and this is
stated with four digits, for example 1510. The
tyre in the illustration was manufactured in
week 15 of 2010.
Summer and winter tyres
When summer and winter wheels are
changed the wheels should be marked with
08 Wheels and tyres
General
Wear and maintenance
The correct tyre pressure results in more even
wear, see page 330. Driving style, tyre pressure, climate and road condition affect how
quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid differences in tread depth and to prevent wear
patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can
be switched with each other. A suitable distance for the first change is approx. 5000 km
and then at 10 000 km intervals. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised
Volvo workshop for checking if you are uncertain about tread depth. If significant differences in wear (>1 mm difference in tread depth)
between tyres have already occurred, the
least worn tyres must always be placed on
the rear. Understeer is normally easier to correct than oversteer, and leads to the car continuing forwards in a straight line rather than
having the rear end skidding to one side,
resulting in possible complete loss of control
over the car. This is why it is important for the
rear wheels never to lose grip before the front
wheels.
Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging up - and not standing up.
Rims and wheel bolts
WARNING
A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control
over the car.
Tyres with tread wear indicators
Low wheel bolt
High wheel bolt
G021829
which side of the car they were mounted on,
for example L for left and R for right.
Locking wheel bolts
Tread wear indicators.
Tightening torque:
Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless
bands across the width of the tread. On the
side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread
Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth
is down to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be
level in height with the tread wear indicators.
Change to new tyres as soon as possible.
Remember that tyres with little tread depth
provide very poor grip in rain and snow.
•
•
Type 1 wheel bolt (steel rim): 110 Nm
•
Type 3 Lockable wheel bolt (steel/
aluminium rim): 110 Nm
Type 2 wheel bolt (aluminium rim): 130
Nm
Only use rims that are tested and approved
by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories. Check the torque with a torque
wrench.
08
323
08 Wheels and tyres
General
Locking wheel bolts*
Tread depth
Wheel (rim) dimensions
Locking wheel bolts* can be used on both
aluminium and steel rims. Under the cargo
area floor there is space for the sleeve for the
lockable wheel bolts.
Road conditions with ice, slush and low temperatures place considerably higher demands
on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo
therefore recommends not to drive on winter
tyres that have a tread depth of less than
4 millimetres.
Wheels (rims) have a designation of dimensions, for example: 7Jx16x50.
Winter tyres
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on engine variant. When driving on winter
tyres, the correct type of tyres must be fitted
to all four wheels.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you consult a
Volvo dealer about which wheel rim and
tyre types are most suitable.
Studded tyres
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently
for 500-1000 km so the studs settle properly
into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the studs, a longer service life.
NOTE
08
324
The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
7
Rim width in inches
J
Rim flange profile
Using snow chains
16
Rim diameter in inches
Snow chains may only be used on the front
wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).
50
Off-set in mm (distance from wheel
centre to wheel contact surface
against the hub)
Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow
chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent chains designed for the car model,
and tyre and rim dimensions. In the event
of uncertainty Volvo recommends that you
consult an authorised Volvo workshop.
The wrong snow chains may cause serious
damage to your car and lead to an accident.
Tyre dimensions
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.
Example of designation: 215/55R16 97W.
205
Tyre width (mm)
50
Ratio between tyre wall height and
tyre width (%)
R
Radial ply
17
Rim diameter in inches (")
Specifications
93
The car has whole vehicle approval. This
means that certain combinations of wheels
and tyres are approved. For the permissible
combinations, see page 393
Codes for the maximum permitted
tyre load, tyre load index (LI)
W
Speed rating for maximum permitted
speed, speed rating (SS). (In this
case 270 km/h).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08 Wheels and tyres
General
Load index
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a
load, a load index (LI). The car's weight determines the load capacity required of the tyres.
Minimum permitted index is specified in the
table, see page 393.
Speed ratings
Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum
speed, a speed rating (Speed Symbol; SS).
Tyre speed class must at least correspond
with the car's top speed. Minimum permitted
speed rating is specified in the table, see
page 393.
The only exception to these conditions is winter tyres (both those with metal studs and
those without), where a lower speed rating
may be used. If such a tyre is chosen, the car
must not be driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for example, class Q can be
driven at a maximum of 160 km/h).
Q
160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)
T
190 km/h
H
210 km/h
V
240 km/h
W
270 km/h
Y
300 km/h
WARNING
The car must be fitted with tyres which
have the same or a higher load index (LI)
and speed rating (SS) than specified. If a
tyre with too low a load index or speed rating is used, it may overheat.
Traffic regulations determine how fast a car
can be driven, not the speed rating of the
tyres.
NOTE
The maximum permitted speed is specified in the table.
08
325
08 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
Spare wheel*1
The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only
intended for use temporarily and must be
replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as
possible. The car's handling may be altered
by the use of the spare wheel. The spare
wheel is smaller than the normal wheel. The
car's ground clearance is affected accordingly. Pay attention to high kerbs and do not
machine wash the car. If the spare wheel is
fitted on the front axle, you cannot use snow
chains at the same time. On all-wheel drive
cars the drive on the rear axle can be disconnected. The spare wheel must not be
repaired. The correct tyre pressure for the
spare wheel is stated in the tyre pressure
table, see page 393.
IMPORTANT
Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a
spare wheel on the car.
•
The car must never be driven fitted
with more than one "Temporary
Spare" wheel.
5. Take hold of the far end of the spare
wheel, then lift. Push the spare wheel forwards slightly and lift it out of the storage
compartment.
6. Remove the wheel wrench, the jack and
the towing eye from the foam block.
NOTE
Taking out the spare wheel
The spare wheel* plus jack* and wheel
wrench* are stored under the floor in the
cargo area.
1. Lift the rear edge of the luggage compartment floor (or on models with a jointed
luggage compartment floor, take hold of
the luggage compartment floor handle, lift
and move the rear part of the floor forwards).
2. Lift out the storage compartment
(optional extra) - models with a jointed
luggage compartment floor only.
3. Lift out the lower floor (models with a jointed luggage compartment floor only).
08
1
326
•
4. Undo the attaching screw and lift out the
foam block containing the jack and tools.
If the car is equipped with a temporary tyre repair kit, see page 332 for information.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The jack must be lifted out in order to
access the towing eye.
Jack*
The original jack should only be used for
changing to the spare wheel. The jack's
thread must always be well greased.
Removing
Set up the warning triangle, see page 331 if a
wheel must be replaced at a busy location.
The car and jack* must be on a firm horizontal
surface.
08 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
1. Apply the parking brake and engage
reverse gear, or position P if the car has
an automatic gearbox.
covers. Alternatively, the wheel covers
can be pulled away by hand.
WARNING
Check that the jack is not damaged, that
the threads are thoroughly lubricated and
that it is free from dirt.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack*
that belongs to the car model in question,
which is indicated on the jack's label.
The decal also indicates the jack's maximum lift capacity at a specified lifting
height.
2. Take out the spare wheel and tools (see
the description on page 326). There is
also a package containing gloves and a
wheel bag for the punctured wheel.
3. Place chocks in front of and behind the
wheels which will remain on the ground.
Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones
for example.
4. Cars with steel rims have removable
wheel covers. Use the removal tool to
hook in and pull off any full-wheel wheel
The wheel wrench and towing eye
5. Screw together the towing eye with the
wheel wrench* until the stop position as
shown in the following illustration.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye must be screwed into all
threads in the wheel bolt wrench.
6. Loosen the wheel bolts ½-1 turn anticlockwise with the wheel wrench.
WARNING
Never position anything between the
ground and the jack, nor between the jack
and the car's jacking point.
7. There are two jacking points on each side
of the car.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08
327
08 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised
on the jack.
3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot
rotate.
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack.
Park the car such that passengers have
the car, or ideally a crash barrier, between
themselves and the roadway.
NOTE
IMPORTANT
The ground under the jack must be firm,
smooth and level.
8. Wind up the jack so that the flange in the
bodywork ends up in the notch in the
head of the jack.
9. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.
Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the
wheel.
The car's regular jack is designed only for
use occasionally and for a short time, such
as when changing a wheel with a punctured tyre, switching between summer
tyres and winter tyres, etc. Only the jack
belonging to the specific model is to be
used to jack up the car. If the car is to be
jacked up more often, or for a longer time
than is required just to change a wheel,
use of a garage jack is recommended. In
this instance, follow the instructions for
use that come with the equipment.
Installation
1. Clean the contact surfaces between
wheel and hub.
08
328
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts
thoroughly.
4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is
important that the wheel bolts are tightened properly (see page 323 for tightening torques). Check the torque with a torque wrench.
5.
08 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
Replacing the spare wheel* and jack* in
the cargo area
above the foot and down in the groove
in the foam block)
•
Socket wrench (above the jack)
3. If the spare wheel has been used then the
punctured wheel can be placed in the
plastic bag contained in the package with
the gloves. Place the foam block back in
the storage compartment and tighten the
mounting screw to the floor of the storage
compartment.
Refit any full wheel covers.
NOTE
The wheel cover outlet for the valve must
be positioned over the valve on the wheel
rim during fitting.
The tools and jack* must be returned to their
correct places in the foam block after use.
1. Unscrew the towing eye from the wheel
bolt wrench.
2. Put back any tools that have been used in
the relevant compartments in the foam
block in the following order:
•
towing eye/funnel/torx wrench/socket
for locking wheel bolts/tool for wheel
covers
•
Jack (must be cranked to the correct
height so that it fits into the foam
block's compartment, the handle
If the spare wheel has not been used
then place the foam block in the spare
wheel, and place the spare wheel back in
the storage compartment, and tighten the
mounting screw to the floor of the storage
compartment.
4. Return the detachable towbar
IMPORTANT
The tools and jack* must be stored in the
intended location in the car's cargo area
when not in use.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08
329
08 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure
Tyre pressure
Fuel economy, ECO pressure
In order to obtain optimum fuel economy at
speeds below 160 km/h an ECO pressure is
recommended (applies to both full and light
load - see page 393).
Checking the tyre pressure
G021830
The tyre pressures must be checked every
month.
The tyre pressure decal on the driver's side
door pillar (between frame and rear door)
shows which pressures the tyres should have
at different loads and speed conditions. This
is also specified in the tyre pressure table,
see page 393.
•
Tyre pressure for the car's recommended
tyre dimension
•
ECO pressure1
NOTE
Temperature differences change the
tyre pressure.
08
1
330
ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy.
Check tyre pressures on cold tyres. "Cold
tyres" means the tyres are the same temperature as the ambient temperature. After several
few kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up
and the pressure increases.
Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel consumption, shortens tyre lifespan and impairs
the car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with
tyre pressure that is too low could result in
the tyres overheating and being damaged.
Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road
noise and steering characteristics.
NOTE
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is
a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also
varies depending on ambient temperature.
08 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle and first-aid kit*
Warning triangle
Lift the floor hatch (or push the rear part
of the luggage compartment floor forwards in models with a jointed floor and
then lift the lower floor) and remove the
warning triangle.
Take the warning triangle from the case,
fold out and assemble the two loose
sides.
Fold out the warning triangle's support
legs.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning triangle. Position the warning triangle in a
suitable place with regard to traffic.
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are
properly secured in the cargo area after use.
First aid kit*
A case containing first aid equipment is
located on the left side of the cargo area.
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
331
08 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
General
a compressor and a bottle with sealing fluid.
The kit works as a temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced before its
expiration date and after use.
The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punctured in the tread.
NOTE
The emergency puncture repair kit is only
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture
in the tread.
Version 1.
Version 2.
332
Set up the warning triangle if a tyre is being
sealed in a trafficked location. The warning
triangle and emergency puncture repair kit
are located under the floor in the cargo area.
1. Lift the rear edge of the luggage compartment floor (or on models with a jointed
luggage compartment floor, take hold of
the luggage compartment floor handle, lift
and move the rear part of the floor forwards).
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited
capacity to seal tyres which have punctures
in the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency puncture repair kit if they have larger
slits, cracks or similar damage.
2. Lift out the storage compartment
(optional extra) - models with a jointed
luggage compartment floor only.
Connect the compressor to one of the car’s
12 V sockets; see pages 246 and 308.
Choose the socket that is nearest the punctured tyre.
4. Unhook the elastic part of the belt over
the TMK compressor unit on the left side.
NOTE
08
Positioning of the emergency puncture
repair kit and warning triangle
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo.
Emergency puncture repair (TMK: Temporary
Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and
check and adjust tyre pressure. It consists of
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
3. Lift out the lower floor (models with a jointed luggage compartment floor only).
5. Lift the TMK compressor unit straight up.
6. To access the bottle of sealant, it must be
pushed to the left until it can be lifted out
of the foam block.
08 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
NOTE
Overview
Sealing punctured tyres
To access the towing eye/wheel wrench in
the foam block:
•
Version 1: Lift the compressor unit for
the emergency puncture repair kit
(point 5) to access the wheel wrench.
Lift out the bottle of sealant (point 6) to
access the towing eye.
•
Version 2: Lift the compressor unit for
the emergency puncture repair kit
(point 5) to access the towing eye. The
wheel wrench is located underneath
the jack.
After use, hook the belt back onto the left
side.
Version 1: The belt must be pulled behind the
foam block (not above).
Version 2: The belt must be in the fork on the
rear part of the foam block.
Label, maximum permitted speed
Switch
Cable
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Protective cap
Pressure reducing valve
Air hose
Sealing fluid bottle
Pressure gauge
For information on the function of the parts, see
preceding illustration.
1. Detach the label for maximum permitted
speed (which is fitted on one side of the
compressor) and affix it to the steering
wheel.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08
333
08 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has
been used. Volvo recommends that you
visit an authorised Volvo workshop for
inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum
driving distance is 200 km). The staff there
can determine whether or not the tyre can
be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.
WARNING
The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the
case of contact with skin, wash away the
fluid with soap and water.
2. Check that the switch is in position 0 and
locate the cable and the air hose.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
5. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the
bottom of the thread on the tyre's air
valve.
6. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and
start the car.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
7. Flick the switch to position I.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use.
The seal is broken automatically when the
bottle is screwed in.
3. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the
bottle's stopper.
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the
compressor is running. If cracks or
unevenness arise then the compressor
must be switched off immediately. The
journey should not be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended.
4. Screw the bottle into its holder.
08
334
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure
can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure
drops after approximately 30 seconds.
8. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
9. Switch off the compressor to check the
pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum
3.5 bar. (Release air with the pressure
reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too
high.)
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the
hole in the tyre is too big. The journey
should not be continued. Contacting an
authorised tyre centre is recommended.
10. Switch off the compressor and unplug the
cable from the 12 V socket.
11. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and
fit the valve cap.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
12. As soon as possible, drive approximately
3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so
that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.
Rechecking the repair and pressure
1. Reconnect the equipment.
2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge.
•
•
If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is
insufficiently sealed. The journey
should not be continued. Contact a
tyre centre.
If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3
bar, the tyre must be inflated to the
pressure specified in accordance with
the tyre pressure table, see page 393
(1 bar=100 kPa). Release air using the
pressure reducing valve if the tyre
pressure is too high.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
3. Make sure the compressor is switched
off. Detach the air hose and cable. Refit
the dust cap.
4. Fold the hose into the box and leave the
bottle where it is. Place TMK in the cargo
area.
Inflating the tyres
The car's original tyres can be inflated by the
compressor.
1. The compressor must be switched off.
Make sure that the switch is in position 0
and locate the cable and air hose.
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must
be replaced after use. Volvo recommends
that this replacement is performed by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the
bottom of the thread on the tyre's air
valve.
WARNING
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends that you drive to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the
replacement/repair of the damaged tyre.
Advise the workshop that the tyre contains
sealing fluid.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has
been used. Volvo recommends that you
visit an authorised Volvo workshop for
inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum
driving distance is 200 km). The staff there
can determine whether or not the tyre can
be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine running in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient ventilation.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
3. Connect the cable to one of the car's
12 V sockets and start the car.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the
switch to position I.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08
335
08 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
The components are fitted in the foam block
in the following order:
1. Towing eye/socket wrench
Replacing the sealing fluid canister
2. Bottle (pressed in from the side)
Replace the bottle when the expiration date
has passed. Treat the old bottle as environmentally hazardous waste.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in
accordance with the tyre pressure table,
see page 393. (Release air using the
pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.)
3. TMK kit
6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and cable.
7. Towbar
4. Funnel
5. Jack
6. Torx wrench
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
Store out of the reach of children.
Refitting the components in the foam
block
Version 2
The components are fitted in the foam block
in the following order:
1. Socket wrench
2. Towing eye
Version 1
3. Bottle
4. TMK kit
336
WARNING
The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural rubber-latex.
Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic
reaction in the event of skin contact.
7. Refit the dust cap.
08
5. Jack
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08 Wheels and tyres
08
337
Engine compartment.............................................................................
Lamps...................................................................................................
Wiper blades and washer fluid..............................................................
Battery...................................................................................................
Fuses.....................................................................................................
Car care................................................................................................
338
340
347
354
357
361
370
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
09
General
Volvo service programme
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service programme as
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to perform the service
and maintenance work. Volvo workshops
have the personnel, special tools and service
literature to guarantee the highest quality of
service.
IMPORTANT
WARNING
Remember that the radiator fan (located at
the front of the engine compartment,
behind the radiator) may start automatically some after the engine has been
switched off.
Always have the engine cleaned by a
workshop. There is a risk of fire if the
engine is hot.
Opening and closing the bonnet
Move the catch to the left and open the
bonnet. (The catch hook is located
between the headlamp and grille, see
illustration.)
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
WARNING
Check regularly
Check the following oils and fluids at regular
intervals, e.g. when refuelling:
•
•
•
340
Coolant
Engine oil
Washer fluid
Turn the handle about 20-25 degrees
clockwise. You will hear when the catch
releases.
Check that the bonnet locks properly when
closed.
The handle for bonnet opening is always on the
left-hand side.
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
Engine compartment, overview
Relay and fuse box
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
Air filter
When driving under adverse conditions, see
page 385.
WARNING
The ignition system has very high voltage
and output. The voltage in the ignition system is highly dangerous. The car's electrical system must always be in key position
0 when work is being performed in the
engine compartment, see page 81.
The appearance of the engine compartment may
vary depending on engine variant.
Coolant expansion tank
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition
coil when the car's electrical system is in
key position II or when the engine is hot.
Checking the engine oil
Filling washer fluid
Radiator
Engine oil
dipstick1
Filling engine oil
Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid
(located on the driver's side)
Starter battery
1
09
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard
to service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are
carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Volvo uses different systems for warning of
low/high oil level or low/high oil pressure.
Certain variants have an oil pressure sensor,
Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).
341
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
09
and then the combined instrument panel's
warning symbol for low oil pressure is used.
Other variants have an oil level sensor, when
the driver is informed via the instrument's
Engine with oil dipstick2
and display texts.
warning symbol
Certain variants have both systems. Contact
a Volvo dealer for more information.
Using oil of a higher than specified grade is
permitted. If the car is driven in adverse conditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a
higher grade, see page 385.
For capacities, see page 386 and onwards.
G021737
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance with the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Dipstick and filler pipe.
Checking the oil level in a new car is especially important before the first scheduled oil
change.
Volvo recommends checking the oil level
every 2 500 km. The most accurate measurements are made on a cold engine before starting. The measurement will be inaccurate if
taken immediately after the engine is
switched off. The dipstick will indicate that
the level is too low because the oil has not
had time to flow down into the oil sump.
2
342
Only applies to petrol and 4-cyl. diesel.
The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX
marks.
Measurement and filling if required
1. Ensure that the car is level. After switching off the engine it is important to wait
5 minutes to allow the oil time to run back
to the sump.
2. Pull up and wipe the dipstick.
3. Re-insert the dipstick.
4. Pull it out and check the level.
5. If the level is close to MIN then 0.5 litres
should be added. If the level is significantly below, then an additional amount
is required.
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
6. If required, check the level again, do it
after driving a short distance. Then repeat
steps 1 - 4.
You do not need to take action with respect
to the engine oil level before a message is
shown in the combined instrument panel's
information display, see the illustration below.
WARNING
Never fill above the MAX mark. The level
should never be above MAX or below MIN
as this could lead to engine damage.
09
WARNING
If the message Oil service required is
shown, visit a workshop. The oil level may
be too high.
IMPORTANT
In the event of the message Oil level low
Refill 0.5 litre, only fill with 0.5 litres.
WARNING
NOTE
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.
Engine with electronic oil level sensor3
Message and graph in the display. The left-hand
display shows the digital combined instrument
panel and the right-hand the analogue.
Message
Engine oil level
On certain cars, the oil level can be checked
using the electronic oil level gauge with the
thumbwheel when the engine is switched off,
see page 344.
The oil level is only detected by the system
during driving. The system cannot directly
detect changes when the oil is filled or
drained. The car must be driven
about 30 km before the oil level display is
correct.
WARNING
Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4)
appears as shown in the illustration below.
The level must never be above MAX or
below MIN, as this could lead to engine
damage.
Filler pipe
3
Only applies to 5-cyl. diesel.
343
09 Maintenance and service
09
Engine compartment
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.
Measuring the oil level*
digital combined instrument panel and the righthand the analogue.
Coolant
Checking the level and topping up
If the oil level needs to be checked then it
should be carried out in accordance with the
sequence below.
For capacities and for standards regarding
water quality, see page 387.
1. Activate key position II, see page 81.
Check the coolant regularly
2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand
stalk switch to position Oil level.
> You will then see information displayed
about the engine oil level.
The level must lie between the MIN and MAX
marks on the expansion tank. If the system is
not filled sufficiently, high temperatures could
occur, causing a risk of damage to the
engine.
When topping up the coolant, follow the
instructions on the packaging. It is important
that the mixture of coolant concentrate and
water is correct for the prevailing weather
conditions. Never top up with water only. The
risk of freezing increases with both too little
and too much coolant concentrate.
The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fill
more oil if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. The recommended filling level is 4. Message and graph
in the display. The left-hand display shows the
344
WARNING
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant
requires topping up when the engine is at
operating temperature, unscrew the
expansion tank cap slowly to gently
release the overpressure.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
IMPORTANT
Brake and clutch fluid
•
A high content of chlorine, chlorides
and other salts may cause corrosion in
the cooling system.
•
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion
agent as recommended by Volvo.
Brake and clutch fluid have a common reservoir. The level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks that are visible inside the reservoir. Check the level regularly.
•
Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%
water and 50% coolant.
•
Change the brake fluid every other year or at
every other regular service.
Mix the coolant with approved quality
tap water. In the event of any doubt
about water quality, used ready-mixed
coolant in accordance with Volvo recommendations.
•
When changing coolant/replacing
cooling system components, flush the
cooling system clean with approved
quality tap water or flush with readymixed coolant.
For capacities and recommended fluid grade,
see page 387. The fluid should be changed
annually on cars driven in conditions requiring
hard, frequent braking, such as driving in
mountains or tropical climates with high
humidity.
•
The engine must only be run with a
well-filled cooling system. Otherwise,
temperatures that are too high may
occur resulting in the risk of damage
(cracks) in the cylinder head.
09
Filling
Checking the level
WARNING
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.
Volvo recommends that the reason for the
loss of brake fluid is investigated by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
The fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side.
Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid.
The level must be between the MIN and MAX
marks, which are located on the inside of the
reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Do not forget to refit the cap.
345
09 Maintenance and service
09
Engine compartment
Air conditioning system
Troubleshooting and repair
The air conditioning system contains fluorescent tracing agents. Use ultraviolet light when
looking for leaks.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R134a. This system
must only be serviced and repaired by an
authorised workshop.
346
09 Maintenance and service
Lamps
General
The bulbs are specified, see page 352. The
following list contains locations of bulbs and
other light sources that are specialised, such
as LED1 lamps, or are unsuitable for changing
for some other reason, except at a workshop:
•
Active Xenon headlamps - ABL (Xenon
lamps)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Position/parking lamps front2
Daytime running lights2
Side direction indicators, door mirrors2
Approach lighting, door mirrors
Interior and cargo area lighting
Glovebox lighting
Position/parking lamps rear
Side marker lamps, rear
Brake light above the rear windscreen
WARNING
On cars with Xenon headlamps, the
replacement of Xenon lamps must be carried out at a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended. Working
with Xenon lamps demands extreme caution because the headlamp is equipped
with a high voltage unit.
09
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog
lamps and rear lamps may temporarily
have condensation on the inside of the
lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is
designed to withstand this. Condensation
is normally vented out of the lamp housing
when the lamp has been switched on for a
time.
WARNING
The car’s electrical system must be in key
position 0 when replacing bulbs, see
page 81.
Location of front bulbs
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs
with your fingers. Grease from your fingers
is vaporised by the heat, coating the
reflector and then causing damage.
Number plate lighting.
NOTE
If an error message remains after the broken bulb has been replaced then we recommend that you visit an authorised Volvo
workshop.
1
2
Position/parking lamps (LED in Xenon
headlamps)
Main beam in Xenon headlamps / Extra
main beam in Xenon headlamps
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
Certain variants
347
09 Maintenance and service
09
Lamps
Dipped beam in Xenon headlamps /
Xenon lamps in Xenon headlamps
2.
Loosen the screw with a Torx tool,
size T30.
Indicator
3.
Turn the locking pin anticlockwise.
Side marker lamps
Daytime running lights (LED* or bulb
depending on variant)
Pull out the locking pin.
4.
Headlamps front
All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the
engine compartment. Loosen and remove the
whole headlamp.
Release the headlamp by alternately
tilting and pulling it out.
IMPORTANT
Take care when lifting out the headlamp so
as not to damage any parts.
5.
Press down the catch.
Unplug the connector.
Place the headlight on a soft surface so
as not to scratch the lens.
IMPORTANT
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the
connector.
6. Replace the relevant bulb as instructed.
1.
348
Lift out the bonnet stop.
Cover for main/dipped beam lamps
The headlight must be fitted and the contact
fitted correctly before switching on the lights
or switching key position.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
1.
Press the hooks together.
Angle out the cover.
2. Replace the relevant bulb as instructed.
09 Maintenance and service
Lamps
Dipped beam3
Main beam3
Additional main beam*4
1. Detach the headlamp, see page 348.
1. Detach the headlamp, see page 348.
1. Detach the headlamp, see page 348.
2. Undo the cover, see page 348.
2. Undo the cover, see page 348.
2. Undo the cover, see page 348.
3.
3.
3.
Press the bulb holder upwards until it
releases.
Pull out the bulb holder.
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts
in reverse order.
3
4
Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
Pull out the bulb holder.
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts
in reverse order.
09
Press the bulb holder upwards until it
detaches.
Pull out the bulb holder.
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts
in reverse order.
Cars with halogen headlights
Cars with xenon headlights
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
349
09 Maintenance and service
Lamps
09
Direction indicators
Position/parking lamps5
Side marker lamps
1. Detach the headlamp, see page 348.
1. Detach the headlamp, see page 348.
1. Detach the headlamp, see page 348.
2.
Undo the cover.
2.
Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
2.
Undo the cover.
3.
Push in the catch.
Pull out the bulb holder.
3.
Pull down the bulb holder.
Pull out the bulb holder.
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts
in reverse order.
5
350
3. Replace the bulb and put back the parts
in reverse order.
Not applicable to cars with xenon headlights as these are equipped with LED lamps.
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts
in reverse order.
09 Maintenance and service
Lamps
Daytime running lights6
1.
Undo the cover.
2.
Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
Pull out the bulb holder.
3. Replace the bulb and put back the parts
in reverse order.
Location of rear bulbs
Brake light (LED)
Position/parking lights (LED)
Side marker lamps (LED)
2.
Rear fog lamp
Only applies to daytime running lights with bulbs.
Direction indicators, brake lights and rear
lights are replaced from inside the cargo area.
1. Remove the hatch in the upholstery (1) on
the same side as the defective bulb.
Reversing lamp
6
Lamp housing, rear
Brake light
Indicator
09
Press the catch sideways.
Pull out the bulb holder.
3. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in
and turning anticlockwise.
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts
in reverse order.
}}
351
09 Maintenance and service
09
Lamps
Rear fog lamp
Insert (approx. 20 mm) a blunt, knife-like
object, e.g. a table knife, at the triangle.
Carefully prise until the lug releases.
IMPORTANT
Take care not to damage any parts.
Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
352
Pull out the bulb holder.
Specifications of bulbs
3. Replace the bulb and put back the parts
in reverse order.
Lighting
[W]A
Type
Dipped beamB
55
H7 LL
Vanity mirror lighting
Main beamB
65
H9
Additional main
beamC
55
H7 LL
Front direction
indicators
21
HY21W
Position/parking
lamps frontB
5
W5W LL
Side marker lamps
front
5
WY5W LL
Daytime running
lightsD
19
PW19W
2. Carefully detach and lift aside the lamp
lens.
Side direction indicators, door mirrorsD
5
WY5W LL
3. Using needle-nose pliers, pull the bulb
straight out to the side. Do not squeeze
too hard with the pliers. Otherwise, the
bulb glass could break.
Direction indicators, rear
21
PY21W LL
Brake light
21
P21W LL
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts
in reverse order.
Reversing lamp
21
P21W LL
1. Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lens
and gently prize up the lug on the edge.
09 Maintenance and service
Lamps
Lighting
A
B
C
D
[W]A
Type
Rear fog lamp
21
H21W LL
Vanity mirror lighting
1.2
T5 Socket
W2x4.6d
09
Watt
Cars with halogen headlights
Cars with xenon headlights
Certain variants
353
09 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades and washer fluid
09
Wiper blades
Service position
STOP ENGINE button to set the car’s
electrical system to key position I. (For
detailed information on key positions, see
page 81.)
2. Briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE
button again to set the car’s electrical
system in key position 0.
3. Within 3 seconds, move the right stalk
switch up and hold it in position for
approx. 1 second.
> The wipers then move to standing
straight up.
Wiper blades in service position.
In order to change, clean or lift the wiper
blades (for scraping off ice from the windscreen, for example) they must be in service
position.
IMPORTANT
Before placing the wiper blades in the
service position, make sure that they are
not frozen down.
1. Place the remote control key in the ignition lock1 and briefly press the START/
1
354
Not necessary in cars with Keyless function.
The wipers return to their starting position
when you briefly press the START/STOP
ENGINE button to set the car’s electrical system to key position I (or when the car is
started).
IMPORTANT
If the wiper arms in the service position
have been folded up from the windscreen,
they must be folded back down onto the
windscreen before the wipers are allowed
to return to their starting position. This is to
avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet.
Replacing the wiper blades
09 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades and washer fluid
Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service position. Press the button located on
the wiper blade mounting and pull
straight out parallel with the wiper arm.
Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click"
is heard.
Check that the blade is firmly installed.
4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the
windscreen.
The wipers return from service position to
their starting position when you briefly press
the START/STOP ENGINE button to set the
car’s electrical system to key position I (or
when the car is started).
NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. The
blade on the driver's side is longer than on
the passenger side.
WARNING
If the car is equipped with airbag
Pedestrian Airbag then Volvo recommends
that genuine wiper arms are used and that
you only use genuine parts for them.
Replacing the wiper blades, rear
window
09
3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end
position against the wiper arm as a lever
to detach the blade more easily.
4. Press the new wiper blade into position.
Check that it is firmly installed.
5. Lower the wiper arm.
Cleaning
For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen,
see page 370 and onwards.
IMPORTANT
Check the blades regularly. Neglected
maintenance shortens the service life of
the wiper blades.
G021763
Filling washer fluid
1. Fold out the wiper arm.
2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by the
arrow).
355
09 Maintenance and service
09
Wiper blades and washer fluid
The windscreen and headlamp washers share
a common reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Use washer fluid with antifreeze during the
winter to avoid freezing in the pump, reservoir and hoses.
For capacities, see page 387.
356
09 Maintenance and service
Battery
Operation
The service life and function of the battery is
influenced by factors such as the number of
starts, discharging, driving style, driving conditions, climatic conditions etc.
•
Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running.
•
Check that the cables to the battery are
correctly connected and properly tightened.
WARNING
•
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be
enough for the battery to explode.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
large quantities of water. If acid
splashes into the eyes - seek medical
attention immediately.
NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it
becomes discharged repeatedly.
The life of the battery is affected by several
factors, including driving conditions and
climate. Battery starting capacity decreases gradually with time and therefore
needs to be recharged if the car is not
used for a longer time or when it is only
driven short distances. Extreme cold further limits starting capacity.
To maintain the battery in good condition,
at least 15 minutes of driving/week is recommended or that the battery is connected to a battery charger with automatic
trickle charging.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a
maximum service life.
09
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed
then the energy saving function for infotainment may be temporarily disengaged,
and/or the message in the combined
instrument panel's information display
about the starter battery's state of charge
may be temporarily inapplicable, following
the connection of an external starter battery or battery charger:
•
The negative battery terminal on the
car's starter battery must never be
used for connecting an external starter
battery or battery charger - only the
car chassis may be used as the
grounding point.
See the section "Start assistance" - for a
description of how the cable clamps must
be attached.
IMPORTANT
A quick charger must never be used when
charging the battery.
357
09 Maintenance and service
09
Battery
Symbols on the battery
Avoid sparks and naked
flames.
Use protective goggles.
Risk of explosion.
Further information in the
owner's manual.
Must be taken for recycling.
Store the battery out of
the reach of children.
Replacing the main battery
Volvo recommends that you allow an authorised workshop to replace the batteries - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
For more information on the car's main battery -see page 117
Start/Stop
Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped with two 12 V batteries - one extra powerful battery for starting and one support battery that helps during the Start/Stop function's starting sequence.
For more information on Start/Stop - see
page 125.
For more information on the car's main battery - see page 117 and 394.
The battery contains corrosive acid.
358
NOTE
An expended battery must be recycled in
an environmentally safe manner as it contains lead.
09 Maintenance and service
Battery
Battery
Start
Support
Cold start
capacityA,
CCA (A)
760B
120B
800C
180C
278×175×190B
150×90×106B
315×175×190C
150×90×130C
70B
8B
80C
10C
SizeD,
L×W×H
(mm)
Capacity
(Ah)
A
B
C
D
According to EN standard.
Manual gearbox.
Automatic gearbox.
Largest possible size.
IMPORTANT
When replacing batteries in cars with the
Start/Stop function, the AGM1 type batteries must be fitted.
1
2
3
NOTE
•
The higher the current take-off in the
car (extra cooling/heating, etc.) the
more the batteries must be charged =
increased fuel consumption.
•
When the capacity of the battery has
fallen below the lowest permissible
level then the Start/Stop function is
disengaged.
09
Location of the batteries
Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due
to high current take-off means:
•
•
The engine starts automatically2 without
the driver depressing the clutch pedal
(manual gearbox).
The engine starts automatically without
the driver lifting his/her foot off the foot
brake pedal (automatic gearbox).
(1) Starter battery3 (2) Support battery
The support battery normally requires no
more service than the normal battery that is
used for starting. A workshop should be contacted in the event of questions or problems an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Absorbed Glass Mat
Automatic starting can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position.
The battery for starting is described in detail on page 358.
359
09 Maintenance and service
09
Battery
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed
then the Start/Stop function may temporarily cease to work after the connection of
an external battery or battery charger:
•
The negative battery terminal on the
car's main battery must never be used
for connecting an external battery or
battery charger - only the car chassis
may be used as the grounding point.
See the section "Start assistance" - for a
description of how the cable clamps must
be attached.
NOTE
If the battery has become so discharged
that everything is "black" and in principle
the car does not have all the normal electrical functions and the engine is subsequently started using an external battery or
battery charger, then the Start/Stop function will be activated. It will then be possible for the engine to be auto-stopped but
in the event of an auto-stop the Start/Stop
function may fail to auto-start the engine
due to inadequate capacity in the battery.
The battery must first be charged in order
to ensure a successful auto-start after an
auto-stop. At an outside temperature of
+15 °C the battery needs to be charged for
at least 1 hour. At a lower outside temperature a charging time of 3-4 hours is
recommended. The recommendation is
that the battery is charged using an external battery charger.
If this is not possible then the recommendation is to temporarily deactivate the
Start/Stop function until the battery has
been adequately recharged.
For more information about recharging the
battery, see the section "Battery" in the
chapter "Maintenance and service".
360
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
General
09
Location, fuse boxes
All electrical functions and components are
protected by a number of fuses in order to
protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading.
If an electrical component or function does
not work, it may be because the component's
fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed. If
the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a
fault in the circuit. Volvo recommends that
you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for
checking.
Changing
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the
fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side
to see whether the curved wire has
blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new
fuse of the same colour and amperage.
Fuse box locations in a left-hand drive car. In
a right-hand drive car the fuse box under the
glovebox changes sides.
Engine compartment
Under the glovebox
Below right front seat
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with
an amperage higher than that specified
when replacing a fuse. This could cause
significant damage to the electrical system
and possibly lead to fire.
361
09 Maintenance and service
09
Fuses
Engine compartment
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers
that facilitate the procedure for the removal
and fitting of fuses.
Removing the covers
Lift the cover straight up.
The fuse box also provides space for several
spare fuses.
Replacing fuses
The fuses can be accessed following the
removal of the cover fitted on the starter battery and the cover for the electrical distribution unit.
362
Fold out the locking catches that are
fitted on the sides of the cover on the
starter battery.
Fold out the locking catch that is fitted
on the side of the electrical distribution
unit.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
Rotate the cover upward until the lock
lugs (1) are released.
Function
A
Function
A
ABS pump
40
Brake light
5
ABS valves
30
-
-
Headlamp washers*
20
Headlamp control
5
Ventilation fan
40
Internal relay coils
5
12 V socket, tunnel console
front
15
Transmission control module
15
Solenoid clutch A/C (petrol,
4-cyl. diesel)
15
-
12 V socket, tunnel console rear
15
Climate sensor*; air intake throttle motors
10
Engine control module (5-cyl.)
5
Power seat, right*
20
Fold the cover toward the engine to
access the fuses.
Refitting the covers
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Primary fuse for fuses 32-36
Electric windscreen, right side*
30
40
Positions
-
The label on the inside of the cover shows the
positions of the fuses.
Electric windscreen, left side*
40
•
Parking heater*
20
Windscreen wipers
20
Central electronic module, reference voltage, support battery
5
Horn
15
•
1
Fuses 7-18 are of "JCASE" type and
should be replaced by a workshop1.
Fuses 19-45 and 47-48 are of "Mini Fuse"
type.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
09
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
363
09 Maintenance and service
09
364
Fuses
Function
A
Function
A
Function
A
Relay coil in cooling fan relay
(4-cyl., 5-cyl. diesel); Lambdasonds (4-cyl. petrol); Mass air
flow meter (diesel), Bypass
valve, EGR cooling (diesel); Regulator valve, fuel flow (5-cyl. diesel); Regulator valve, fuel pressure (5-cyl. diesel)
10
Valves (4-cyl. petrol); Solenoids
(4-cyl. petrol); Injectors (5-cyl.
petrol); Lambda-sond (5-cyl.
diesel); Crankcase ventilation
heater (5-cyl. diesel)
10
Accelerator pedal sensor
5
Charging point, support battery
-
-
-
Ignition coils (petrol)
10
20
Diesel filter heater; Glow plug
control module (5-cyl. diesel)
15
Relay coil in cooling fan relay
(5-cyl. petrol); Lambda-sonds
(5-cyl. petrol)
Engine control module (4-cyl.)
10
Oil pump, automatic gearbox
(5-cyl.); Mass air flow sensor
(petrol); EVAP valve (4-cyl. petrol); Valves (5-cyl. petrol); Solenoids (5-cyl. petrol); Crankcase
ventilation heater (5-cyl. petrol);
Control motor, turbo (4-cyl. diesel); Regulator valve, fuel flow
(4-cyl. diesel); Control module,
radiator roller cover (4-cyl. diesel); Solenoid, piston cooling (5cyl. diesel); Turbo control valve
(5-cyl. diesel); Oil level sensor
(5-cyl. diesel); Solenoid clutch
A/C (5-cyl.)
10
Engine control module (5-cyl.);
Throttle unit (5-cyl. petrol)
15
ABS
5
Engine control module; Transmission control module; Airbags
10
Light height control*
10
Electric control servo
5
Central electronic module
15
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
-
-
-
-
Collision warning system
5
Coolant pump (when no parking
heater is available)
10
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
Under the glovebox
On the inside of the cover for the fuse box in
the engine compartment there are tweezers
that facilitate the procedure for the removal
and fitting of fuses.
The fuse box in the engine compartment
also provides space for several spare fuses.
Replacing fuses
The fuses can be accessed when a protective
cover has been removed from the fuse box.
Cover removal
1. Take hold of the recess and pull until the
locking lugs in the lower edge of the
cover are released from the fuse box.
2. Remove the cover.
NOTE
A relatively large amount of tensile force is
required to release the locking lugs at the
top edge of the cover from the electrical
distribution unit.
365
09 Maintenance and service
09
Fuses
Cover refitting
Function
A
Function
A
Fuel pump
20
Combined instrument panel
5
-
Central locking system, fuel
filler flapB
10
Climate panel
10
Steering wheel module
7.5
-
1. Guide in the lower lugs.
2. Turn the cover upwards until the upper
lugs engage.
NOTE
Make sure that the upper locking lugs are
seated properly in the grooves of the electrical distribution unit.
15
Interior lighting, Roof console
for front reading lamps and
passenger compartment lighting
5
Interior lighting; Power seats
10
Blind, glass roof*
10
Rain sensor*; Dimming, interior
rearview mirror*; Moisture sensor*
5
Collision warning system*
-
Siren alarm*; Data link connector OBDII
5
Main beam
15
-
-
Reversing lamp
10
Windscreen wipersC; Rear
windscreen wiperC
20
5
-
Immobiliser
5
Reserve position 1, constant
voltage
15
10
Positions
Unlocking, tailgateA
The label on the inside of the cover shows the
positions of the fuses.
-
5
Reserve position 2, constant
voltage
20
Reserve position 3, constant
voltage
15
Movement sensor alarm*;
Remote receiver
5
Steering lock
The fuses are of "Mini Fuse" type.
366
Rear window wiper
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
A
B
C
D
E
F
Function
A
Windscreen wipersD; Rear
windscreen wiperD
20
Central locking system, fuel
filler flapE
10
Unlocking, tailgateF
10
Electric additional heater*; Button seat heating rear*
7.5
Airbags; Pedestrian airbag*
10
Reserve position 4, constant
voltage
7.5
-
-
-
-
09
See also fuse 84.
See also fuse 83.
See also fuse 82.
See also fuse 77.
See also fuse 70.
See also fuse 65.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
367
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
Below right front seat
On the inside of the cover for the fuse box in
the engine compartment there are tweezers
that facilitate the procedure for the removal
and fitting of fuses.
•
Fuses 24-28 are of "JCASE" type and
should be replaced by a workshop2.
Function
A
•
Fuses 1-23 and 29-46 are of "Mini Fuse"
type.
Control panel, right front door
25
Control panel, left rear door
25
Control panel, right rear door
25
The fuse box in the engine compartment
also provides space for several spare fuses.
Positions
The label on the inside of the cover shows the
positions of the fuses.
2
368
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Function
A
-
-
Keyless*
10
Door handle (Keyless*)
5
Control panel, left front door
25
Power seat left*
-
20
-
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
Function
A
Function
A
Function
A
Internal relay coil
5
Trailer socket 1*
40
-
-
Audio control unit (amplifier)*
5
Rear window defroster
30
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Telematics*; Bluetooth*
5
BLIS*
5
-
-
Audio; Infotainment control unit
15
Parking assistance*
5
-
-
Digital radio*; TV*
10
Parking camera*
5
12 V socket, cargo area
15
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Seat heating (driver's side)
15
-
-
Seat heating (passenger side)
15
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Trailer socket 2*
20
-
-
Primary fuse for fuses 12-16:
Infotainment
40
Seat heating, rear right*
15
Seat heating, rear left*
15
AWD control module*
15
-
-
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
09
369
09 Maintenance and service
Car care
09
Washing the car
Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty.
Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator.
Use car shampoo.
•
370
Remove bird droppings from the paintwork as soon as possible. Bird droppings
contain chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork very quickly. An authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended for the
removal of any discoloration.
•
•
Hose down the underbody.
•
If necessary, use cold degreasing agent
on very dirty surfaces. Note that in this
case, the surfaces must not be hot from
the sun!
Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt
has been removed so as to reduce the
risk of scratches from washing. Do not
spray directly onto the locks.
•
Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and
plenty of lukewarm water.
•
Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm
soap solution or car shampoo.
•
Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or
a water scraper. If you avoid allowing
drops of water to dry in strong sunlight,
you reduce the risk of water drying stains
which may need to be polished out.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a
workshop. There is a risk of fire if the
engine is hot.
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality. Clean them regularly, when refuelling
for example.
Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents
but use water and a non-scratching
sponge instead.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog
lamps and rear lamps may temporarily
have condensation on the inside of the
lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is
designed to withstand this. Condensation
is normally vented out of the lamp housing
when the lamp has been switched on for a
time.
Cleaning the wiper blades
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper
blades, as well as insects, ice etc. on the
windscreen, impair the service life of wiper
blades.
For cleaning:
–
Set the wiper blades in service position,
see page 354.
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen
regularly with lukewarm soap solution or
car shampoo.
Do not use any strong solvents.
Automatic car washes
An automatic car wash is a simple and quick
way of washing the car, but it cannot reach
everywhere. Handwashing the car is recommended for achieving optimum results.
NOTE
The car must only be washed by hand
over the first few months. This is because
the paint is more delicate when it is new.
High-pressure washing
When using high-pressure washing, use
sweeping movements and make sure that the
nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to
the surface of the car (the distance applies to
all exterior parts). Do not spray directly onto
the locks.
09 Maintenance and service
Car care
Testing the brakes
WARNING
Always test the brakes after washing the
car, including the parking brake, to ensure
that moisture and corrosion do not attack
the brake linings and reduce braking performance.
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then
when driving long distances in rain or slush.
The heat from the friction causes the brake
linings to warm up and dry. Do the same
thing after starting in very damp or cold
weather.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
dealers is recommended for the cleaning and
care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim
components, such as glossy trim mouldings.
When using such a cleaning agent the
instructions must be followed carefully.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and
rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is
necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.
09
and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed
using fine rubbing paste designed for car
paintwork.
Polish first with a polish and then wax with
liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on
the packaging carefully. Many preparations
contain both polish and wax.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could
wear away or damage the glossy surface
layer.
IMPORTANT
Polishing agent that contains abrasive
must not be used.
Rims
Only use rim cleaning agent recommended
by Volvo.
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the
surface and cause stains on chrome-plated
aluminium rims.
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull
or to give the paintwork extra protection.
Only paint treatment recommended by
Volvo should be used. Other treatment
such as preserving, sealing, protection,
lustre sealing or similar could damage the
paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by
such treatments is not covered by Volvo
warranty.
Water-repellent coating*
Never use products such as car
wax, degreaser or similar on glass
surfaces as this could ruin their
water-repellent properties.
The car does not need to be polished until it
is at least one year old. However, the car can
be waxed during this time. Do not polish or
wax the car in direct sunlight.
Take care when cleaning so as not to damage the glass surface.
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt
There is natural wear of the water-repellent
coating.
To avoid damaging glass surfaces when
removing ice – only use plastic ice scrapers.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
371
09 Maintenance and service
09
Car care
Treatment with a special finishing agent available from Volvo dealers is recommended in
order to maintain the water-repellent properties. This should be used first after three
years and then each year.
Rustproofing – inspection and
maintenance
Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents.
The car received a thorough and complete
rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body
are made of galvanised sheet metal. The
underbody is protected by a wear-resistant
anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating
rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the
exposed members, cavities, closed sections
and side doors.
Carpets and cargo area
Under normal conditions the rustproofing
does not require treatment for approximately
12 years. After this period, it should be treated at three-year intervals. Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo
workshop for assistance if the car needs further treatment.
Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at
each pin.
Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it
is important to keep the car clean. The car's
rustproofing needs to be checked regularly
and touched-up if necessary in order for it to
be maintained.
372
Cleaning the interior
Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly
and follow the instructions included with the
car care product.
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning
of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use
a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.
Each inlay mat is secured with pins.
–
Take hold of the inlay mat at each pin and
lift the mat straight up.
WARNING
Before setting off check that the inlaid mat
in the driver area is firmly affixed and
secured in the pins in order to avoid getting caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
A special textile cleaner is recommended for
stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor
mats should be cleaned with agents recommended by your Volvo dealer!
Stains on fabric upholstery and roof
upholstery
A special fabric cleaning agent, available from
authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to
avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of
the upholstery.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the
fabric upholstery.
Treating stains on leather upholstery
Volvo's leather upholstery is chromium-free
and is treated to preserve its original appearance.
Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beautiful patina over time. The leather is refined
and processed so that it retains its natural
characteristics. It is given a protective coating, but regular cleaning is required in order
to maintain both characteristics and appearance. Volvo offers a comprehensive product
for the cleaning and treatment of leather
upholstery which, when used in accordance
with the instructions, preserves the leather's
protective coating. After a period of use the
natural appearance of the leather will nevertheless emerge, depending more or less on
the surface texture of the leather. This is a
09 Maintenance and service
Car care
natural maturing of the leather and shows
that it is a natural product.
Protective treatment of leather
upholstery
To achieve best results Volvo recommends
cleaning and the application of protective
cream once to four times per year (or more if
necessary). The Volvo Leather Care kit is
available from your Volvo dealer.
1. Pour a small amount of the protective
cream on the felted cloth and massage in
a thin layer of cream with gentle circular
movements on the leather.
IMPORTANT
•
•
Certain items of coloured clothing (for
example, jeans and suede garments)
may stain the upholstery.
Never use strong solvents. Such products may damage fabric, vinyl and
leather upholstery.
Washing instructions for leather
upholstery
1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened sponge and squeeze out a strong
foam.
2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular
movements.
3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the
stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the
stain. Do not rub.
4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and
allow the leather to dry completely.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes
before use.
The leather has now been given improved
protection against stains and improved UV
protection.
Washing instructions for the leather
steering wheel
•
Remove dirt and dust with a soft premoistened sponge and neutral soap.
•
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover
the leather steering wheel with protective
plastic.
•
Use natural oils. Volvo's leather care
agents are recommended for best results.
If the steering wheel has stains:
Group 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat and
blood)
–
09
Group 2 (fats, oils, sauces and chocolate)
1. Same procedure as for group 1.
2. Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth.
Group 3 (dry dirt, dust)
1. Use a soft brush to remove the dirt.
2. Same procedure as for group 1.
Treating stains on interior plastic, metal
and wood parts
A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly
moistened with water, available from Volvo
dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior
parts and surfaces.
Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong
stain removers. A special cleaning agent
available from Volvo dealers can be used for
more difficult cleaning.
Cleaning seatbelts
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special textile cleaning agent is available from
your Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is
dry before allowing it to retract.
Use a soft cloth or sponge. Mix a 5%
ammonia solution. (For blood stains, use
a solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt.)
373
09 Maintenance and service
Car care
09
Touching up minor paintwork damage
Colour code
Paint is an important part of the car's rustproofing and should therefore be checked
regularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork should be rectified immediately. The most common types of paintwork
damage are stone chips, scratches and
marks on the edges of wings, doors and
bumpers.
Repair minor paintwork damage such
as stone chips and scratches
primer1 - a special adhesive primer in a
spray can is available for e.g. plasticcoated bumpers
•
basecoat and clearcoat - available in
spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks2
•
•
masking tape
G021832
Materials
•
Car colour code
It is important that the correct colour is used.
For product decal location, see page 378.
fine sand paper1.
Before work is begun, the car must be clean
and dry and at a temperature above 15 °C.
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the
damaged surface. Then remove the tape
to remove any loose paint.
If the damage is down to the metal, use
of a primer is appropriate. In the event of
damage to a plastic surface, an adhesive
primer should be used to give better
results - spray into the lid of the spray
can and brush on thinly.
1
2
374
If required.
Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.
09 Maintenance and service
Car care
09
2. Before painting, gentle polishing using a
very fine polishing agent may be carried
out locally if required (e.g. if there are any
uneven edges). The surface is cleaned
thoroughly and left to dry.
3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush, a matchstick or similar. Finish off
with a basecoat and clearcoat once the
primer has dried.
4. For scratches, proceed as above, but
mask around the damaged area to protect the undamaged paintwork.
NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated down
to the meal and an undamaged layer of
paint remains in place, fill in with basecoat
and clearcoat as soon as the surface has
been cleaned.
375
Type designations.................................................................................
Dimensions and weights.......................................................................
Engine specifications............................................................................
Engine oil...............................................................................................
Fluids and lubricants.............................................................................
Fuel.......................................................................................................
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure .........................................
Electrical system...................................................................................
Type approval.......................................................................................
Licenses................................................................................................
Symbols in the display..........................................................................
376
378
380
384
385
387
390
393
394
395
404
407
SPECIFICATIONS
10 Specifications
Type designations
Label location
10
378
10 Specifications
Type designations
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle
identification and engine numbers can facilitate all contact with an authorised Volvo
dealer regarding the car and when ordering
spare parts and accessories.
Type designation, vehicle identification
number, maximum permissible weights,
codes for colour and upholstery and type
approval number. The label is visible
when the right rear door is opened.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated
in the owner's manual should be exact
replicas of those in the car. They are
included to show their approximate
appearance and location in the car. The
information that applies to your particular
car is available on the respective decals
for your car.
10
Label for A/C system.
Label for parking heater.
Engine code and engine serial number.
Label for engine oil.
Gearbox type designation and serial number.
Manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
Car's identification number. (VIN Vehicle
Identification Number)
Further information on the car is presented in
the registration document.
379
10 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
Dimensions
10
A
B
C
380
Dimensions
mm
Wheelbase
2646
Length
Load length, floor, folded rear
seat
D
Load length, floor
E
Height
F
Load height
Dimensions
G
Front track
4370
H
Rear track
1508
684
1458
532
mm
1552A
1547B
1540A
1535B
I
Load width, floor
J
Width
960
1802
A
B
Dimensions
mm
K
Width including door mirrors
2041
L
Width including folded-in
door mirrors
1857
Offset 50 mm.
Offset 52.5 mm.
10 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
Weights
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full and all fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories,
and towball load (when a trailer is hitched,
see table page 382) influences the payload
and is not included in the kerb weight.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
10
Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight Kerb weight.
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to
cars in the standard version - i.e. a car
without extra equipment or accessories.
This means that for every accessory added
the loading capacity of the car is reduced
correspondingly by the weight of the
accessory.
Examples of accessories that reduce loading capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/
Summum equipment levels, as well as
other accessories such as Towbar, Load
carrier, Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary
lamps, GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety
grille, Carpets, Luggage cover, Power
seats, etc.
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascertaining the kerb weight of your own particular car.
For information on decal location, see page 378.
Max. gross vehicle weight
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
Equipment level
Max. load: See registration document.
Max. roof load: 75 kg.
381
10 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
Towing capacity and towball load
10
A
382
Engine
Engine codeA
Gearbox
Max. weight braked trailer (kg)
Max. towball load (kg)
T4
B4164T
Manual, B6
1300
75
T4
B4164T
Automatic, MPS6
1500
75
T4
B5204T8
Automatic, TF-80SD
1500
75
T4 AWD
B5204T8
Automatic, TF-80SD
1500
75
T5
B5204T9
Automatic, TF-80SD
1500
75
T5 AWD
B5204T9
Automatic, TF-80SD
1500
75
T5
B5254T12
Automatic, TF-80SD
1500
75
T5 AWD
B5254T12
Automatic, TF-80SD
1500
75
T5
B5254T14
Automatic, TF-80SD
1500
75
T5 AWD
B5254T14
Automatic, TF-80SD
1500
75
D2
D4162T
Manual, B6
1300
75
D2
D4162T
Automatic, MPS6
1300
75
D3
D5204T6
Manual, M66
1500
75
D3
D5204T6
Automatic, TF-80SD
1500
75
D4
D5204T4
Manual, M66
1500
75
D4
D5204T4
Automatic, TF-80SD
1500
75
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 378.
10 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg)
A
Engine
Engine codeA
Gearbox
Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg)
Max. towball load (kg)
T4
B4164T
Manual, B6
650
50
T4
B4164T
Automatic, MPS6
700
50
T4
B5204T8
Automatic, TF-80SD
700
50
T4 AWD
B5204T8
Automatic, TF-80SD
750
50
T5
B5204T9
Automatic, TF-80SD
700
50
T5 AWD
B5204T9
Automatic, TF-80SD
750
50
T5
B5254T12
Automatic, TF-80SD
700
50
T5 AWD
B5254T12
Automatic, TF-80SD
750
50
T5
B5254T14
Automatic, TF-80SD
700
50
T5 AWD
B5254T14
Automatic, TF-80SD
750
50
D2
D4162T
Manual, B6
650
50
D2
D4162T
Automatic, MPS6
700
50
D3
D5204T6
Manual, M66
700
50
D3
D5204T6
Automatic, TF-80SD
750
50
D4
D5204T4
Manual, M66
700
50
D4
D5204T4
Automatic, TF-80SD
750
50
10
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 378.
383
10 Specifications
Engine specifications
Engine specifications
10
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
A
384
Engine
Engine
codeA
Output
(kW/rpm)
Output
(hp/rpm)
Torque (Nm/
rpm)
No. of
cylinders
Bore
(mm)
Stroke
(mm)
Swept
volume
(litres)
Compression
ratio
T4
B4164T
132/5700
180/5700
240/1600–5000
4
79
81.4
1.596
10.0:1
T4
B5204T8
132/5000
180/5000
300/2700–4000
5
81.0
77
1.984
10.5:1
T5
B5204T9
157/6000
213/6000
300/2700–5000
5
81.0
77
1.984
10.5:1
T5
B5254T12
187/5400
254/5400
360/1800–4200
5
83
92,3
2,497
9.5:1
T5
B5254T14
183/5400
249/5400
360/1800–4200
5
83
92,3
2,497
9.5:1
D2
D4162T
84/3600
115/3600
270/1750-2500
4
75
88.3
1.560
16.0:1
D3
D5204T6
110/3500
150/3500
350/1500-2750
5
81.0
77
1.984
16.5:1
D4
D5204T4
130/3500
177/3500
400/1750-2750
5
81.0
77
1.984
16.5:1
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 378.
10 Specifications
Engine oil
Adverse driving conditions
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnormally high oil temperature or oil consumption.
Below are some examples of adverse driving
conditions.
Check the oil level more frequently for long
journeys:
•
•
•
•
towing a caravan or trailer
in mountainous regions
at high speeds
in temperatures colder than -30 °C or
hotter than +40 °C
The above also apply to shorter driving distances at low temperatures.
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse
driving conditions. It provides extra protection
for the engine.
10
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard
to service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are
carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
385
10 Specifications
Engine oil
Engine oil grade
10
Engine
Engine codeA
Recommended oil grade
Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres)
Certified and factory-filled oil: Oil grade WSS-M2C925-A
T4
B4164T
options for service:
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
approx. 4.1
Viscosity: SAE 5W–30
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
D2
D4162T
Viscosity: SAE 5W–30
approx. 3.8
When driving under adverse conditions, use ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.
A
D3
D5204T6
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
approx. 5.9
D4
D5204T4
Viscosity: SAE 0W–30
approx. 5.9
T4
B5204T8
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
approx 5.5
T5
B5204T9
Viscosity: SAE 0W–30
approx 5.5
T5
B5254T12
approx 5.5
T5
B5254T14
approx 5.5
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 378.
For filling engine oil, see page 341.
386
10 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
Coolant
Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by
Volvo mixed with 50% water1, see the packaging.
EngineA
Volume
EngineA
Volume
EngineA
(litres)
D3
D5204T6
D4
D5204T4
(litres)
8.0
(litres)
T4
D2
B4164T
D4162T
7.0
A
10.0
Volume
T4
B5204T8
T5
B5204T9
T5
B5254T12
T5
B5254T14
10
8.0
Engine code, component and serial number can be read
on the engine, see page 378.
Other fluids and lubricants
Manual gearbox
B6
1.6
M66
1.9
Automatic gearbox
1
Volume (litres)
Prescribed transmission fluid
BOT 350M3
Volume (litres)
Prescribed transmission fluid
TF-80SD
7.0
AW1
MPS6
7.3
BOT 341
Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
}}
387
10 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
NOTE
10
Under normal driving conditions, the gearbox oil does not need to be changed during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions,
see page 385.
Fluid
System
Brake fluid
Brake system
0.6
DOT 4
Washer fluid
Cars with headlamp washing
5.5
Cars without headlamp washing
3,2
Washer fluid recommended by Volvo - with frost protection during cold
weather and below freezing point.
Fuel
4-cylinder petrol
Volume (litres)
approx. 62
Prescribed grade
Petrol:see page 303
5-cylinder petrol (FWD)
388
5-cylinder petrol (AWD)
approx. 57
4-cylinder diesel
approx. 52
5-cylinder diesel
approx. 60
Compressor oil
Air conditioning
0,11
PAG oil
Coolant
Air conditioning
0,65 kg
R134a
Diesel:see page 304
10 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R134a. This system
must only be serviced and repaired by an
authorised workshop.
10
389
10 Specifications
Fuel
CO2 emissions and fuel consumption
10
390
T4 (B4164T)
164
7.0
109
4.7
129
5.5
T4 (B4164T)
184
7.9
120
5.1
143
6.1
T4 AWD (B5204T8)
259
11.1
146
6.3
187
8.0
T5 (B5204T9)
243
10.4
135
5.8
174
7.5
T5 AWD (B5204T9)
259
11.1
146
6.3
187
8.0
T5 (B5254T12)
259
11.1
138
5.9
182
7.8
T5 AWD (B5254T12)
270
11,6
150
6.4
194
8.3
D2 (D4162T)
110
4.2
93
3.5
99
3.8
D2 (D4162T)
118
4.5
103
3.9
108
4.1
10 Specifications
Fuel
10
D3 (D5204T6)
140
5.3
103
3.9
117
4.4
D3 (D5204T6)
178
6.8
114
4.3
137
5.2
D4 (D5204T4)
140
5.3
103
3.9
117
4.4
D4 (D5204T4)
178
6.8
114
4.3
137
5.2
Explanation
Extra-urban driving
gram/km
Combined driving
litre/100 km
Urban driving
NOTE
If the consumption and emission data is
missing then it is included in the enclosed
supplement.
1
Fuel consumption and emissions of
carbon dioxide
Fuel consumption and emission values in the
table above are based on specific EU cycles1,
that apply to cars with kerb weight in the
basic version and without extra equipment.
The car's weight may increase depending on
equipment. This, as well as how heavily the
car is loaded, increases fuel consumption and
carbon dioxide emissions.
Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC (Euro 4), EU
Regulation no 692/2008, 715/2007 (Euro 5) and UN ECE Regulation no 101.The regulations cover the driving cycles for city driving and driving on main roads. - City driving - the measurement
starts with cold starting the engine. The driving is simulated. - Driving on main roads - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - Cars with
manual transmission are started in 2nd gear. The value for combined driving, which is reported in the table, is a combination of city driving and driving on main roads, in accordance with legal
requirements. CO2 emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for
CO2 emissions.
391
10 Specifications
Fuel
10
There are several reasons for increased fuel
consumption compared with the table's values. Examples of this are:
•
•
The driver's driving style.
•
High speed results in increased wind
resistance.
•
Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
weather and the condition of the car.
If the customer has specified wheels
larger than those fitted as standard on the
model's basic version, then resistance
increases.
Even a combination of the above-mentioned
examples can result in significantly improved
consumption. For further information, please
refer to the regulations referred to.
Large deviations in fuel consumption may
arise in a comparison with the EU driving
cycles which are used in the certification of
the car and on which the consumption figures
in the table are based.
To bear in mind
Tips that the driver can use in order to reduce
consumption:
392
•
Drive gently and avoid unnecessary
acceleration as well as braking too hard.
•
Drive with the correct air pressure in the
tyres and check this regularly - select
ECO tyre pressure for best results, see
the tyre pressure table on page 393.
•
Choice of tyres can affect fuel consumption - seek advice on suitable tyres from a
dealer.
See further information and more advice on
pages 11 and 298.
See page 303 for general information on fuel.
10 Specifications
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure
Approved tyre pressures
Engine
Tyre size
205/60 R16
All
Speed
Load, 1 - 3 persons
Max. load
(km/h)
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front/rear
(kPa)B
(kPa)
(kPa)
(kPa)
(kPa)
0 - 160
240
230
260
260
260
160 +
260
240
280
280
-
max. 80
420
420
420
420
-
ECO pressureA
10
225/50 R17
225/45 R18
225/40 R19
Temporary Spare Tyre
A
B
Economical driving.
In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
NOTE
All engines, tyres or combinations of these
are not always available in all markets.
393
10 Specifications
Electrical system
Electrical system
10
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator. The electrical system is single-pole and
uses the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
The battery capacity is dependent upon the
equipment level in the vehicle.
IMPORTANT
If the battery is replaced, take care to
replace it with a battery with the same cold
starting capacity and reserve capacity as
the original battery (see the label on the
battery).
Battery
Engine
A
Cold start capacity,
Reserve capacity
CCA - Cold Cranking Amperes (A)
(minutes)
Petrol
12
520–800
100–160
Diesel
12
700–800
135–160
Petrol/Diesel with Start/Stop function
12
760A
135
Battery type AGM (Absorbed Glass Mat) must be used in cars with the Start/Stop function.
NOTE
394
Voltage (V)
•
The battery's container size should be
consistent with the original battery's
dimensions.
•
The battery's height is different
depending on size.
Start/Stop*
For information on batteries in cars with
Start/Stop, see page 358.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
10 Specifications
Type approval
Remote control key system
Country
Lock system, standard
China
Country
Radar system
Country
10
Singapore
EU, China
IDA: Infocomm Development
Authority of Singapore.
Hong Kong
Brazil
Keyless lock system (Keyless drive)
Country
EU
Europe
Korea
Delphi Electronics &
Safety hereby declares that
L2C0038TR and L2C0049TR
are in compliance with the
essential requirements and
other relevant provisions of
Directive 1999/5/EC. This declaration of conformity may, if
necessary, be consulted with
Delphi Electronics & Safety /
One Corporate Center /
Kokomo, Indiana 46904-9005
USA.
}}
395
10 Specifications
Type approval
Bluetooth®
10
Declaration of Conformity (Declaration of Conformity)
Country
Countries
in the EU:
Exporting country: Japan
Manufacturer: Alpine Electronics Inc.
Type of equipment: Bluetooth® device
For further information visit http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/rtte/faq.htm #informing
396
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
10
Czech
Republic:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že tento Bluetooth® Module je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými
ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Denmark:
Undertegnede Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr Bluetooth® Module overholder de væsentlige krav og
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Germany:
Hiermit erklärt Alpine Electronics, Inc., dass sich das Gerät Bluetooth® Module in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden
Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.
}}
397
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
10
398
Estonia:
Käesolevaga kinnitab Alpine Electronics, Inc. seadme Bluetooth® Module vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja
nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
UK
Hereby, Alpine Electronics, Inc., declares that this Bluetooth® Module is in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Spain:
Por medio de la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que el Bluetooth® Module cumple con los requisitos esenciales y
cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Greece:
ΜΕ ΗΝ ΠΑΡΟ ΣΑ Alpine Electronics, Inc. ΗΛΩΝΕ Ο Bluetooth® Module Σ ΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕ Α ΠΡΟΣ
ΑΠΑ ΗΣΕ Σ Α Σ ΛΟ ΠΕΣ ΣΧΕ
ΕΣ Α ΑΞΕ Σ ΗΣ Ο Η ΑΣ 1999/5/Ε .
France:
Par la présente Alpine Electronics, Inc. déclare que l'appareil Bluetooth® Module est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux
autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Italy:
Con la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. dichiara che questo Bluetooth® Module è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre
disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latvia:
Ar šo Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklarē, ka Bluetooth® Module atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to
saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Lithuania:
Šiuo Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis Bluetooth® Module atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos
nuostatas.
Netherlands:
Hierbij verklaart Alpine Electronics, Inc. dat het toestel Bluetooth® Module in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de
andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Malta:
Hawnhekk, Alpine Electronics, Inc., jiddikjara li dan Bluetooth® Module jikkonforma mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti
oħrajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
Hungary:
Alulírott, Alpine Electronics, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a Bluetooth® Module megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az
1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
ΣΟ ΣΩ ΕΣ
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
Poland:
Niniejszym Alpine Electronics, Inc. oświadcza, że Bluetooth® Module jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi
stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Portugal:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que este Bluetooth® Module está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da
Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovenia:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta Bluetooth® Module v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Slovakia:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že Bluetooth® Module spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.
Finland:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. vakuuttaa täten että Bluetooth® Module tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja
sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Sweden:
Härmed intygar Alpine Electronics, Inc. att denna Bluetooth® Module står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav
och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
Iceland:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. hereby certifies that this Bluetooth® Module conforms to the essential characteristic requirements and
other relevant regulations of directive 1999/5/EC.
Norway:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklærer herved at utstyret Bluetooth® Module er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige
relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
10
}}
399
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
10
China:
第十三条
进口和生产厂商在其产品的说明书或使用手册中,应刊印下述有关内容
1. 标明附件中所规定的技术指标和使用范围,说明所有控制
■ 使用频率
■ 等效全向辐射
■ 最大
天线增益
天线增益
≤100 mW 或≤20 dBm
①
≤20 dBm / MHz(EIRP) ①
率(对应载波±2.5 倍信道带宽以外)
≤-36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz)
≤-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz)
≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz)
≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz)
≤-30 dBm / 1 MHz (其它 1 - 12.75 GHz)
2. 不得擅自更改发射频率
大发射
率(包括额外
3. 使用时不得对各种合法的无线电通信业
继续使用
4. 使用微
率无线电设备,必须忍
5. 不得在飞机和机场附近使用
400
10dBi 时
10dBi 时
20 ppm
■ 杂散发射(辐射)
•
•
•
•
•
率(EIRP)
率谱密度
■ 载频容限
调整及开关等使用方法
2.4 - 2.4835 GHz
装射频
产生有害干扰
各种无线电业
率放大器),不得擅自外接天线或改用其它发射天线
一旦发现有干扰现象时,应立即停止使用,并采
的干扰或工业
科学及医疗应用设备的辐射干扰
措施消除干扰后方可
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
Taiwan:
10
低効率電波輻射性電機管理辧法第十条
第十二條
經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機,非經許可,公司
商號或使用者均不得擅自 變更頻率
加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能
第十四條
低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信;經發現有干擾現象時, 應立即停用,並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用
前項合法通信,指依電信法規定 作業之無線電通信 低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業 科學及醫療用電波 輻射性電機設備之
干擾
}}
401
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
10
South
Korea:
제품 정보
Volvo Car Korea
신청자 코드: KCC-CMM-N25-IAM21L3, KCC-CMM-N25-IAM21L2 and KCC-CMM-N25-IAM21L1
제품 명: Bluetooth Audio Navigation Radio
모델 명: IAM2.1
산 날짜: March/2010
Alpine Electronics, Inc
Made in Japan
고객 정보
Volvo Car Korea
볼보자동차코리아
서울시 용산구 한남 2 동 726-173 볼보빌딩 4 층
볼보자동차 고객센터 1588-1777
http://www.volvocars.com/kr
사용자 주의사항
※당해 무선설비는 전파혼신 가능성이 있으므로 인명안전과 관련된 서비스는 할 수 없습니다
402
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
10
The United
Arab Emirates:
South
Africa:
Jamaica:
Approved for use in Jamaica SMA EI: IAM2.1
Thailand:
This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement.
Oman
403
10 Specifications
Licenses
Sensus software
10
404
This software uses parts of sources from
clib2 and Prex Embedded Real-time OS Source (Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991,
1993, 1994), and Quercus Robusta (Copyright
(c) 1990, 1993), The Regents of the University
of California. All or some portions are derived
from material licensed to the University of
California by American Telephone and
Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories,
Inc. and are reproduced herein with the
permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following
conditions are met: Redistributions of source
code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form
must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
Neither the name of the <ORGANIZATION>
nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior
written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS
PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This software is based in part on the work of
the Independent JPEG Group.
This software uses parts of sources from
"libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL
Sample Implementation, Version 1.2.1,
released January 26, 2000, developed by
Silicon Graphics, Inc. The Original Code is
Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon Graphics,
Inc. Copyright in any portions created by third
parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. All
Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000]
Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge,
to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files
(the "Software"), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without limitation
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons
to whom the Software is furnished to do so,
subject to the following conditions: The
above copyright notice including the dates of
first publication and either this permission
notice or a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/
projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies
or substantial portions of the Software. THE
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR
THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this
notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc.
shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
10 Specifications
Licenses
to promote the sale, use or other dealings in
this Software without prior written
authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc.
as the cost of media, shipping and handling,
upon written request. Please contact your
nearest Volvo Dealer.
This software is based in parts on the work of
the FreeType Team.
This offer is valid for a period of at least three
(3) years from the date of the distribution of
this product by VCC / or for as long as VCC
offers spare parts or customer support.
This software uses parts of SSLeay Library:
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young
([email protected]). All rights reserved
Combined Instrument Panel Software
Open Source Software Notice
This product uses certain free / open source
and other software originating from third
parties, that is subject to the GNU General
Public License version 2 and 3 (GPLv2/
GPLv3), GNU Lesser General Public License
version 3 (LGPLv3), The FreeType Project
License (“FreeType License”) and other
different and/or additional copyright licenses,
disclaimers and notices. The links how to
access the exact terms of GPLv2, GPLv3,
LGPLv3, and the other open source software
licenses, disclaimers, acknowledgements and
notices are provided to you below. Please
refer to the exact terms of the relevant
License, regarding your rights under said
licenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offers
to provide the source code of said free/open
source software to you for a charge covering
the cost of performing such distribution, such
The FreeType Project License: http://
www.freetype.org/FTL.TXT
•
libfreetype.so.6 (version 2.4.3)
10
DivX®
Portions of this product uses software
copyrighted © v2.4.3/2010 The
FreeTypeProject (www.freetype.org). All rights
reserved.
This product includes software under
following licenses:
GPL v2 : http://www.gnu.org/licenses/oldlicenses/gpl-2.0.html
•
•
•
Linux kernel (merge between MontaVista
2.6.31 kernel and kernel from
L2.6.31_MX51_ER_1007 BSP)
uBoot (based on v2009.08)
busybox (based on version 1.13.2.)
GCC runtime library exception: http://
www.gnu.org/licenses/gcc-exception.html
•
libgcc_s.so.1
LGPL v3: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/
lgpl.html
•
Libc.so.6, libpthread.so.0, Librt.so.1
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video. DivX®,
DivX Certified® and associated logos are
registered trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are
used under license. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO:
DivX® is a digital video format created by
DivX, Inc. This is an official DivX Certified
device that plays DivX video. Visit
www.divx.com for more information and
software tools to convert your files into DivX
video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX
Certified® device must be registered in order
to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD)
content. To generate the registration code,
locate the DivX VOD section in the device
}}
405
10 Specifications
Licenses
10
406
setup menu. Go to http://vod.divx.com with
this code to complete the registration
process and learn more about DivX VOD.
Covered by one or more of the following U.S.
Patents: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710;
7,519,274.
10 Specifications
Symbols in the display
General
There are a variety of different symbols in the
display in the car. The symbols are divided
into warning, indicator and information symbols. Shown below are the most common
symbols with their meanings and a reference
to where in the manual further information
can be found. For more information on symbols and text messages, see pages 75 and
207.
Symbols in the display
Warning symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol
Control symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol
Meaning
Page
Fault in the ABL
system*
75,93
Emissions system
75
Fault in the ABS
system
75,133
Rear fog lamp on
75,94
Stability system,
DSTC, Trailer stability assist*
75, 143,
316
75,143
Meaning
Page
Low oil pressure
77
Parking brake
applied
77,136
- Red warning symbol, illuminates
when a fault has been indicated which could
affect the safety and/or driveability of the car.
An explanatory text is shown in the combined
instrument panel at the same time.
Parking brake
applied, alternative symbol
77
Airbags - SRS
19,77
- Information symbol, illuminates in
combination with text in the combined instrument panel, when a deviation in any of the
car's systems has occurred. The yellow symbol information can also illuminate in combination with other symbols.
Seatbelt reminder
16,77
Alternator not
charging
77
Stability system,
sport mode
77,133
Engine preheater
(diesel)
75
Fault in the brake
system
19, 29,
77, 123
Low level in fuel
tank
75,229
Warning, safety
mode
Information, read
display text
75
Main beam on
75,92
10
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
407
10 Specifications
Symbols in the display
Symbol
10
Meaning
Page
Left-hand direction
indicators
Symbol
Meaning
Page
75
Adaptive cruise
control*
154
Right-hand direction indicators
75
Adaptive cruise
control*
154
Start/Stop*, engine
auto-stopped
75,125
Cruise control*
150
Speed limiter
148
Radar sensor*
161,
165, 178
Start/Stop*
128
Start/Stop*
128
Start/Stop*
128
Start/Stop*
128
Information symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol
408
Meaning
Page
Main beam with
auto dimming AHB*
92
Camera sensor*
92
Adaptive cruise
control*
161
Adaptive cruise
control*
155,
156, 161
Adaptive cruise
control*, Distance
Warning* (Distance
Alert)
155,163
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Symbol
Meaning
Page
Camera sensor*,
Laser sensor*
170,
178,
183, 186
Distance warning*
(Distance Alert),
City SafetyTM, Collision warning system*, Auto-brake*
165,
170, 178
Engine and passenger compartment
heater*
229
Activated timer*
229
Activated timer*
229
ABL system*
93
Low battery
229
10 Specifications
Symbols in the display
Symbol
Meaning
Page
Park Assist Pilot PAP*
Meaning
Page
195
Registered speed
information*
145
Rain sensor*
101
Oil level measurement
343
Lane Keeping Aid*
186
Driver Alert System*, Lane Keeping
Aid*
183,186
Driver Alert System*, Time for a
break
181,183
Gear indicator,
manual gearbox
118
Automatic gear
positions
119
Symbol
10
Information symbols in the roof console
display
Symbol
Meaning
Page
Seatbelt reminder
18
Airbag, passenger
seat, activated
23
Airbag, passenger
seat, deactivated
23
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
409
11 Alphabetical Index
A
ACC – Adaptive cruise control................. 152
Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 93
Active Park Assist.................................... 195
11
Active Xenon headlamps........................... 93
Adaptive cruise control............................ 152
fault tracing......................................... 160
radar sensor........................................ 159
Additional heater (Diesel)......................... 232
Adjusting headlamp pattern...................... 97
halogen headlamp................................ 98
Adjusting the steering wheel...................... 88
Airbag
activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 22
driver's and front passenger side......... 20
key switch off........................................ 22
AIRBAG ..................................................... 20
Airbag system ........................................... 19
Air conditioning........................................ 224
general................................................ 217
Air conditioning, AC................................. 224
Air conditioning system
repair................................................... 346
Air distribution.................................. 218, 226
410
Air quality system IAQS .......................... 226
Air vents................................................... 219
Alarm..........................................................
alarm indicator......................................
alarm signals.........................................
arming...................................................
checking the alarm...............................
deactivate.............................................
deactivating a triggered alarm..............
reduced alarm level..............................
63
63
64
63
47
63
64
64
Alcolock................................................... 111
Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 218
All-wheel drive, AWD............................... 131
Auto
climate control settings...................... 223
Automatic car washes............................. 370
Automatic gearbox..................................
manual gear positions (Geartronic).....
towing and recovery...........................
trailer...................................................
119
120
317
312
Automatic locking...................................... 57
Automatic relocking................................... 56
Auxiliary heater........................................ 232
AUX input......................................... 250, 272
AWD, All-wheel drive............................... 131
All Wheel Drive (AWD).............................. 131
Approach light, duration...................... 46, 97
Audio
settings............................................... 255
surround..................................... 250, 255
Audio system........................................... 250
functions............................................. 255
overview.............................................. 250
Audio volume ..........................................
phone..................................................
phone/media player............................
ring signal, phone...............................
speed/noise compensation................
251
281
281
281
255
B
Backrest..................................................... 83
front seat, lowering............................... 83
Backrest rear seat, lowering...................... 86
Bag holder .............................................. 307
Battery............................................. 357, 394
maintenance....................................... 357
remote control ................................... 295
remote control key/PCC....................... 50
start assistance................................... 117
11 Alphabetical Index
symbols on the battery....................... 358
warning symbols................................. 358
Blind spot (BLIS)...................................... 201
BLIS......................................................... 200
Bluetooth®
handsfree ...........................................
media .................................................
microphone off ..................................
streaming audio .................................
transfer call to mobile ........................
278
275
281
275
281
Bonnet, opening...................................... 340
Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 345
Brake light.................................................. 94
Brakes...................................................... 132
anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 132
brake light............................................. 94
brake system...................................... 132
Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 132
emergency brake lights........................ 94
filling brake fluid.................................. 345
handbrake........................................... 136
symbols in the combined instrument
panel................................................... 133
Bulbs, see Lighting.................................. 348
C
Calls
incoming............................................. 280
operation............................................. 280
Camera sensor................................ 168, 177
Car care................................................... 370
Car care, leather upholstery.................... 372
Cargo area....................................... 306, 309
cargo net............................................. 309
lighting.................................................. 96
mounting points.................................. 307
parcel shelf......................................... 310
Car upholstery......................................... 372
Car wash.................................................. 370
Catalytic converter................................... 303
recovery.............................................. 318
CD ........................................................... 268
Centre console........................................ 209
Checking and topping up the coolant..... 344
Checking the engine oil level................... 341
Children..................................................... 32
child safety locks.................................. 36
child seats and side airbags................. 24
location in the car................................. 32
safety.................................................... 32
Child safety locks...................................... 62
Child seat................................................... 32
Child seats.................................................
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats...
recommended......................................
size classes for child seats with the
ISOFIX fixture system...........................
upper mounting points for child seats..
32
36
34
11
36
40
Cigarette lighter socket............................ 244
City Safety™............................................ 166
Cleaning
automatic car washes.........................
car wash.............................................
rims.....................................................
seatbelts.............................................
upholstery...........................................
370
370
371
373
372
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)........ 218
Climate control........................................ 217
general................................................ 217
sensors............................................... 217
Clock, setting............................................. 79
CO2 emissions ........................................ 390
Collision..................................................... 29
411
11 Alphabetical Index
Collision warning............................. 172, 173
D
Driving in water........................................ 298
Collision warning system
radar sensor........................ 159, 167, 172
DAB Radio............................................... 265
Driving with a trailer
towball load........................................ 381
towing capacity.................................. 381
Collision Warning System with Auto
Brake....................................................... 172
11
Colour code, paint................................... 374
Combined instrument panel.............. 71, 206
messages........................................... 207
Deadlock
deactivation.......................................... 60
temporary deactivation......................... 60
Defroster.................................................. 224
Compass................................................. 110
calibration........................................... 110
Diesel particle filter.................................. 305
Condensation in headlamps.................... 370
Direction indicators.................................... 95
controls
centre console ................................... 251
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 122
Controls
centre console.................................... 209
Distance Warning.................................... 163
Control symbols......................................... 75
Cooling system........................................ 298
Corner Traction Control .......................... 142
Crash, see Collision................................... 29
Cruise control.......................................... 150
CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package)......... 218
DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 143
DVD ......................................................... 268
Deadlocks.................................................. 60
Comfort inside the passenger compartment......................................................... 243
Controls, lights........................................... 89
412
Daytime running lights............................... 91
Diesel....................................................... 304
Dipstick, electronic.................................. 343
Display lighting.......................................... 90
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II.................... 250
E
ECC, electronic climate control............... 220
EcoGuide................................................... 73
Economical driving.................................. 298
ECO pressure.................................. 330, 393
Electrical socket...................................... 246
cargo area........................................... 308
front seat............................................. 246
Door mirrors............................................. 106
Emergency equipment
warning triangle.................................. 331
Driver Alert Control.................................. 181
Emergency puncture repair..................... 332
Driver Alert System.................................. 180
Emissions of carbon dioxide................... 305
Driving......................................................
cooling system....................................
with the tailgate open.........................
with trailer...........................................
Engine
overheating......................................... 311
starting................................................ 115
298
298
299
311
11 Alphabetical Index
External dimensions................................ 380
Fuelling
fuel filler flap....................................... 301
fuel filler flap, locking............................ 59
Engine compartment
coolant................................................ 344
oil........................................................ 341
overview.............................................. 341
F
Fuse box.................................................. 361
Engine drag control ................................ 142
First aid equipment.................................. 331
Engine oil......................................... 341, 385
adverse driving conditions.................. 385
capacities........................................... 385
filter..................................................... 341
oil grade.............................................. 385
First aid kit .............................................. 331
Engine block heater
fuel-driven........................................... 228
Engine braking, automatic....................... 134
Engine specifications............................... 384
Environmental labelling, FSC, owner's
manual....................................................... 11
Error messages
Adaptive Cruise Control.....................
Driver Alert Control.............................
LKA.....................................................
see Messages and symbols...............
161
183
186
161
Error messages in BLIS........................... 203
Error messages in Distance Alert............ 165
ETC, electronic temperature control ....... 221
Expectant mothers, seatbelt...................... 17
Fan........................................................... 222
Fault tracing for the camera sensor. 168, 177
Fluids, capacities..................................... 387
Fuses.......................................................
changing.............................................
engine compartment..........................
general................................................
under front right seat..........................
under glovebox...................................
361
361
362
361
368
365
11
Fluids and oils.......................................... 387
Fog lamps
rear........................................................ 94
G
Foot brake............................................... 132
Gearbox................................................... 118
automatic............................................ 119
manual................................................ 118
Front bulbs
location............................................... 347
Front seat
head restraint........................................ 83
FSC, environmental labelling..................... 11
Fuel..........................................................
fuel consumption................................
fuel economy......................................
fuel filter..............................................
303
390
330
305
Gear selector inhibitor............................. 121
Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disengagement................................................. 122
Geartronic................................................ 120
Glass
laminated/reinforced........................... 104
Glass roof, roller blind.............................. 108
Global opening........................................ 217
413
11 Alphabetical Index
Glovebox................................................. 245
locking.................................................. 58
Heat-reflecting windscreen...................... 104
High engine temperature......................... 311
source buttons ................................... 251
voice control....................................... 287
Gross vehicle weight............................... 381
High-pressure headlamp washing........... 102
Inlaid mats............................................... 245
GSI - Gear selector assistance................ 118
Hill Descent Control................................. 134
Instrument lighting, see Lighting................ 90
HomeLink®
Instrument overview
left-hand drive....................................... 68
right-hand drive.................................... 70
11
.............................................. 137
Home safe lighting..................................... 97
H
Hoot........................................................... 88
Handbrake............................................... 136
Horn........................................................... 88
Hazard warning flashers............................ 94
HDC......................................................... 134
Headlamp levelling.................................... 90
I
Headlamp pattern, adjusting..................... 97
IAQS – Interior Air Quality System........... 218
Headlamp pattern adjustment
Active Bending Lights .......................... 98
IC – Inflatable Curtain................................ 25
Headlamps............................................... 348
head restraint
front seat............................................... 83
Head restraint
centre seat, rear.................................... 85
lowering................................................ 86
Heating....................................................
rearview and door mirrors..................
rear window........................................
seats...................................................
414
223
107
107
221
Instruments and controls........................... 68
Interior lighting, see Lighting..................... 95
Interior rearview mirror............................. 108
automatic dimming............................. 108
Intermittent wiping................................... 101
iPod®, connection................................... 272
Ignition keys............................................... 81
Immobiliser................................................ 45
J
Indicator lamps, PCC................................ 47
Journey statistics..................................... 240
Inflatable curtain........................................ 25
Information button, PCC............................ 47
Information display.................................... 71
K
Infotainment system ............................... 250
menus ................................................ 253
overview ............................................. 250
Kerb weight.............................................. 381
Key............................................................. 44
Key blade................................................... 48
11 Alphabetical Index
Keyless drive...................................... 52, 115
Keyless start (keyless drive)............... 52, 115
Keypad in the steering
wheel................................. 88, 150, 210, 251
Key positions............................................. 81
L
Labels...................................................... 378
Laminated glass....................................... 104
Lamps, see Lighting................................ 347
Lane keeping assistant - LKA.................. 184
Laser sensor............................................ 169
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 372
Lighting.................................................... 347
Active Xenon headlamps...................... 93
approach light, duration................. 46, 97
automatic lighting, passenger compartment............................................... 96
bulbs, specifications........................... 352
controls................................................. 95
daytime running lights.......................... 91
display lighting...................................... 90
headlamp levelling................................ 90
home safe lighting................................ 97
in passenger compartment...................
instrument lighting................................
main/dipped beam...............................
position/parking lamps.........................
rear fog lamp........................................
tunnel detection....................................
95
90
91
90
94
91
Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 348
daytime running lights........................ 351
dipped beam (cars with halogen headlamps)................................................. 349
direction indicators, front.................... 350
main beam (cars with active xenon
headlamps)......................................... 349
main beam (cars with halogen headlamps)................................................. 349
position/parking lamps, front.............. 350
rear bulb holder: direction indicators,
brake lamps and reversing lamps...... 351
rear fog lamps..................................... 352
side marker lamps, front..................... 350
vanity mirror........................................ 352
Light switches............................................ 89
LKA - Lane keeping assistant.................. 184
Loading
cargo area........................................... 306
general................................................ 306
mounting points.................................. 307
roof load............................................. 306
Lock confirmation ..................................... 44
Locking/unlocking
inside.................................................... 56
tailgate.................................................. 58
11
Locks
automatic locking................................. 56
locking.................................................. 56
unlocking.............................................. 56
Lubricants................................................ 387
Lubricants, capacities.............................. 387
M
Main/dipped beam, see Lightning............. 91
Main beam, automatic activation.............. 92
Maintenance
rustproofing........................................ 372
Making calls............................................. 280
Manual gearbox....................................... 118
GSI - Gear selector assistance........... 118
towing and recovery........................... 317
Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 120
415
11 Alphabetical Index
remove with the air vents................... 226
timer function...................................... 225
Max. roof load ......................................... 381
Media,
Bluetooth®
................................... 275
Menus/functions...................................... 211
Menus and messages.............................. 206
Mood lighting............................................. 96
Parking assistance................................... 188
parking assistance sensors................ 190
Menu system MY CAR............................ 209
MY CAR................................................... 209
Parking brake........................................... 136
Memory function in seats.......................... 84
Menu navigation, Infotainment ............... 253
Messages and symbols
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 161
Collision Warning with Auto
Brake.......................................... 170, 178
Distance Alert..................................... 165
Driver Alert Control............................. 183
LKA..................................................... 186
Messages in BLIS.................................... 203
279
278
279
287
O
Meters
fuel gauge............................................. 72
speedometer......................................... 72
tachometer........................................... 72
PAP - Active Park Assist.......................... 195
Parcel shelf.............................................. 310
Park assist camera.................................. 191
Parking heater..........................................
battery and fuel...................................
parking on a hill..................................
time setting.........................................
228
228
228
231
Oil, see also Engine oil............................. 385
Passenger compartment......................... 243
Oil level low.............................................. 341
Passenger compartment filter................. 217
Overheating............................................. 311
Passenger compartment heater
fuel-driven........................................... 228
Owner's manual, environmental labelling.. 11
Messages in the information display....... 143
416
Panic function............................................ 46
Mobile phone
connect...............................................
handsfree............................................
register phone.....................................
voice control.......................................
media player ........................................... 268
11
Panel lighting............................................. 90
Passenger compartment lighting
automatic.............................................. 96
P
PACOS....................................................... 22
Microphone.............................................. 278
PACOS, switch.......................................... 22
Misting..................................................... 224
attending to the windows................... 217
condensation in headlamps............... 370
Paintwork
colour code......................................... 374
damage and touch-up........................ 374
PCC – Personal Car Communicator
functions............................................... 46
range............................................... 47, 48
Pedestrian protection.............................. 172
Petrol grade............................................. 303
11 Alphabetical Index
Phone
connect...............................................
handsfree............................................
incoming calls.....................................
making calls........................................
phone book.........................................
phone book, shortcut.........................
receiving a call....................................
register phone.....................................
voice control.......................................
279
278
280
280
282
282
281
279
287
Pocket park assist - PAP......................... 195
Polishing.................................................. 371
Position/parking lamps.............................. 90
Power guide............................................... 73
Power seat................................................. 84
Powershift gearbox.......................... 122, 317
Power windows....................................... 104
Q
Queue Assist............................................ 157
Queue Assistant....................................... 157
Relay/fuse box, see Fuses....................... 361
R
Radar sensor........................................... 152
limitations........................................... 159
Radio ...................................................... 261
AM/FM ............................................... 261
DAB ................................................... 265
Rain sensor.............................................. 101
Rear bulbs
location............................................... 351
Rearview and door mirrors
compass.............................................
door....................................................
electrically retractable.........................
heating................................................
interior.................................................
110
106
107
107
108
Remote control ....................................... 294
battery replacement ........................... 295
Remote control, HomeLink®
programmable ................................... 137
Remote control key...................................
battery replacement..............................
detachable key blade...........................
functions...............................................
range.....................................................
44
50
48
46
47
Remote control key system, type approval............................................................ 395
Resetting, trip meter................ 236, 239, 240
Resetting the door mirrors....................... 107
Resetting the power windows................. 106
Rear window, defrosting.......................... 107
Retractable power door mirrors............... 107
Recirculation............................................ 225
Reverse gear inhibitor.............................. 118
Recommendations during driving............ 298
Rims
cleaning.............................................. 371
Recommended child seats, table.............. 34
Recovery.................................................. 319
Refrigerant............................................... 346
Refuelling........................................... 59, 301
fuel filler flap, manual opening............ 301
refuelling............................................. 301
11
Road sign information............................. 145
Roller blind for glass roof......................... 108
Roof load, max. weight ........................... 381
Rustproofing............................................ 372
417
11 Alphabetical Index
S
Safety mode.............................................. 29
Seat, see Seats.......................................... 83
11
Seatbelt
rear seat................................................ 18
seatbelt tensioner................................. 18
Spare wheel............................................. 326
Speed limiter............................................ 148
Spin control............................................. 142
Spin control function............................... 142
Stability and traction control system....... 142
Seatbelt reminder...................................... 18
Stability system....................................... 142
Seatbelts.................................................... 16
Stains....................................................... 372
Seats.......................................................... 83
head restraints, rear.............................. 85
heating................................................ 221
lowering the front backrest................... 83
lowering the rear backrest.................... 86
power seats.......................................... 84
Start/Stop................................................ 125
Securing loads (Loading)......................... 307
Service position....................................... 354
Steering wheel........................................... 88
keypad.......................... 88, 150, 210, 251
keypad, adaptive cruise control......... 154
steering wheel adjustment.................... 88
Service programme................................. 340
Stone chips and scratches...................... 374
Set time interval....................................... 163
Side airbags............................................... 24
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment.................................................. 243
Signal input, external....................... 250, 272
Surround.......................................... 250, 255
SIPS bags.................................................. 24
Symbols................................................... 143
indicator symbols................................. 75
warning symbols................................... 75
Sensus....................................................... 80
Soot filter................................................. 305
418
Soot filter full............................................ 305
Start assistance....................................... 117
Steering force, speed related.................. 242
Steering force level, see Steering force... 242
Steering lock............................................ 116
Symbols and messages
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 161
Collision Warning with Auto
Brake.......................................... 170, 178
Distance Alert..................................... 165
Driver Alert Control............................. 183
LKA..................................................... 186
T
Tailgate
locking/unlocking.................................. 58
Temperature
actual temperature............................. 217
Temperature control................................ 223
Timer........................................................ 225
Total airing function........................... 57, 217
Towbar
detachable, attachment ..................... 314
detachable, removal .......................... 315
Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 312
Towing..................................................... 317
towing eye.......................................... 318
Towing capacity....................................... 381
11 Alphabetical Index
Towing equipment................................... 312
specifications...................................... 313
Towing eye.............................................. 318
Trailer.......................................................
cable...................................................
driving with a trailer............................
snaking...............................................
311
311
311
316
Trailer stability assist .............................. 142
Trailer Stability Assist.............................. 316
Tyres
direction of rotation............................ 322
driving characteristics......................... 322
maintenance....................................... 322
pressure...................................... 330, 393
puncture repair................................... 332
specifications.............................. 324, 393
speed ratings...................................... 325
tread wear indicators.......................... 323
winter tyres......................................... 324
Transmission............................................ 118
Transponder............................................ 104
Trip computer.......................................... 234
Trip meter.................................................. 78
Trip meter, resetting................ 236, 239, 240
Troubleshooting
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 160
U
Unlocking
from the inside...................................... 57
from the outside................................... 56
USB, connection...................................... 272
TSA - trailer stability assist ............. 142, 316
Tunnel detection........................................ 91
TV............................................................. 291
W
Warning lamp
adaptive cruise control....................... 152
collision warning system.................... 174
stability and traction control system.. 142
Warning lamps
airbags SRS..........................................
alternator not charging.........................
fault in brake system............................
low oil pressure.....................................
parking brake applied...........................
seatbelt reminder..................................
warning.................................................
11
77
77
77
77
77
77
77
Warning sound
collision warning system.................... 174
Warning symbol, airbag system................ 19
Warning symbols....................................... 75
Warning triangle....................................... 331
V
Washer fluid, filling................................... 355
Type approval, remote control key system........................................................... 395
Vanity mirror...................................... 96, 245
Type designation..................................... 378
Vibration damper..................................... 312
Washers
rear window........................................ 102
washer fluid, filling.............................. 355
windscreen......................................... 102
Voice control, mobile phone.................... 287
Water and dirt-repellent coating.............. 104
Volvo Sensus............................................. 80
Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 371
Ventilation................................................ 218
419
11 Alphabetical Index
Waxing..................................................... 371
Weights
kerb weight......................................... 381
11
Wheels
changing.............................................
installation...........................................
rims.....................................................
snow chains........................................
spare wheel........................................
326
328
323
324
326
Wheels and tyres..................................... 322
Whiplash injury, WHIPS............................. 26
WHIPS
child seat/booster cushion................... 26
whiplash injury...................................... 26
Windows, rearview and door mirrors....... 104
Windscreen
Heating....................................... 107, 224
Windscreen washing................................ 102
Windscreen wipers.................................. 101
rain sensor.......................................... 101
Winter driving........................................... 299
Winter tyres.............................................. 324
Wiper blades............................................ 354
changing............................................. 354
cleaning.............................................. 355
420
replacing, rear window....................... 355
service position................................... 354
Wipers and washing................................ 101
Volvo Car Corporation TP 16070 (English), AT 1320, Printed in Sweden, Göteborg 2013, Copyright © 2000-2013 Volvo Car Corporation
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement